JP2019118631A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing fun of a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: shift means for shifting a game state from a first game state to a second game state differing from the first game state; and reproduction control means for reproducing music in the second game state. The reproduction control means reproduces music from the second game state when an ending period of the first game state is shorter than reproduction time of an introduction part of the music.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 53

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  In a pachinko machine, which is a typical gaming machine, an internal drawing of whether or not to shift to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player triggered by the game ball reaching the start winning opening provided on the game board Is performed, and variable display of symbols is started on the display device provided in the game area. Then, when the gaming machine wins the internal lottery, the combination of the specific symbols is finally stopped to notify the player, and the game is shifted to the specific gaming state advantageous to the player. In the specific gaming state, for example, it is controlled to be capable of entering a variable winning device (so-called an attacker) provided in the gaming area, and an award according to the number of balls entered into the variable entering device (winning number) The balls are dispensed.

  In recent years, various proposals have been made in order to suppress the confusion of games and to improve the interest of players. For example, in the final round in the jackpot game, there is known one that can select the effect mode after the jackpot game is ended based on the operation of the player (see Patent Document 1). In the pachinko machine, since the effect pattern corresponding to the effect mode selected by the player is executed in the next winning game and the symbol variation effect to be performed next to the corresponding game, the player's interest in the effect mode to be selected Increase, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game by suppressing the mannerality of the effects during the winning game.

JP, 2013-59448, A

  However, in conventional gaming machines, it can not be said that interest has been improved sufficiently, and there is still room for improvement.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the amusement of a game.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the transition means for shifting the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and the reproduction in the music of the second gaming state are reproduced. The playback control means may play back music from the second gaming state when the ending period of the first gaming state is shorter than the playing time of the intro portion of the music.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the amusement of a game.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure which shows the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a top view which shows an operation button. It is a figure which shows the content of each counter used for internal lottery. It is a figure which shows the success / failure table which memorize | stored the value of the random number elected to generate a big hit. It is a figure which shows the distribution table which memorize | stored the value of the random number which concerns on the distribution destination of the classification of jackpot. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of timer interruption processing. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the prize-winning process for starting openings. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of normal processing. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of main processing. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of game times control processing. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a data setting process. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a setting process of a display continuation time. It is a figure showing a flow chart of game state transition processing. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a big winning opening opening-and-closing process. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a big winning opening opening process. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of open / close execution mode. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a voice emission control device and a display control device. It is a figure which shows the data structure stored in ROM, (a) is a figure which shows the data structure stored in ROM93, (b) is a figure which shows the data structure stored in common ROM96. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating the structure of the register | resistor 95 with which sound output LSI is provided. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process performed with an audio | voice light emission control apparatus. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of an effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a game result and a game state etc. It is a figure explaining the game flow expand | deployed in the pachinko machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a continuous view showing an example of an effect image made to correspond to change display and stop display of a special symbol. It is a continuous diagram showing an example of production of mode transition production performed when it corresponds to a "most advantageous result" in a normal state. It is a continuous diagram showing an example of an effect at the time of big hit (opening and closing execution mode). It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a production | presentation type (effect classification) selection process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart in the other example of the production | presentation type (effect classification) selection process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure explaining transfer processing to the 4th mode M4 of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of transfer processing to 4th mode M4 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transfer process to production | presentation MA of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transfer process to production MB of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transfer process to production MC of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the data used for the shift processing to production of the 4th mode M4 of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transfer process to production | presentation MA of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transfer process to production MB of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transfer process to production MC of 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution for performing execution control of the production | presentation of 3rd Embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining data composition of a register of a 3rd embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining an example of sequence data of a 3rd embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining data composition of ROM for sound light of a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big winning opening opening-and-closing process of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the ending period determination table memorize | stored in ROM of the main control apparatus of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the setting process of the ending period of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the alerting | reporting timing of RUSH rush of 4th Embodiment, and right-handed navigation for RUSH. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transfer process to 4th mode M4 of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the alerting | reporting timing determination table of RUSH rush and the right-handed navi for RUSH memorize | stored in ROM of the sound emission control apparatus of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the other example of the flowchart of the transfer process to 4th mode M4 of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining other examples of shift processing to the 4th mode M4 of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the other example of the production | presentation transfer process to 4th mode M4 of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of transfer process A to 4th mode M4 of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of transfer process B to 4th mode M4 of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of transfer process C to 4th mode M4 of 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic which shows the timing of the production | presentation type (effect classification) selection process of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a production | presentation type (effect classification) selection process of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the alerting | reporting timing of RUSH rush of 5th Embodiment, and the right-handed navigator for RUSH. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of transfer processing to 4th mode M4 of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining other examples of shift processing to the 4th mode M4 of a 5th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the other example of the production | presentation transfer process to 4th mode M4 of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of transfer process D to 4th mode M4 of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transfer process E to 4th mode M4 of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of transfer process F to 4th mode M4 of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a flowchart of transfer process G to 4th mode M4 of 5th Embodiment.

First Embodiment
Next, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the drawings. As a game machine, a general pachinko machine will be described as an example. Further, in the following description, “front”, “rear”, “left”, “right”, “upper” and “lower” refer to a state in which the gaming machine is viewed from the front (player side).

<Pachinko machine>
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment (hereinafter, pachinko machine 10) is rotatable forward with respect to the rectangular outer frame 11 forming the outer shell and the outer frame 11 And an attached game machine body 12.

  The outer frame 11 is a fixed frame which is formed in a rectangular frame shape which opens in the front and rear direction and is installed in a vertical posture on an installation frame (not shown) of the game arcade. The gaming machine main body 12 has an inner frame (not shown) rotatably supported to the front side (player side) by the outer frame 11 and a front side rotatably supported to the front side (player side) by the inner frame. It has a door frame 13, a back pack unit (not shown) rotatably supported on the inner frame to the rear side (opposite to the player), and a locking device 14. In addition, on the left side of the outer frame 11, a prepaid card type ball lending device (CR unit) (not shown) is provided.

  The inner frame (not shown) is supported by one of the right side or the left side of the outer frame 11 with one of the right side or the left side as a support side. The front door frame 13 is supported by one of the right side portion and the left side portion of the inner frame with one of the right side portion and the left side portion as a support side. The back pack unit is supported by one of the right side or the left side of the inner frame with one of the right side or the left side as a support side. The locking device 14 is provided at the lower part of the right side or the left side of the gaming machine body 12 (lower right side in FIG. 1), and has a function to make the gaming machine body 12 unopenable to the outer frame It has a function to make it impossible to open it. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the locking device 14 is a cylinder lock. In the first embodiment, when the key is inserted and then turned to the right, the function of making the gaming machine main body 12 unopenable to the outer frame is released, and when turned to the left, the front door frame 13 is made to the inner frame. The function that can not be opened is released.

  The front door frame 13 is provided so as to cover the entire surface of the inner frame, and has an elliptical window 21 opening in the thickness direction, and a transparent glass plate, a synthetic resin material, etc. fitted in the window 21. And a window panel 22 formed.

  Further, in the front door frame 13, a display lamp device 23 as a light emitting means disposed in the upper portion of the window portion 21, an audio output disposed in the upper left side and the right side of the gaming machine main body 12, and a lower right side And a speaker unit 24 as a navigation means. The display lamp device 23 includes a light emitter (not shown) such as a light bulb in which light emitting elements such as LEDs (light emitting diodes), filaments, and discharge elements are sealed in a spherical shell of glass. In addition, the speaker unit 24 can output voice, sound effects, and the like. Then, the display lamp device 23 is lighted / flickered (light emission effect) in accordance with the symbol change effect in the symbol display device 51 described later (light emission effect), and sound or sound is output from the speaker unit 24 (sound effect). The lamp device 23 and the speaker unit 24 are configured to function as effect executing means.

  Further, the front door frame 13 has an upper side bulging portion 25 and a lower side bulging portion 26 bulging forward (to the player side) below the window portion 21. The upper bulging portion 25 and the lower bulging portion 26 are juxtaposed in the vertical direction. The upper bulging portion 25 is provided inside so as to be opened upward, and has an upper receiving tray 251 which is a receiving tray for storing game balls. Further, the lower side bulging portion 26 is provided inside so as to open upward, and has a lower receiving tray 261 serving as a receiving tray for storing gaming balls. The upper tray 251 is configured such that the bottom surface gradually inclines from the left to the right and tapers at the right side, and the game ball emission mechanism 81 is arranged while aligning the stored game balls one by one. It has the function to lead to

  When the game balls become surplus in the upper tray 251, the game balls are discharged to the lower tray 261. That is, the lower receiving tray 261 has a function of storing the game balls surplus at the upper receiving tray 251. Also, the lower bulging portion 26 is provided with a lever that can slide in the left and right direction, and the player slides the lever so that the gaming ball stored in the lower tray 261 is the lower portion of the lower tray 261. It is configured to be discharged from the In the first embodiment, the upper bulging portion 25 and the lower bulging portion 26 are integrally molded with the front door frame 13 at the lower position of the front door frame 13. The upper bulging portion 25 and the lower bulging portion 26 are also configured to be opened and closed.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a firing handle 27 as a launching means at the lower right position of the gaming machine body 12. The launch handle 27 is biased counterclockwise (counterclockwise), and the player operates the launch handle 27 clockwise (clockwise) to operate the gaming ball launch mechanism 81, thereby turning the launch handle 27 upward. The game balls stored in the tray 251 are shot toward the game area 311 of the game board 31 one ball at a time. In the first embodiment, the game ball launching operation by the game ball launching mechanism 81 is performed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.6 sec). Further, in the first embodiment, the number of game balls fired by the game ball firing mechanism 81 is controlled so as not to exceed 100 balls in one minute.

  The launch handle 27 is configured to change the hitting power of the gaming ball by the gaming ball launch mechanism 81 according to the amount of rotation, and as the player rotates the launch handle 27 clockwise (clockwise) As the hitting power of the playing ball by the playing ball firing mechanism 81 gradually increases, and as the player rotates the firing handle 27 counterclockwise (counterclockwise), the hitting strength of the playing ball by the gaming ball firing mechanism 81 gradually decreases. It is configured. That is, as the player rotates the firing handle 27 clockwise (clockwise), the arrival position of the game ball hit by the game ball firing mechanism 81 on the game board 31 shifts from the left to the right.

  The launch handle 27 is also provided with a touch sensor 271 for detecting that the player is touching the handle, and a launch stop switch 272 for temporarily stopping the launch of the game ball. The firing of the game ball by the game ball firing mechanism 81 is performed when the firing handle 27 is turned and the touch sensor 271 is on and the firing stop switch 272 is off, and the touch sensor 271 is off or the firing stop switch 272 When is on, the game ball is not fired.

  Further, on the upper surface of the upper bulging portion 25, an operation button 28 as an operation means is provided. The operation button 28 is used when selecting the effect type (effect type) or the like, and the player can select the effect type by operating the operation button 28. As shown in FIG. 5, the operation button 28 includes a decision button 281 disposed at the center, a left direction button 282 disposed on the left side of the decision button 281, and a right direction button 283 disposed on the right side of the decision button 281. And have. At the time of selecting the effect type, the player presses the left direction button 282 and the right direction button 283 to select the effect type, and presses the decision button 281 arranged at the center to determine the effect type. be able to. Furthermore, on the upper surface of the upper bulged portion 25, a ball lending button (not shown) for instructing the lending of gaming balls within the range of the value balance (value balance) of the card inserted in the CR unit and the CR unit A return button (not shown) is provided to instruct return of the inserted card.

<Play board 31>
The game board 31 is a substantially rectangular plate member formed of a veneer material or a synthetic resin material. As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 31 has a guide portion 34 (hereinafter referred to as “the inner rail 32 and an outer rail 33”) which is curved in a substantially circular shape provided on the front side (player side). Also referred to as a guide rail). The guide rail 34 has a function of guiding the game ball launched by the game ball launch mechanism 81 to the upper left portion of the game board 31. The player operates the firing handle 27 to play a game by launching a game ball into the substantially circular game area 311 defined by the guide rail 34. In addition, at the end of the guide rail 34, a return part 31a is provided so that the gaming balls punched into the game area 311 do not return into the guide rail 34. In addition, the game ball thrown in in the game area 311 is detected by the hit ball detection sensor (not shown) provided in the back pack unit (not shown), and the ball detection signal of the hit ball detection sensor is a hole. It is configured to be output to a computer (not shown). In the first embodiment, the hitting ball detection sensor is provided in the back pack unit, but may be provided in another place, for example, the game board 31.

  In addition, the gaming board 31 is subjected to router processing, whereby a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the thickness direction are formed at appropriate positions. Further, at each opening of the game board 31, a general winning opening 35, a first starting opening 36, a second starting opening 37, a variable winning device 38 and an out opening 39 are provided. The positions and the number of openings formed in the game area 311 of the game board 31 can be appropriately changed as necessary. The game board 31 is provided with through gates 41 on the central left side and the central right side. A main display device 42 is provided at a position where the player of the game board 31 can visually recognize. A variable display unit 43 is provided at a central portion of the game board 31. In the game board 31, a large number of game nails 44 are provided in the game area 311, and a rotation guide member 45 (so-called “wind mill”) is disposed on the right side of the game board 31. The rotation guide member 45 is disposed on the game board 31 so as to freely rotate by the contact of the game balls flowing down the game area 311. For this reason, when the game ball flowing down the game area 311 contacts the game nail 44 or the rotation guide member 45, the flow direction of the game ball changes irregularly (randomly).

  In the first embodiment, the ball entry means that the game ball passes through the opening, and the game sphere is not only discharged from the game area 311 after passing through the opening, but also after passing through the opening Also included is an aspect of continuing the flow of the game area 311 without being discharged from the area 311. Also, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out slot 39, the entry of the game ball into various winning openings is also referred to as winning. Further, entering the through gate 41 means continuing the flow of the game area without being discharged from the game area after passing through the gate provided in the game area 311. The entry into the through gate 41 is also referred to as a prize as in the entry into the various winning openings.

<Start winning combination>
As shown in FIG. 2, the first starting opening 36 and the second starting opening 37 are juxtaposed in the vertical positional relationship, that is, in the vertical direction. Here, the first starting opening 36 located on the upper side is a normally open type winning opening that is always open upward in the gaming area 311. In addition, an electric part (a so-called electric tulip (electric chow)) comprising a pair of opening and closing members 371 configured to be able to open and close the second starting opening 37 on both left and right sides sandwiching the second starting opening 37 located on the lower side. Is provided. A motorized accessory drive unit 372 as a drive means is connected to the pair of opening and closing members 371, and the pair of opening and closing members 371 closes the second starting port 37 in response to the drive of the motorized accessory drive unit 372. It is configured to be displaced into a position and an open position to open. In the first embodiment, the pair of opening and closing members 371 for opening and closing the second starting opening 37 is disposed on the left and right sides sandwiching the second starting opening 37, and the pair of opening and closing members 371 is driven with the drive of the electric part drive portion 372. Are driven to be close to and away from each other.

  That is, in the first embodiment, the first starting opening 36 is configured such that gaming balls flowing down the gaming area 311 can always be prized with a certain probability, and the second starting opening 37 drives the electric combination driving part 372 Thus, the winning probability of the game ball is configured to be variable. Here, in the state where the opening and closing members 371 provided on the left and right sides sandwiching the second starting opening 37 are displaced to the closing position (hereinafter referred to as electric power closing state), winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 37 is prevented The probability that the gaming ball will win the second starting opening 37 is lower than the probability that the gaming ball will win the first starting opening 36. Further, in a state where the open / close member 371 is displaced to the open position (hereinafter referred to as an open state), the gaming ball received by the open / close member 371 is guided to the second start opening 37 and played to the first start opening 36 The probability of the game ball winning to the second starting opening 37 is higher than the probability of the ball winning.

  In addition, in place of the electronic combination closed state and the electronic combination open state described above, the electric combination is in a state where it is difficult for the game ball to be won in the second starting port 37 (in contrast to the electronic combination closed state, entry of gaming balls is possible State) and a state in which the game ball is likely to win a prize in the second starting opening 37 may be switched.

<Variable winning device>
As shown in FIG. 2, the variable winning device 38 is formed in a rectangular plate shape so as to freely open and close a special winning opening 381 (hereinafter, a special winning opening) as a special winning device opened in the game area 311. A door (opening / closing member, opening / closing means) 382 is provided, and is configured to be displaced to a closed state in which the open / close door 382 is closed and an open state in which it is opened. In the first embodiment, the special winning opening is opened and closed by swinging the opening and closing door 382 in the front and rear direction. In FIG. 2, the special winning opening 381 is closed by the opening and closing door 382. Is shown.

  In the first embodiment, the open / close door 382 is set in the closed state where the gaming ball can not win in the normal state. When the internal lottery has won the transition to the open / close execution mode and the open / close execution mode, the open / close door 382 is set in the open state where the gaming ball can win. The open / close execution mode (specific control state) means a mode in which the open / close door 382 is set in the open state, and the game ball can be entered into the big winning opening 381. In the first embodiment, after the open / close door 382 is set to the open state in the open / close execution mode, one round game is performed until the closed state is set to the closed state again, but the open / close door 382 in one round game The number of opening and closing of is arbitrary. For example, the open / close door 382 may be opened and closed several times (two times or more) in one round game, in which case the open state and the closed state of the open / close door 382 are set multiple times in one round game It will be.

  The player maximizes the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 27, and the reaching position of the gaming ball at the top of the game area is from the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit portion is formed to the side of the opposite side. By shifting (so-called right strike), it is possible to guide the gaming ball to the variable winning device 38 while avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like.

<Detection sensor>
The game board 31 detects entry of the game ball in the vicinity of the provided general winning opening 35, the first starting opening 36, the second starting opening 37 and the various winning openings of the large winning opening 381 of the variable winning device 38. The detection sensors 501 to 504 are provided (see FIG. 4). Further, these detection sensors 501 to 504 are disposed on the back side of the game board 31, the detection sensor 501 detects the entering of the game ball into the general winning opening 35, and the detection sensor 502 goes to the first starting opening 36. The detection sensor 503 detects the entrance of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 37, and the detection sensor 504 the entrance of the gaming ball to the big winning opening 381 of the variable winning device 38 To detect The detection sensors 501 to 504 are connected to the main control board 61 disposed on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 by wiring, and detection of gaming balls by the detection sensors 501 to 504 (general winning opening 35, first starting opening 36) And a predetermined number of prize balls (the game balls obtained by winning) are paid out triggered by the second starting port 37 and the winning of game balls to various winning ports of the big winning port 381 of the variable winning device 38) ing.

  In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 pays out ten winning balls when the ball is detected by the detection sensor 501, and the detection sensor 502 detects the ball into the first starting hole 36. Is detected, three prize balls are paid out, and when entering the second starting opening 37 is detected by the detection sensor 503, two prize balls are paid out and the detection sensor 504 of the variable winning device 38 When entry to the special winning opening 381 is detected, 13 prize balls are paid out. In addition, the number of payouts of the winning balls by the winning of the gaming balls to the various winning openings is not limited to these, and can be appropriately changed. For example, the number of winning balls to be paid out by the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 36 and the number of winning balls to be paid out by the winning of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 37 may be equal. Further, a plurality (two or more) of variable winning devices 38 are provided in the game area 311 of the game board 31, and the number of winning balls to be paid out for each winning in the large winning opening 381 of the plurality of variable winning devices 38 is made different. For example, when two variable winning devices 38 are provided, the number of winning balls to be paid out by the winning of the large winning opening 381 of each of the variable winning devices 38 may be 13 and 14, respectively.

  The out port 39 is provided at the bottom of the game area 311 of the game board 31, and game balls that have not entered the various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area 311 through the out port 39. The out port 39 is disposed on the back side of the game board 31 and includes a detection sensor 505 that detects the ball entering of the game ball (see FIG. 4).

  In addition, each through gate 41 is provided on the back side of the game board 31 and includes a detection sensor 506 that detects the entering of the game ball (see FIG. 4). The detection sensors 505 and 506 are connected by wiring to the main control board 61 disposed on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. However, the pachinko machine 10 is different from the case where ball entry to various winning openings occurs. If the ball 39 and each through gate 41 enter, the balls are not paid out.

  In addition, each detection sensor 501-506 should just be able to detect entering of the game ball to various winning a prize mouths separately, for example, an electromagnetic induction sensor, a transmission type photo sensor, etc. can be used.

<Display of symbol>
The main display unit 42 has a main display unit 46, a character display unit 47, and a round display unit 48. A segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, a dot display, etc. The plurality of display devices are arranged. The main display unit 42 is provided on the game board 31 so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side, and can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the window panel 22. ing. Further, the distance (gap) between the main display 42 and the window panel 22 is narrower than the outer diameter of the gaming ball. Therefore, the game ball is prevented from flowing down the gap between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22, that is, in front of the main display device 42.

<Main Display 46>
The main display unit 46 is performed based on the first result display unit 461 for displaying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the first starting opening 36 and the winning of the second starting opening 37. And a second result display unit 462 for displaying the result of the internal lottery (see FIG. 4).

<First Result Display Unit 461>
The first result display unit 461 executes variable display of symbols triggered by winning in the first starting opening 36, and is performed based on winning in the first starting opening 36 as a result of stopping the variable display. Display the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, in response to the winning of the game ball in the first start opening 36, the first result display unit 461 is sequentially turned on and off, and flickering fluctuation display is performed, and finally the first result display unit 461 is performed. The special symbol of a plurality of types (types) is to be displayed by the lighting position (stop result) in which the symbol is definitely lit. If the result of the internal lottery is a result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the first result display unit 461 displays a predetermined stop result, and then the pachinko machine 10 transitions to the open / close execution mode .

<Second Result Display Unit 462>
The second result display unit 462 executes variable display of symbols triggered by winning on the second starting opening 37, and is performed based on the winning on the second starting opening 37 as a result of stopping the variable display. Display the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, the second result display unit 462 is finally turned on and off with the second result display unit 462 sequentially turned on and off in response to the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 37. A special symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as a special view) of a plurality of types (types) is displayed by the lighting position (stop result) in which the symbol is definitely lit. If the result of the internal lottery is a result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the second result display unit 462 displays a predetermined stop result, and then the pachinko machine 10 transitions to the open / close execution mode .

  Here, the special figure is a symbol for notification showing the result of the internal lottery such as whether it is a big hit (specific game) or not, and in the first result display portion 461 and the second result display portion 462, the lighting position of the LED etc. Enables to display a plurality of types of special drawings. Specifically, as the special views that can be displayed in the first result display unit 461 and the second result display unit 462, there are a plurality of types of special views as jackpot display results that can recognize a jackpot, and deviations that can be recognized One type of special drawing as a display result is set. Then, one special map is determined according to the result of the lottery per special image, and the special map determined earlier is stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 461 or the second result display unit 462 as a stop result of the variable display. Be done.

  In the following description, the variable display performed in the first result display unit 461 is referred to as "special figure 1 variable display", and as a result of the special view 1 variable display, the fixed display is displayed on the first result display unit 461 The special figure is also called special figure 1. Similarly, the variable display performed in the second result display unit 462 is referred to as the "second special view variable display", and the special view displayed as the fixed stop display in the second result display unit 462 as a result of the second special view variable display. Is also called Special Figure 2.

<Display part 47 for roles>
The prize display unit 47 uses the winning on each through gate 41 as a trigger to execute variable display of symbols, and as a result of stopping the variable display, an internal lottery performed based on the winning on each through gate 41 Display the result of Specifically, in response to the winning of the game ball on each through gate 41, a blink display is performed such that the character display portion 47 is sequentially turned on / off, and finally the character display portion 47 is displayed. A plurality of types of ordinary symbols (hereinafter also referred to as "common figures") are displayed by the lighting position (stop result) which is definitely lit. When the result of the internal lottery corresponds to the shift to the open state, the display unit 47 for a role item displays a predetermined stop result, and thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open state. Do. In the electric power opening state, the opening / closing member 371 of the motorized part provided at the second start port 37 is in the open state.

<Round Display Unit 48>
Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the jackpot determination is won, one jackpot game is determined from among a plurality of types of jackpot games (specific games) described later. In the jackpot game, a plurality of types of rounds having different numbers of rounds are set, and the number of rounds of the winning jackpot game is notified by the round display unit 48. In the first embodiment, two types of “15 times” and “2 times” are set as the number of rounds for the jackpot game, and the number of rounds is notified by the lighting pattern of the LED provided in the round display unit 48. In the first embodiment, the round display unit 48 includes two LEDs arranged on the left and right, and the left LED lights up to notify that the number of rounds is a “big hit” game of “15 times”, and the right side is displayed. It is notified that it is a jackpot game of the round number "2 times" by LED of 1 being lighted.

  In the first embodiment, the main display unit 46 and the feature display unit 47 are configured by arranging a plurality of display devices such as a segment display and a dot display, but the present invention is limited to this. However, it may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix. In addition, as the symbols to be variably displayed on the main display unit 46 and the character display 47, a configuration to variably display a plurality of characters, a configuration to variably display a plurality of symbols, a configuration to variably display a plurality of characters Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of different colors are switched and displayed. Moreover, in 1st Embodiment, although the round display part 48 alert | reports the number of round games by the light emission display which used LED, it is not limited to this, A liquid crystal display device, an organic electroluminescence display, The number of round games may be notified by another type of display device such as a CRT or dot matrix. The display areas of the main display unit 46, the character display area 47, and the round display unit 48 are set to be extremely small compared to display areas such as notification effects to be described later that are executed by the symbol display device 51, For the player focusing on various effects performed by the symbol display device 51, each information can be easily recognized in the lighting state of the main display portion 46, the symbol display portion 47, and the round display portion 48. It is difficult.

  Further, the variable display unit 43 includes a symbol display device 51 that variably displays (variable display or switching display) a symbol which is a kind of symbol. Further, the variable display unit 43 includes a center frame 52 disposed so as to surround the symbol display device 51. An upper portion of the center frame 52 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling in front of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered by the fall of the game ball. It is a structure.

<Symbol display device 51>
The symbol display device 51 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and is detachably assembled to the game board 31 so that the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 faces the front side (player's side) of the game board 31 It is done. The symbol display device 51 is triggered by a decorative symbol for presentation (hereinafter also referred to as a decoration drawing) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 36 or the second start port 37). Start changing display of. That is, when the symbol display device 51 executes the change display on the first result display unit 461 of the main display unit 46 and the change display on the second result display unit 462 of the main display unit 46, To perform variable display. The symbol display device 51 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, etc., as well as a drum symbol display device or a dot matrix symbol display device A variety of conventionally known display devices capable of stopping and fluctuating various symbols such as can be adopted.

  In the symbol display device 51 according to the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, a plurality of symbol display rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 capable of variably displaying a decoration drawing are set, and the first starting opening 36 or the first starting opening 36 With the winning of the start opening 37 as a trigger, the decoration drawing is started to change in each of the symbol display rows Z1, Z2, and Z3. In addition, the effective stop position of the decoration figure is set to each design display column Z1, Z2, Z3, respectively, the stop design which combines the effective stop position of each design display column Z1, Z2, Z3 with the symbol fluctuation rendition It is designed to derive the symbol combination of the decoration that is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. In the symbol display device 51 of the first embodiment, three symbol display rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are set horizontally and horizontally, and the symbol drawing is effective for each symbol display row Z1, Z2 and Z3. The stop position is determined one by one, and a symbol variation effect consisting of three rows of decoration drawings is performed. That is, one stop symbol effective line L is set in the symbol display device 51 of the first embodiment. In the following description, the symbol display column Z1, the symbol display column Z2 and the symbol display column Z3 may be referred to sequentially from the left side.

  In addition, the display area of the decoration drawing in each symbol display column Z1, Z2, Z3 of the symbol display device 51 is constituted by a large area as compared with the first result display portion 461 and the second result display portion 462, and The decoration is displayed much larger than the figure. Therefore, the player can visually recognize whether it is a big hit or a drop from the symbol combination stop-displayed on the stop symbol effective line L of the symbol display device 51.

  The symbol display device 51 is configured to perform variation display such that the decoration drawing moves along a predetermined variation direction (in the first embodiment, from the top to the bottom in the first embodiment) along with the start of the symbol variation production. The decorative drawings that are variably displayed are stopped and displayed in the predetermined stop order at the effective stop positions of the respective symbol display rows Z1, Z2, and Z3. Further, the symbol display device 51 temporarily displays the decoration on the effective stop position of each of the symbol display rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 before the symbol variation production is finished, and the symbol display rows Z1, Z2 and Z3. By stopping and displaying the decoration figure of one, one time of symbol variation production ends. That is, the symbol variation effect (special figure 1 variation display and second special figure variation display) is from the start of variation of the decoration figure (special figure 1 and special figure 2) performed based on one start reservation information to the decision stop It is supposed to be run once.

  Here, the "variation display" is a state in which the decorative drawings displayed at the effective stop position in each of the symbol display columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are changed in a predetermined order. In addition, with "decision stop" of the decoration figure, the decoration figure continues at the effective stop position in each symbol display row Z1, Z2, Z3 for a predetermined special figure fluctuation interval time (for example, 600 ms (milliseconds)) It is a state where it is stopped and displayed. In addition, with the “temporary stop” of the decoration drawing, the decoration drawing displayed so as to stay at the effective stop position in each of the symbol display columns Z1, Z2, Z3 is not continuously stopped during the special drawing fluctuation interval time It is. That is, the temporary stop of the decoration drawing includes the state in which the decoration drawing is displayed in the fluctuation state at the effective stop position, and the state in which the stop display is performed in a shorter time than the special drawing fluctuation interval time.

  Further, in the first result display unit 461 and the symbol display device 51, the special view 1 change display and the symbol change presentation relating to the special view 1 change display are started, and the special view 1 and the decoration view are displayed for a definite stop. Similarly, in the second result display unit 462 and the symbol display device 51, the second special view variation display and the symbol variation presentation relating to the second special view variation display are started, and the special view 2 and the decoration view are displayed for a definite stop Ru. The first result display unit 461 and the second result display unit 462 do not simultaneously display the special view variation display, and the special view variation is performed in either the first result display unit 461 or the second result display unit 462 When the display is being performed, the other special view variable display is not performed.

  Here, in the symbol display device 51 according to the first embodiment, ten kinds of numerals of “0” to “9” are set as basic decoration drawings in each symbol display row Z1, Z2, Z3. The decoration drawing is displayed in a variable manner in order in each of the symbol display columns Z1, Z2, and Z3. In addition, the aspect of the fluctuation display of the symbol in the symbol display apparatus 51 is not limited to this, but is arbitrary. For example, the number of symbol rows, the direction of scrolling of each symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols in each symbol row may be a combination of a picture and a number instead of the number only, or may be a picture only. In addition, it is possible that the decoration pattern has a first identification symbol that the player can positively recognize that a definite change state (described later) is given after the end of the big hit game and a positive change state after the big hit game is over. It is classified into the second identification symbol that can non-determinately recognize the presence of

  Here, as the first identification symbol, even if appropriately set from among the basic decoration drawings, special decoration drawings defined in addition to the basic decoration drawings can be used. For example, odd symbols of “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, “9” or even symbols of “0”, “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” An even symbol of "0", "2", "4", "6" and "8" can be used as a second identification symbol. In this manner, the player can display the symbol display columns Z1, Z2, Z3 displayed on the symbol display column 51 in the determination stop position (stop symbol effective line L) at the valid stop positions of the symbol display columns Z1, Z2, Z3. It is possible to grasp whether or not the hit game is given by the figure. In the first embodiment, as the winning combination of symbols, the symbol combination in which the same decoration is fixedly displayed at the effective stop position of each symbol display row (for example, “1 · 1 · 1”, “2 · 2 · 2” Etc) is set.

  The symbol combination of the decoration that can recognize the jackpot becomes a hit display result, and a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given after the end of the symbol variation effect. On the other hand, in the case where the symbols in all the rows displayed in a fixed stop position at the effective stop position of the symbol display device 51 are different even by one, the symbol combination is basically "out" that the jackpot game is not provided Can recognize. The symbol combination of the decoration that can recognize this deviation is the outlier display result.

  Further, on the symbol display device 51, as a result of the special view variation display in the first result display unit 461 and the second result display unit 462, the symbol combination of the decoration according to the special view to be displayed is displayed. That is, the special figure displayed on the first result display unit 461 and the second result display unit 462 respectively corresponds to the symbol combination of the decoration displayed on the symbol display device 51, and when the symbol variation effect ends The special figure is fixedly stopped in the first result display unit 461 and the second result display unit 462, and the decoration figure is displayed in the fixed display on each of the symbol display columns Z1, Z2, Z3 of the symbol display device 51. ing. In addition, it is not necessary to necessarily make the symbol combination of the decoration figure with respect to a special symbol one-on-one, and you may make it correspond the symbol combination by several decoration figures with respect to one special symbol.

  The center frame 52 includes a first holding lamp portion 53 provided in the lower left side area of the symbol display device 51, a second holding lamp portion 54 provided in the lower right side area of the symbol display device 51, and the symbol display And a third holding lamp unit 55 provided in the upper area of the device 51.

<Hold lamp>
The first holding lamp unit 53 is provided with an LED for displaying the number of holding game balls that have been won in the first starting opening 36, and the LEDs are lit by the same number as the number of holding game balls. The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment can hold up to four gaming balls. Therefore, the number of LEDs provided in the first holding lamp unit 53 is also four, which is the same as the maximum number of holding balls. The first hold lamp unit 53 corresponds to the variable display of the first result display unit 461 and the symbol display device 51. That is, the number of holdings displayed in the first holding lamp unit 53 is incremented by one when the game ball reaches the first starting opening 36 and is decremented by one each time the first result display unit 461 is subjected to variable display. Ru.

  The second holding lamp unit 54 is provided with an LED for displaying the number of holding game balls that have been won in the second starting opening 37, and the LEDs are lit by the same number as the number of holding game balls. The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment can hold up to four gaming balls. Therefore, the number of LEDs provided in the second holding lamp unit 54 is also four, which is the same as the maximum number of holding balls. Further, the second hold lamp unit 54 corresponds to the variable display of the second result display unit 462 and the symbol display device 51. That is, the number of reservations displayed in the second storage lamp unit 54 is incremented by one when the game ball reaches the second starting opening 37 and is decremented by one each time the second result display unit 462 is subjected to fluctuation display. Ru.

  The third holding lamp unit 55 is provided with an LED for displaying the number of holding game balls on each through gate 41, and the LED lights in accordance with the number of holding game balls. The third holding lamp unit 55 can hold up to four gaming balls at maximum in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. Therefore, the number of LEDs provided in the third holding lamp unit 55 is also four, which is the same as the maximum number of holding balls. Further, the second holding lamp unit 54 corresponds to the variable display of the display unit 47. That is, the number of reservations displayed on the third reservation lamp unit 55 is incremented by one when the game ball reaches each through gate 41 and is decremented by one each time the display of the character display unit 47 is changed. .

  The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to notify the number of game balls on hold by turning on the LEDs of the respective hold lamp units 53 to 55, but the symbol display device 51 is used as an image. , And other configurations such as notifying the number of holding game balls that have won a prize to the first start opening 36, the second start opening 37, and each through gate 41 may be employed. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of LEDs provided in each of the storage lamp units 53 to 55 is four corresponding to the maximum number of holdings 4. For example, two LEDs are juxtaposed, If the number of reservations is "1" to "2", the LED will be "lit" sequentially from the left or right, and if the number of reservations is "3" to "4", the number of reservations will be "blinking" sequentially from the left or right May be notified to the player.

<Electrical configuration>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, an audio light emission control device 90, and a display control device 100. These devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 supplies the necessary power to the payout control device 70 that executes the payout control that causes the payout device 71 to pay out the gaming balls described above, and the pachinko machine 10, and a power supply that controls the gaming ball firing mechanism 81. -A launch control device 80 is provided, and these devices are mounted on the back pack unit.

  The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the pachinko machine 10, and a power failure monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. Main controller 60 is provided with a substrate box that houses main control substrate 61 and the like. The substrate box may be provided with a trace structure that leaves a trace on its opening. Specifically, as a trace means, a substrate box is configured by combining a plurality of case bodies, and a configuration that provides a connecting portion (crimping portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion when separating each case body, peeling off In this case, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of peeling off because the adhesive layer remains as a bonding object is pasted across the boundaries between the plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure etc. which apply an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between these case bodies are employable.

  The main control board 61 includes an MPU (Micro-Processing Unit) 62 mounted on the main control board 61, and a ROM (Read Only Memory) 63 and a RAM (Random Access Memory) 64 constituting the MPU 62. There is. The MPU 62 is a semiconductor element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, etc. are integrated into one chip in addition to the ROM 63 and the RAM 64. is there. In the first embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62. However, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 may be separately integrated into chips. Further, although the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are separate memories physically separated from each other, they may be one memory not separated physically and an area of the ROM 63 and an area of the RAM 64 may be provided by logical addresses. . In this case, for example, the ROM may be provided with the specific area in the RAM as the write prohibition. The same applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 60.

  The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is used as a main storage device of the MPU 62. The ROM 63 is a non-volatile memory that does not require an external power supply to hold stored information (data), and is a semiconductor element that can not be written. The ROM 63 has a plurality of areas (areas) logically separated by logical addresses. For example, the success / failure table storage area 631, the distribution table storage area 632, the reach table storage area 633, the change It has various areas such as a table storage area 634. These areas will be described in detail later.

  The RAM 64 is a semiconductor memory capable of arbitrarily writing and erasing information. The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when reading and executing the control program stored in the ROM 63, and an external power supply is required to retain the stored information. Volatile memory. The RAM 64 has a plurality of areas (areas) logically separated by logical addresses, and, for example, various counter areas 641, a holding ball storage area 642, a hold area 643, a stop result storage There are various areas such as the area 644. These areas will be described in detail later. In the first embodiment, a volatile memory such as a dynamic random access memory (DRAM) or a static random access memory (SRAM) is used as the RAM 64. However, a nonvolatile memory such as a magnetoresistive random access memory (MRAM) is used as the RAM 64. A memory may be used.

  The MPU 62 includes an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). The input port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65 provided in the main control device 60 and the plurality of detection sensors 501 to 506. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the sound emission control device 90. The sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 connected to the sound emission control device 90 will be described in detail later. Further, the output port of the MPU 62 is an electric combination drive unit 372 for opening and closing the opening and closing member 371 of the second starting port 37, a variable winning drive unit 383 for opening and closing the opening and closing door 382 of the variable winning device 38, and main display It is connected to the part 46 and the display part 47 for prizes.

  Here, the main control board 61 has a driver circuit (not shown), and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various driving units and the like through the driver circuit. Specifically, in the open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the motorized accessory drive unit 372 to open and close the opening and closing member 371. Further, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 383 to open / close the open / close door 382 of the variable winning device 38. In each game session, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display unit 46 to display the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning on the starting openings 36, 37. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes display control of the display portion 47 for a gift and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning on each through gate 41.

  The power failure monitoring board 65 relays the main control board 61 and the power and emission control device 80 having a function of supplying operating power, and monitors the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts output from the power and emission control device 80. . The MPU 62 receives power (24 V DC) via the power failure monitoring board 65. Further, the MPU 62 performs the winning determination (ball-entering determination) on the various winning openings, the out opening 39, and the respective through gates 41 based on the detection results of the detection sensors 501 to 506. The MPU 62 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination on the first start opening 36 or the second start opening 37.

  The payout control device 70, based on the command (control command) transmitted from the main control device 60, gives the payout device 71 a prize ball (a game ball obtained by winning) and a rental ball (a game ball to be lent to a player) Execute the payout control to make the payout of

  The power supply and emission control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. The power supply and emission control device 80 includes an AC-DC converter that generates operation power necessary for the main control board 61, the payout control device 70, and the like based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply. The generated operating power is supplied to each device. The power supply and emission control device 80 is provided with a power supply unit for power interruption such as a backup capacitor. The power supply unit for powering off supplies power for storing and holding to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 when power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

  The power supply and emission control device 80 executes emission control for causing the game ball emission mechanism 81 to emit game balls. Here, the game ball firing mechanism 81 includes a firing rail extending toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 31, a ball feeding device for supplying the game balls stored in the upper tray 251 onto the firing rail, and the firing rail. And a solenoid, which is an electric actuator that causes the game ball supplied to the control unit 34 to be emitted toward the guide rail 34. When the power supply and emission control device 80 and predetermined emission conditions (when the emission handle 27 is rotated, the touch sensor 271 is on, and the emission stop switch 272 is off) are ready, this solenoid is used. To supply a drive signal (fire permission signal) to fire the game ball.

  In the first embodiment, the game ball launch mechanism 81 of the pachinko machine 10 adopts a method of launching the game ball by the linear expansion and contraction operation of the plunger type solenoid, but is directly connected to the rotary shaft of the rotary solenoid. The batting ball may be operated to shoot the game ball, or the batting ball supported at another position may be operated to punch the game ball against the rotation of the motor. Specifically, in the method of launching a game ball by a motor, the motor and the hit ball are supported at different positions, and the hit ball is operated by rotation of a cam connected to the motor. A hit ball operated by a motor (cam) strikes a game ball by operating in the reverse direction due to the elasticity of a connected spring or the like and strikes the game area 311 of the game board 31. Also, in the method of launching the game ball by the rotary solenoid, the game ball is hit by rotating the rotation axis in response to the pulse from the power supply / fire control device 80, and the game ball is sent to the game area 311 of the game board 31. Be fired. The hit ball directly connected to the rotary shaft of the rotary solenoid rotates to the support position of the game ball to hit the game ball on the firing rail, and the game ball is fired. After hitting, the torque of the rotary solenoid disappears, and the hitting rod collides with the stopper, rotates in the opposite direction by its own weight, and stops at the position before operation by the stopper. Further, in the method of launching the game ball by the plunger type solenoid, the ball is directly connected to the movable iron core of the plunger type solenoid, and the game ball is hit by the linear reciprocation of this. The game ball is fired. In addition, the plunger type solenoid is a type that strikes the hitting ball by energizing the solenoid and compresses the spring by retracting the hitting rod by energizing, advancing the hitting ball by the elasticity of the spring and hitting the gaming ball. Either may be used.

  Further, the ball feeding device of the game ball launching mechanism 81 may be either mechanical or magnetic. In the case of the mechanical type, the ball feeding device is operated using the power of a motor that drives a hit ball. In the case of the mechanical type, since the driving source of the hitting ball and the ball feeding device are the same, supplying the game balls onto the firing rail one by one to the firing rail according to the timing of the hitting with a simple structure. Is possible. Also, in the case of the magnet type, the ball feed is operated by an independent solenoid separately from the operation of the hit ball, and the ball game ball is supplied onto the launch rail one ball at a time. The magnet type is preferably adopted when the game ball launch mechanism 81 uses a rotary solenoid or a plunger solenoid to launch a game ball.

<Internal lottery>
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used for the internal lottery. The "internal lottery" is a lottery as to whether or not to shift to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player, triggered by the game ball's winning on the starting winning opening provided on the game board. As shown in FIG. 6, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery or the like by using values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4. Specifically, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for lottery of jackpot occurrence, and when jackpot is generated, uses the jackpot type counter C2 for lottery of the jackpot type, and generates reach display or not The reach random number counter C3 is used for the lottery of. The MPU 62 uses the random number initial value counter CINI for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and uses the variation type counter CS for determining the display continuation time in the main display unit 46 and the symbol display device 51. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the motorized product counter C4 in a drawing of whether or not the opening and closing member 371 of the second starting opening 37 is in the open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 641 (see FIG. 6) of the RAM 64.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter which is incremented (increased) by 1 to the previous value each time updating and reaches a predetermined maximum value, and then returns to 0. Each counter is updated regularly (for example, every 4 msec). The updated value is stored in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 64. Among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 is obtained when the game ball wins the first starting opening 36 or the second starting opening 37 It stores in the holding ball storage area 642 (refer FIG. 6) provided as an acquisition information storage means in RAM64 at the timing to which it was carried out. In addition, among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the motorized product counter C4 is stored in the holding position 643 (see FIG. 6) of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins each through gate 41. Be done.

  The holding ball storage area 642 includes a first result display unit reserved area Ra, a second result display unit reserved area Rb, and an execution area AE.

  The first result display unit reserve area Ra provided as the first acquired information storage means includes four storage areas of the first area Ra1 to the fourth area Ra4. In each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4, a storage capacity capable of storing one set of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set. The MPU 62 sets each set of values for the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 as hold information to each area Ra1 to Ra4 according to the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 36. The values are sequentially stored in the areas Ra1 to Ra4 sequentially from the values acquired earlier. Specifically, the MPU 62 holds the hold information in the order of the first area Ra1 → the second area Ra2 → the third area Ra3 → the fourth area Ra4 when winnings to the first starting opening 36 occur a plurality of times consecutively. Store

  In the first embodiment, since the first result display area reserve area Ra includes four storage areas, winnings of game balls to the first starting opening 36 are to be suspended up to four at maximum. ing. In addition, the first result display area reserve area Ra is a memory for writing the number of sets of reserve values, which is the number of sets of values for the big hit random number counter C1 for big hit, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3. An area is provided. In addition, the number of holdings according to the first starting port 36 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be, for example, one to three or five or more.

  The second result display area reserve area Rb provided as the second acquired information storage means includes four storage areas of a first area Rb1 to a fourth area Rb4. Each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing one set of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 sets each set of values for the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 as hold information to the areas Rb1 to Rb4 according to the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 37. The values are sequentially stored in the areas Rb1 to Rb4 sequentially from the values obtained earlier. Specifically, the MPU 62 holds the hold information in the order of the first area Rb1 → the second area Rb2 → the third area Rb3 → the fourth area Rb4 when the winning on the second starting opening 37 occurs a plurality of times consecutively. Are stored chronologically.

  In the first embodiment, since the second result display area reserve area Rb is provided with four storage areas, the winning of game balls to the second start port 37 is to be suspended up to four at maximum. ing. In addition, the second result display area reserve area Rb is a memory for writing the reserve quantity which is the number of sets of the values for the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 which are held. An area is provided. In addition, the number of holdings according to the second starting port 37 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be, for example, one to three or five or more.

  When the execution area AE starts the variable display of each result display unit 461, 462, the suspension information stored in the storage area of the first result display unit reserved area Ra or the second result display unit reserved area Rb It is an area for moving.

  Since the electric circuit holding area 643 has four storage areas, the winning of game balls to each through gate 41 is to be held up to a maximum of four. Although the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is provided with two through gates 41, regardless of which one of the through gates 41 has won, if one of the through gates 41 has a winning, the holding combination area The winning of the game ball to the through gate 41 is suspended at 643. In addition, the number of holdings according to the second starting port 37 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be, for example, one to three or five or more.

<Description of each counter>
Next, details of each counter will be described.

<Counter C4 for Electric Rolls>
First, the motorized product counter C4 will be described. For example, each time it is updated, 1 is added to the value for the motorized product counter C4, and after reaching the maximum value 250, the counter C4 becomes a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 250 by returning to 0. ing. The motorized product counter C4 is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec), and the updated value is an electric symbol of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins each through gate 41. It is stored in the reserve area 643. The MPU 62 draws lottery whether or not the open / close member 371 of the second start port 37 is opened based on the value of the motorized product counter C4 stored in the electric power holding area 643 (motorized product opening lottery). Run.

<Support mode>
Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of modes (hereinafter referred to as support modes) in which the open / close members 371 are in the open state where the game ball can be won in the second starting opening 37. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a relatively low frequency of setting the opening and closing member 371 in the open state, and a high frequency support mode of setting the opening and closing member 371 in the open state. And.

  The low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode have the same probability (for example, both 4/5) in winning the electronic part open state in the electric character part opening lottery, but the high frequency support mode is the low frequency support mode As compared with the above, when winning in the open state, the opening / closing member 371 is set in the open state many times, and the opening time per setting the opening / closing member 371 in the open state is also long. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the opening / closing member 371 in the closing state is shorter than the opening time per one time between the respective opening in the one time the electric power opening state. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, as compared with the low frequency support mode, the secure time at least secured as the time to wait before performing the next electric combination opening lottery after finishing the electric combination opening lottery The duration time of one change display on the product display section 47 is short.

  In the high frequency support mode, the gaming ball is more likely to win the second starting opening 37 as compared to the low frequency support mode. That is, in the low frequency support mode, the gaming ball is more likely to win the first starting opening 36 than the second starting opening 37, and in the high frequency support mode, the gaming ball is second than the first starting opening 36. The probability of winning in the starting opening 37 is high. In addition, when the detection sensor 503 detects a winning on the second starting opening 37, a predetermined number (for example, 2) of award balls are paid out, so in the high frequency support mode, the player You can play with almost no reduction of balls.

  The low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode are not limited to the above. For example, the high frequency support mode may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electronic combination open state in the electric combination open lottery compared to the low frequency support mode. Also, for example, a plurality of types of securing times may be prepared, and the high frequency support mode may be configured to be easy to select a short securing time as compared to the low frequency support mode, and the average of the securing times selected It may be configured to shorten the Furthermore, the high frequency support mode compares the frequency of setting the open / close member 371 in the open state with the low frequency support mode by combining the conditions of the number of times the open / close member 371 is set in the open state, the open time, and the securing time. It may be configured to be relatively high. Further, the types of support modes are not limited to two, and are arbitrary, and may be, for example, three or more.

<Rack hit random number counter>
Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 becomes, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599 by adding 1 to the previous value each time the update is made, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 599. There is. In addition, the jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value each time a loop is performed. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops in the range of 0 to 599, similarly to the jackpot random number counter C1.

  That is, by using the jackpot random number counter C1 and the random number initial value counter CINI, the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment randomizes the next value (initial value) when the final value of the random number sequence is expressed. Perform a jackpot lottery by a plus method determined by a certain value. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the random number advances from the initial value 0 to 095, and when the count progresses to the maximum value 599, the next value does not become 0, and the random number counter C1 for the big hit is a random number The value acquired from the initial value counter CINI is the initial value. Here, assuming that 100 as an initial value is acquired from the random number initial value counter CINI, the jackpot random number counter C1 proceeds to count 100, 101, 102, and counts up to 599, returns to 0 and proceeds to 99 Then, the initial value is acquired again from the random number initial value counter CINI random. That is, in this method, since the initial value is changed whenever the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one revolution, periodicity does not appear at the timing when the specific random number appears.

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec), and the updated value is used as the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the gaming ball is won in the first starting opening 36 or the second starting opening 37. Via the storage area 642 of the RAM 64. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first result display area holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the gaming ball has won in the first starting opening 36, and the gaming ball in the second starting opening 37 Is stored in the second result display area reserved area Rb of the RAM 64 at the timing of winning. Then, based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding ball storage area 642, the MPU 62 executes a lottery for winning jackpot occurrence (winning lottery).

  FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the value of the random number winning the jackpot occurrence. Among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, as shown in FIG. 7, the value of the random number for winning the jackpot occurrence is a hit / fail table storage area 631 of the ROM 63 provided as a pass / fail information group storage unit. Is stored as).

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 has two chance lottery modes of low probability mode (low probability state) which is hard to win big hit occurrence and high probability mode (high probability state) which is easy to win big hit occurrence . Moreover, the success / failure table includes a success / failure table (low probability success / failure information group) for low probability mode shown in FIG. 7A and a success / failure table for high probability mode (high probability success / failure information shown in FIG. 7B). Group) and The MPU 62 executes a lottery for jackpot occurrence by comparing these success / failure tables with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding ball storage area 642.

  These success or failure tables have the results of a plurality of jackpot occurrence lottery results (success or failure results) of the "big hit", the "specially wrong result", and the "normally deviated result". Specifically, under the gaming state (low probability state) where the probability table for the low probability mode is to be referred to when the jackpot is generated, as shown in FIG. The value of is two. Also, under the gaming state (high probability state) where the probability table for the high probability mode is to be referred to in the drawing of the jackpot occurrence, as shown in FIG. 7 (b), the value of the random number for "big hit" is It is 21 pieces. Here, the value of the jackpot winning random number stored in the low probability mode success or failure table is included in the "big hit winning" random number value stored in the high probability mode success or failure table.

  Note that the value and the number of random numbers stored in each success / failure table are arbitrary, and the high probability mode may have a high probability of being a "big hit" compared to the low probability mode. Also, the value of the "big hit" stored in the high probability mode pass / fail table does not include the value of the "big hit" stored in the low probability mode pass / fail table. It may also include a part of the value of the "big hit" random number stored in the low probability mode pass / fail table.

  Further, in each of the lottery modes, a value other than the value of the random number for which the "big hit" is won will result in being out without winning the big hit. Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of outlier results of the “extra outlier result (small hit result)” and the “normal outlier result”. These outlier results are common in that they do not serve as a transition trigger for the success or failure lottery mode or the support mode. However, while the “specially out of place result” becomes an opportunity for transition to the open / close execution mode, the “normally out of place result” is different in that it does not become an opportunity for transition into the open / close execution mode.

  Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 becomes, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 29 by adding 1 to the previous value each time the update is made and reaching the maximum value 29 and then returning to 0. There is. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec), and the updated value is used as a lottery counter buffer at the timing when the gaming ball is won in the first starting opening 36 or the second starting opening 37. Via the storage area 642 of the RAM 64. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the first result display area holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the gaming ball has won in the first starting opening 36, and the gaming ball in the second starting opening 37 Is stored in the second result display area reserved area Rb of the RAM 64 at the timing of winning. Then, based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the holding ball storage area 642, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (sorting lottery) of the jackpot type when a jackpot occurs.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing the value of the random number related to the distribution destination of the jackpot type. As shown in FIG. 8, the value of the random number relating to the distribution destination of the type of jackpot is distributed to the distribution table storage area 632 (see FIG. 4) of the ROM 63 provided as distribution information group storage means. It is stored as a minute information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 8 (a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 8 (b). ing.
The MPU 62 compares the distribution table with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the holding ball storage area 642 to execute the lottery of the jackpot type.

  The first distribution table is a value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the first result display area for holding area Ra to the execution area AE, that is, a value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning on the first starting port 36 Is a table to be referred to when a lottery of the type of jackpot is performed. As shown in FIG. 8 (a), the first distribution table has “low probability result (special distribution result for low probability correspondence)”, “invisible small round high probability result (latency high probability result for small round correspondence) A distribution destination of “a small number of results with high probability (high probability results for small rounds)” and “most favorable results (special distribution results with high probability correspondence)” is used as the distribution destination. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" (probability 1/3) is distributed to "low probability result", and "10 to 10". 14 ”(probability 1/6) is assigned to“ invisible small round high probability result ”,“ 15 to 19 ”(probability 1/6) is assigned to“ explicit small round high probability result ”,“ 20 to 29 ” Probability 1/3) is assigned to the "most favorable result".

  The second distribution table is a value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the second result display section reserve area Rb to the execution area AE, that is, a value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on winning on the second starting port 37. Is a table to be referred to when a lottery of the type of jackpot is performed. As shown in FIG. 8 (b), the second distribution table has two distribution results of “low probability result” and “most favorable result” as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" (probability 1/3) is distributed to "low probability result", and "10 to 10". 29 "(probability 2/3) is assigned to the" most favorable result ".

Each distribution result has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Acceptability lottery mode after opening / closing execution mode (2) Support mode after opening / closing execution mode (3) Mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 38 in the opening / closing execution mode

  First, the difference of the (1) success or failure lottery mode will be described. The “low probability result” is a distribution result in which the success or failure lottery mode is set to the low probability mode after the completion of the opening / closing execution mode regardless of the success / failure lottery mode before the completion of the opening / closing execution mode. This low probability mode continues at least until it becomes a "big hit" in the lottery. The “invisible small round high probability result”, “explicit small round high probability result”, and “most favorable result” are high probability probability of winning lottery mode after closing open mode regardless of the winning lottery mode before closing open mode execution mode It is a distribution result set in the mode. This high probability mode continues at least until it becomes a "big hit" in the lottery.

  Next, the difference in the support mode of (2) will be described. The “low probability result” is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode after the switching execution mode ends regardless of the support mode before the switching execution mode ends. The high frequency support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode when the game times reach the end reference number (specifically, 100 times).

  The “invisible small round high probability result” is a distribution result in which the support mode before the switching execution mode ends is maintained as it is. Here, when the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode is the high frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode is continued at least until the “big hit” is obtained in the pass / fail lottery. “Explicit small-round high-probability result” and “most favorable result” are distribution results in which the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode after the switching execution mode ends regardless of the support mode before the switching execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode continues at least until it becomes a "big hit" in the lottery.

  The difference in the mode of the open / close control of the variable winning device 38 in the open / close execution mode of (3) will be described in detail later.

<Reach random number counter>
Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 238 by adding 1 to the previous value each time the update is made, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 238. . The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec), and the updated value is via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the gaming ball is won in the first starting opening 36 or the second starting opening 37. And stored in the holding ball storage area 642 of the RAM 64. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first result display area holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the gaming ball is won in the first starting opening 36, and the gaming ball is in the second starting opening 37 It is stored in the second result display area reserved area Rb of the RAM 64 at the timing of winning. Then, based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the holding ball storage area 642, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (reach occurrence lottery) as to whether or not the reach display is to be generated.

  The MPU 62 compares the reach table with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the holding ball storage area 642 when the “normal out result” is obtained without becoming the “big hit” in the pass / fail lottery. Thus, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the reach display is to be generated, and the reach display is generated when the reach display is to be generated in this lottery. The reach table is information on the value of the random number related to the occurrence of reach display, and is stored in the reach table storage area 633 (see FIG. 4) of the ROM 63.

  Here, when it becomes a "big hit" in the success or failure lottery and is distributed to the "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 51, as the stop result, the same odd number or the same even number The symbol combination having the symbol is stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L. In addition, when it becomes “big hit winning” in the success or failure lottery and is distributed to “low probability result” in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 51 stops the combination of symbols having the same even number as the stopping result. Stop display on the symbol effective line L. Furthermore, when it becomes "big hit" in the success or failure lottery and is distributed to "invisible small round high probability result" or "explicit small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery, or as "big hit" in the success or failure lottery If the result is “specially out of place result”, the symbol display device 51 is selected when “normally out of form result” is obtained in the result of the lottery, not as a combination of the symbols having the same number as the stop result. A special symbol combination having an unknown number different from each other is stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L.

  The reach display is finally stopped and displayed when the combination of symbols having the same number is stopped (the jackpot is won in the lottery, and it is distributed to the “most favorable result” or the “low probability result” in the sorting lottery. ), Regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, reach display, when it is stopped display of the combination of the special symbol finally ("is a big hit in the winning lottery, and in the sorting lottery" invisible small round high probability result "or" explicit small round high In the case of being assigned to the “confirmed result” or in the case of being “a special out result” without becoming a “big hit” in the success or failure lottery), no occurrence occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  Among the plurality of symbol display columns Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, the aspect of the reach display is a specific symbol display column (in the first embodiment, the symbol display column Z1 and the symbol display column Z3 Reach display (reach display) by displaying stopped on the stop symbol effective line L) and the remaining symbol display row (in the first embodiment, the symbol display row Z2) is variably displayed (reach display) Is configured so that the player can recognize that the) has been triggered. Specifically, the reach display is a symbol combination in which the same decoration figure is stopped and displayed in the symbol display column Z1 and the symbol display column Z3, for example, “1 · ↓ · 1”, “2 · ↓ · 2” (“↓ "Represents that it is in the process of change. In addition, the symbols of a specific symbol display column (symbol display column Z1 and symbol display column Z3) forming reach display are in the state of temporary stop display, and the remaining symbol display columns (symbol display column Z2) After the stop display (provisional stop display), the decoration drawings of all the symbol display columns are displayed in a fixed stop.

  The pachinko machine 10, after the variable display has been started on the symbol display device 51 by generating the reach display, becomes a "big hit" in the hit lottery, before the predetermined stop result is displayed, and the distribution It is possible to make the player expect that it has been distributed to the "low probability result" or the "most favorable result" in the lottery. In addition, the aspect of the reach display is not limited to this, and after displaying a part of the symbol rows in a stopped state, the remaining symbol rows are variably displayed, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background. Alternatively, a predetermined character or the like may be displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G after reducing or displaying each symbol row in a reduced size.

  In the first embodiment, the main control board 61 of the main control device 60 includes the reach random number counter C3, and the MPU 62 stores the reach table stored in the reach table storage area 633 of the ROM 63, and the holding ball storage area. By comparing the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in 642, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the reach indication is to be generated. That is, in the first embodiment, the lottery of whether or not the reach display is generated is executed by the main control device 60, but the lottery of whether or not the reach display is generated is the voice emission control device 90 It may be configured to be executed at

<Expected effect>
The pachinko machine 10 has an expected effect as a kind of variable display of the symbol display device 51. The expected effect is that after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 51, before the predetermined stop result is displayed, the player is expected to expect "big hit" in the lottery. It says a rendition. The reach display described above is also an expectation effect that occurs when the result is a “normal out result” without becoming a “big hit” in the success or failure lottery, and the pachinko machine 10 performs the reach display described above and the advance display 2 Has a kind of expectation effect. The reach display has already been described, and thus the advance display will be described below.

Notice notice
The advance notice display does not become a "big hit" in the hit or draw if the "big hit" is obtained in the pass / fail lottery, or if the "special win result" is obtained without the "big hit" in the hit or draw. This is an expectation effect that makes the effect easier to occur than when the result is "normally out of place". In this preliminary display, instead of making it easy to generate effects, it may be easy to select effects with a low appearance rate, or these may be combined. In the first embodiment, the lottery for determining whether or not the reach indication is generated is executed by the main control device 60, whereas the lottery for determining whether or not the advance notice is generated is the sound emission control device 90. Is executed.

  The form of the advance notice display is that all symbol display columns Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed among the plurality of symbol display columns Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, or a part of the symbol columns In a situation where a plurality of symbol rows (for example, symbol display rows Z2 and Z3) are variably displayed after the stop display (for example, symbol display row Z1) on the stop symbol effective line L, a predetermined character etc. It is displayed on the display screen G as a moving image. This preliminary display occurs in both cases where reach display and reach display are not generated, but is set to occur more easily when reach display is generated than when reach display is not generated. It is done. In addition, a notice display is not limited to this, for example, may change and display a background, and may change and display a form of symbol display columns Z1 to Z3.

  Finally, the variation type counter CS will be described. The fluctuation type counter CS becomes, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 198 by adding 1 to the previous value each time the update is made and reaching the maximum value 198 and then returning to 0. There is. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated at least once every execution of normal processing described later, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time the update is performed. And MPU62 is a display continuation time of the symbol in the main display part 46, and the symbol in the symbol display device 51 based on comparison with the table for fluctuation, and the value of the counter CS for fluctuation classification stored in the buffer for lottery counters. Determine the display duration of the The variation table is information on the value of the random number related to the display continuation time, and is stored in the variation table storage area 634 (see FIG. 4) of the ROM 63 as described above.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, random numbers are generated by the counter circuits (counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, C4) which are ICs for generating random numbers. However, program control by software (so-called soft random numbers) It is possible to count extremely fast compared to. In the case of soft random numbers, they are processed as part of program control of a gaming machine, and therefore, the burden on software is limited under a limited memory space, but in the case of hard random numbers, random numbers are generated by hardware. By this means, it is possible to generate a random number having a count value several times that of the soft random number without burdening the software.

<About various processes executed by main controller 60>
The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes a timer interrupt process and a normal process for advancing a game, and a main process activated upon power on. The timer interrupt process, the normal process, and the main process will be sequentially described below. The MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) in addition to timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing, but the description of this processing is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing. In the timer interrupt process, the MPU 62 executes steps S101 to S105 periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) as shown in FIG.

  In step S101, the MPU 62 reads the states (detection states) of the plurality of detection sensors 501 to 506, determines the states, and stores them in the RAM 64 as winning detection information. The MPU 62 determines that the detection sensors 501 to 504 provided at the various winning openings of the general winning opening 35, the first starting opening 36, the second starting opening 37 and the large winning opening 381 detect the winning of the gaming ball. In the case, a prize ball command instructing the payout of the prize balls is set, and the set command is transmitted to the payout control device 70. For example, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 504 corresponding to the variable winning device 38 detects a winning of the gaming ball, it transmits to the payout control device 70 a prize ball command instructing the payout of 13 prize balls. Do.

  In step S102, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI to update it, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 64. When the MPU 62 reaches the maximum value when 1 is added to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI, the MPU 62 returns the value of the random number initial value counter CINI to zero.

  In step S103, the MPU 62 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the motorized product counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the previous values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the motorized product counter C4, respectively, and updates them. The updated value is stored in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 64. The MPU 62 returns the value of each of the counters C1 to C4 to 0 when the maximum value is reached when adding 1 to the previous value of each of the counters C1 to C4. In addition, the jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value each time a loop is performed.

  In step S104, the MPU 62 executes through winning processing. Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 506 provided in each through gate 41 detects that the game ball has been won, the value of the counter C4 for the electric utility product updated in step S103 is It stores in the role holding area 643. Further, the MPU 62 sets a command for executing the variable display of the symbol of the character display 47, and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning on each through gate 41 on the character display 47. Let In the bonus item display unit 47, on the basis of a command instruction from the MPU 62, a flickering variation display is sequentially performed to turn on and off, and finally the bonus item display unit 47 is definitely lit. Common map is displayed by the result. Further, the MPU 62 sets a command instructing lighting of the third hold lamp unit 55, and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90. The sound emission control device 90 lights the third holding lamp unit 55 based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62. The maximum number of game balls that have won the through gate 41 is four at maximum, and the third hold lamp unit 55 lights up as many as the number held.

  In step S105, the MPU 62 executes a winning process for the starting opening. Hereinafter, the winning process for the starting opening will be described in detail.

<Prize process for starting opening>
FIG. 10 is a view showing a flowchart of the winning process for the starting opening. In the winning opening process for the starting opening, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S207 as shown in FIG.

  In step S201, whether the gaming ball has won the first start opening 36 (start winning) based on whether the detection sensor 502 provided in the first starting opening 36 has detected the entry of the game ball in step S201. It is determined whether or not. If the MPU 62 determines that the gaming ball has won in the first starting opening 36 in step S201 (YES), it grasps the number of holdings stored in the first result display holding area Ra in step S202, The pending number is set as a first start pending storage number RaN in a predetermined storage area in the first result display portion pending area Ra. Thereafter, the MPU 62 processes the step S205 and subsequent steps.

  When the MPU 62 determines that the gaming ball has not won in the first starting opening 36 in step S201 (NO), the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 503 provided in the second starting opening 37 is the gaming ball in step S203. It is determined whether or not the game ball has won in the second starting opening 37 (start winning) based on whether or not entering the ball is detected. If the MPU 62 determines that the gaming ball has not won in the second starting opening 37 in step S203 (NO), the winning opening process for the starting opening is ended. Further, when the MPU 62 determines that the game ball is won in the second starting opening 37 in step S203 (YES), it grasps the number of holdings stored in the second result display area Rb in step S204. Then, the number of reservations is set as a second start reservation memory number RbN in a predetermined storage area in the second result display area Rb. Thereafter, the MPU 62 processes the step S205 and subsequent steps.

  After executing the process of step S202 or step S204, the MPU 62 sets the start pending storage number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S202 or step S204 to an upper limit value (4 in the first embodiment) in step S205. Determine if it is less than. When the MPU 62 determines that the start pending storage number N is not less than the upper limit value in step S205 (NO), the winning opening process for the starting opening is ended. When the MPU 62 determines that the start pending storage number N is less than the upper limit value in step S205 (YES), the value of the start pending storage number N (RaN or RbN) is incremented by 1 in step S206. Update.

  In step S207, the MPU 62 sets the combinations of the values for the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process to a free storage area of the result display area reserved area. In the first storage area of the above, that is, the storage area corresponding to the start pending storage number N updated in step S206, the information is stored as hold information.

  For example, when the MPU 62 sets the first start storage number RaN in step S202, each of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process The set of values is stored as hold information in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the first result display area reserve area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start reserve storage number RaN updated in step S206. For example, when the MPU 62 sets “3” to the first start reserve storage number RaN in step S202, the MPU 62 is a storage area corresponding to “4” of the first start reserve storage number RaN updated in step S206. 4 Hold information is stored in area Ra4.

  Also, for example, when the MPU 62 sets the second start suspension storage number RbN in step S204, the jackpot random number counter C1 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. Is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first storage area of the free storage areas of the second result display area reserve area Rb, that is, the second start reserve storage number RbN updated in step S206 Do. For example, when the MPU 62 sets “3” to the second start pending storage number RbN in step S204, the MPU 62 is a storage area corresponding to “4” of the second start pending storage number RbN updated in step S206. 4 Hold information is stored in area Rb4.

  In step S207, the MPU 62 sets a command instructing lighting of the first holding lamp unit 53 or the second holding lamp unit 54, and transmits the set command to the voice emission control device 90. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the winning opening process for the starting opening. The sound emission control device 90 lights the first holding lamp unit 53 or the second holding lamp unit 54 based on a command transmitted from the MPU 62. Further, in the first embodiment, the maximum number of game balls reserved in the first starting opening 36 or the second starting opening 37 is four. In addition, the first holding lamp unit 53 or the second holding lamp unit 54 is lit by the same number (corresponding) as the number of holding units.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the normal process. The normal processing is the main processing for advancing the game. In the normal processing, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S314 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the MPU 62 periodically executes steps S301 to S309 in a cycle of 4 msec, repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 when the remaining time occurs, and executes steps S312 and subsequent steps according to the determination result of step S308. Run. The “remaining time” is the remaining time obtained by subtracting the time taken for the processing of steps S301 to S309 from the cycle time (4 msec).

  In step S301, the MPU 62 executes an external output process of transmitting a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether a winning ball command is set or not, and when it determines that a winning ball command is set, transmits the winning ball command to the payout control device 70. Further, in the first embodiment, the MPU 62 determines whether a command for effect such as a command corresponding to an effect for game circulation or a command corresponding to an effect for opening / closing execution mode is set, When it is determined that the command for the command is set, the command for the effect is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90.

  In step S302, the MPU 62 updates the fluctuation type counter CS. Specifically, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the previous value of the variation type counter CS for updating, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 64. The MPU 62 returns the value of the variation type counter CS to 0 when the maximum value is reached when adding 1 to the previous value of the variation type counter CS.

  In step S303, the MPU 62 executes game number control processing for advancing the game number. Specifically, the MPU 62 executes the acceptance lottery and the distribution lottery, and determines the information related to the symbol to be finally displayed on the symbol display device 51 as a stop and the symbol to be finally displayed as a stop on the main display unit 46 Execute determination of relevant information, etc.

  In step S304, the MPU 62 executes gaming state transition processing for transitioning the gaming state. Specifically, the MPU 62 executes transition processing to each gaming state such as the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, and the high frequency support mode. Note that the game number control process of step S303 and the game state transition process of step S304 will be described in detail later.

  In step S305, the MPU 62 executes a demonstration display execution determination process. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a predetermined demonstration start start waiting period (for example, 3 sec) has elapsed without a new game play being started after the game play is over, and the start is performed. If it is determined that the waiting period has elapsed, a demo command for starting the demonstration display is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. The sound emission control apparatus 90 starts the demonstration display execution process based on the demonstration command transmitted from the MPU 62. The demonstration display execution process will be described in detail later.

  Here, the MPU 62 determines whether the start waiting period has elapsed by counting the number of times of execution of the process of step S305. For example, if the start waiting period is 3 seconds and the interval at which the process of step S305 is repeatedly executed is 0.1 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times of execution of the process of step S305 and reaches 3000 times. Is determined to have passed. The configuration for measuring the start waiting period is optional, and for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real time clock (RTC). Further, when starting a new game play while counting the number of times of execution of the process of step S305, the MPU 62 resets the value of the count.

  In step S306, the MPU 62 executes a process (hereinafter referred to as a process for electronic support) to execute the opening / closing control of the opening / closing member 371 provided in the second starting port 37. Specifically, the MPU 62 executes the motorized combination opening lottery based on the value of the motorized combination counter C4 stored in the combination holding area 643 of the RAM 64, and wins the motorized combination opening lottery. The opening and closing process of the opening and closing member 371 is performed. Further, the MPU 62 executes display control of the symbol display section 47 so as to display the result of the motorized symbol open lottery.

  At step S307, the MPU 62 executes a game ball launch control process. Specifically, the MPU 62 executes a launch control that causes the power and launch control device 80 to launch the gaming ball based on the fact that the player rotates the launch handle 27 clockwise (clockwise). Let More specifically, the power supply and emission control device 80 excites the solenoid of the gaming ball emission mechanism 81 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) to cause the gaming ball emission mechanism 81 to emit gaming balls. The solenoid is excited to fire the gaming ball at a firing strength corresponding to the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 27. Specifically, as the amount of rotational operation of the launch handle 27 increases, the excitation intensity of the gaming ball becomes stronger because the excitation is stronger. The power supply and emission control device 80 emits the game ball when a predetermined emission condition (when the emission handle 27 is rotated, the touch sensor 271 is on, and the emission stop switch 272 is off) is ready. A drive signal is output to the solenoid of the mechanism 81 to fire the gaming ball.

  In step S308, the MPU 62 determines whether the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 64 or not. The power failure flag is set in the RAM 64 by inputting a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 62. The blackout monitoring board 65 outputs this blackout signal when it confirms the occurrence of blackout. The power failure flag is cleared at the next execution of the main processing.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 sets various flags by substituting 1 into a predetermined area such as the RAM 64, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the power failure flag by substituting 1 in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64, and clears the power failure flag by substituting 0 in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64.

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S308 that the power failure flag is set (YES), the MPU 62 executes the power-off processing after step S312 without executing the processing after step S309. Specifically, in step S312, the MPU 62 prohibits the generation of the timer interrupt process. In step S313, the MPU 62 calculates and stores a RAM determination value (checksum of the RAM 64). In step S314, the MPU 62 prohibits access to the RAM 64. Thereafter, the MPU 62 continues the infinite loop until the power is completely shut off and processing can not be performed.

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S308 that the power failure flag is not set (NO), whether or not it is time to execute the next normal processing has arrived in step S309, ie, since the current normal processing has started. It is determined whether a predetermined time (for example, 4 msec) has elapsed. If the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that the timing to execute the next normal processing has not come (NO), that is, if 4 msec which is the cycle time has not elapsed and the remaining time is generated, the process proceeds to step S310. The update of the random number initial value counter CINI is performed, and in step S311, the change type counter CS is updated. Note that the MPU 62 repeatedly executes the processing of steps S308 to S311 until it is determined in step S309 that the timing to execute the next normal processing has been reached (4 msec which is a cycle time has elapsed).

  If it is determined in step S309 that the timing to execute the next normal processing has come (YES), that is, if 4 msec which is the cycle time has elapsed and the remaining time has not occurred, the MPU 62 executes step S301 again. Start the next normal processing.

<Main processing>
FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the main process.
In the main process, the MPU 62 executes steps S401 to S412 as shown in FIG. In step S401, the MPU 62 executes a start-up process upon power-on. The start-up process is provided with a waiting time for waiting for the sub-side control board (the control board or the like of the audio light emission control device 90) to be operable. Specifically, after the power is turned on, the MPU 62 stands by until a predetermined time (for example, about 500 msec) elapses.

  In step S402, the MPU 62 determines whether 1 sec, which is a period for prohibiting access to the RAM 64 (hereinafter referred to as a permission prohibition period), has elapsed. The MPU 62 repeatedly executes the process of step S402 until it is determined in step S402 that 1 sec has elapsed. That is, when the MPU 62 does not determine that 1 sec has elapsed in step S402 (NO), the process of step S402 is repeatedly performed, and when it is determined that 1 sec has elapsed in step S402 (YES), the processes after step S403 are performed. Execute the process

  In the first embodiment, the MPU 62 determines whether 1 sec has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S402 is performed. For example, if the interval at which the process of step S402 is repeatedly performed is 0.1 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times of execution of the process of step S402 and determines that 1 sec has elapsed when reaching 10000 times. The configuration for measuring the permission prohibition period is optional, and for example, the permission prohibition period may be measured using a real time clock (RTC).

  In step S403, the MPU 62 permits access to the RAM 64. In step S404, the MPU 62 determines whether the RAM erase switch (not shown) provided in the power / emission control device 80 is turned on. If the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is turned on (YES), the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S409 and thereafter. If the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is not turned on (NO), it determines in step S405 whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64.

  When the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405 (NO), the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S409 and thereafter. If the MPU 62 determines in step S405 that the power failure flag is set (YES), the MPU 62 calculates a RAM determination value (checksum) in step S406. In step S407, the MPU 62 determines the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 by determining whether the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 is normal. Specifically, the MPU 62 compares the RAM determination value (checksum) calculated in step S406 with the RAM determination value (checksum) stored in step S313 (processing upon power interruption) of the normal process. If they match, it is determined that the RAM determination value is normal. If they do not match, the RAM determination value is determined to be abnormal.

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S407 that the RAM determination value is not normal (NO), that is, if it determines that the checksum values do not match, it executes the processes in and after step S409. If the MPU 62 determines in step S407 that the RAM determination value is normal (YES), that is, if it determines that the checksum values match, it is stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64 in step S408. Clear the blackout flag.

  In the first embodiment, although the checksum is used to confirm the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 confirms the integrity of the value of the checksum. It may be determined by a method different from the method. For example, the keyword is written in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 in the power-off process, and the main process determines whether the keyword is normally written or not, thereby confirming the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 You may Also, a hash value of CRC (cyclic redundancy check) or MD5 (hash function) may be used to confirm the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64. Note that the checksum calculation method is very simple. For example, the lower one word of the total of individual words in the word string may be used as the code value as it is. For this reason, although the validity of data confirmation by checksum is less reliable compared to other error detection codes, the algorithm is very simple, so it does not burden MPU 62 even under limited memory space. Can be calculated.

  If the MPU 62 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404 (YES), it determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405 (NO), or determines the RAM in step S407. If it is determined that the value is not normal (NO), the processing of step S409 and thereafter is executed. Specifically, the MPU 62 clears the work area of the RAM 64 in step S409, and executes initialization of the RAM 64 in step S410.

  Therefore, for example, the manager of the game arcade can initialize the data stored in the RAM 64 by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM erase switch at the start of business of the game arcade. The pachinko machine 10 also initializes the data stored in the RAM 64 even when the occurrence of a power failure is not confirmed by the power failure monitoring board 65 or when the RAM determination value is abnormal.

  After executing the process of step S408 or step S410, in step S411, the MPU 62 transmits an initialization command to the control board on the sub side (the control board of the audio light emission control device 90, etc.). Further, the MPU 62 permits generation of timer interrupt processing in step S412. Thereafter, the MPU 62 shifts to the normal processing described with reference to FIG. The control board on the sub side recognizes that the communication with the main control board 61 is normally performed and initializes itself by receiving the initialization command transmitted in step S411.

<Game times control processing>
FIG. 13 is a view showing a flowchart of the game number control process. In the game number control process, the MPU 62 executes steps S501 to S509 as shown in FIG. In step S501, the MPU 62 determines whether the open / close execution mode is in progress. If the MPU 62 determines that the open / close execution mode is in progress in step S501 (YES), the game play control process is ended without executing the process of step S502 and subsequent steps. That is, when it is determined that the open / close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 does not start the progression of the game run regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to each starting opening 36, 37 is detected.

  Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress by referring to the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64. The same applies to the following steps. Further, the MPU 62 sets the open / close execution mode flag when transitioning to the open / close execution mode, and clears the open / close execution mode flag when the open / close execution mode is ended.

  If the MPU 62 determines that the open / close execution mode is not in progress in step S501 (NO), it is determined in step S502 whether or not the main display unit 46 is fluctuating display, that is, whether or not the game is in progress. judge. When the MPU 62 determines that the main display unit 46 is not displaying the change display in step S502 (NO), the MPU 62 executes the processing for starting the game play in steps S503 to S505. When the MPU 62 determines that the main display unit 46 is displaying the change display at step S502 (YES), the MPU 62 executes the game progress processing at steps S506 to S509.

  In step S503, the MPU 62 recognizes the number of reservations stored in the first result display area Ra and the number of reservations stored in the second result display area Rb. It is determined whether the total number CRN of is less than or equal to "0". If the MPU 62 determines that the total number CRN is equal to or less than “0” in step S 503 (YES), it terminates the game play control process.

  Further, when the MPU 62 determines that the total number CRN is not “0” or less in step S 503 (NO), in step S 504, the first result display area reserve area Ra or the second result display area reserve area Rb. A data setting process is performed to set the stored hold information for game sequence digestion. Thereafter, in step S505, the MPU 62 causes the main display unit 46 and the symbol display device 51 to start variable display to execute change start processing for digesting the game play, and ends the game play control processing. The data setting process of step S504 will be described later with reference to FIG. 14 and the variation start process of step S505 with reference to FIG.

  In step S502, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the main display unit 46 is in the variable display mode, and when it is determined that the main display unit 46 is in the variable display mode (YES), the game times progress in steps S506 to S509. Run the process for

  In step S506, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the display continuation time set in step S716 of variation start processing (see FIG. 15) described later has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value set in the display continuation time counter of the RAM 64 has become "0" or less. The value of the display continuation time counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 62 executes a process for variable display in step S507. In the variable display process, the MPU 62 updates the display of the main display unit 46 during the variable display. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the game play control process.

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has elapsed (YES), the MPU 62 executes the fluctuation end process in step S508. In this variation end process, the MPU 62 stops the information stored in the RAM 64 in the process of step S710, step S713 or step S715 of the variation start process described later (see FIG. 15) (finally stopped in the main display unit 46) Identify the information related to the symbol to be displayed. Then, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display unit 46 so that the symbol corresponding to the specified information is displayed on the main display unit 46 in a variable display mode at the end of the game run.

  Here, the symbols that are finally displayed on the main display unit 46 in a stopped state are different for each type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the game arcade or the like can check the game result by visually checking the main display unit 46 at the end of the game play. According to this, the manager of the game arcade, etc., for example, simply confirms whether or not the cheating attempt is made to cause the pachinko machine 10 to perform the same behavior as in the case of winning the jackpot occurrence lottery. Can be done.

  The main display portion 46 has a narrower display area than the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and the symbol display stop display on the main display portion 46 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to stop display. It is difficult for the player to recognize in comparison with ~ Z3. Therefore, when the game is over, the player checks not the main display unit 46 but the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 to determine whether or not the jackpot has been won, and so on. Attention to screen G increases.

  In step S509, the MPU 62 sets a change end command. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the change end command set in step S509 to the sound emission control apparatus 90. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the game play control process. In addition, the sound emission control apparatus 90 performs the process for ending the presentation of the game time based on the change end command transmitted from MPU62. Here, the sound emission control device 90 may be configured to end the effects of the game play independently without requiring the reception of the change end command.

<Data setting process>
Next, the data setting process of step S504 in FIG. 13 will be described in detail. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing. In the data setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S601 to S611 as shown in FIG. In step S601, the MPU 62 sets the second start reserve storage number RbN of the second result display area reserve area Rb set at step S204 in the above-mentioned winning opening process for the starting opening (see FIG. 10) to "0" or less. It is determined whether the If the MPU 62 determines that the second start pending storage number RbN is "0" or less at step S601 (YES), data for the first result display unit (for the first start port 36) of steps S602 to S606. When the setting process is executed and it is determined in step S601 that the second start pending storage number RbN is not "0" or less (NO), for the second result display unit of steps S607 to S611 (for the second start port 37) Execute the data setting process of

  First, the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S602 to S606 will be described. In step S602, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the first start storage number RaN of the first result display storage area Ra, and stores the first start storage stored in the first result display storage area Ra. Update the value of the storage number RaN. In step S603, the MPU 62 moves the hold information stored in the first area Ra1 of the first result display area reserve area Ra to the execution area AE.

  In step S604, the MPU 62 executes data shift processing for shifting the hold information stored in the storage area of the first result display unit holding area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the hold information stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 toward the first area Ra1. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the hold information of the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, shifts the hold information of the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and shifts the hold information of the fourth area Ra4 to the third Shift to area Ra3. That is, in steps S603 and S604, shift processing of data stored in the first result display area reserve area Ra is executed by the FIFO (First In, First Out) method.

  In step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display unit flag stored in the RAM 64. The second result display unit flag is a flag for specifying which main display unit 46 of the first result display unit 461 and the second result display unit 462 starts variable display when the game time is consumed. It is. In this step S605, since the MPU 62 clears the second result display unit flag, it is changed to the first result display unit 461 based on the winning of the game ball to the first start opening 36 when the game time is consumed. Indicates to start the display.

  In step S606, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the shift of the hold information has been performed, transmits the set shift command to the voice emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This shift command is an audio light emission control that the shift of the hold information is executed for the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 36 It contains information for causing the device 90 to recognize.

  The sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the first holding lamp unit 53 based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 decreases the number of game balls reserved in the first starting opening 36, that is, the number of first start storages stored in the first result display storage area Ra. As the RaN decreases, the number of lighting of the first holding lamp unit 53 is reduced.

  Next, data setting processing for the second result display unit in steps S607 to S611 will be described. In step S 607, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the second start pending storage number RbN of the second result display unit pending area Rb, and holds the second start pending stored in the second result display unit pending area Rb. The value of the memory number RbN is updated. In step S608, the MPU 62 moves the hold information stored in the second area Rb2 of the second result display area reserve area Rb to the execution area AE.

  In step S609, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process of shifting the hold information stored in the storage area of the second result display unit holding area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the hold information stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 toward the first area Rb1. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the hold information of the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, shifts the hold information of the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, and shifts the hold information of the fourth area Rb4 to the third Shift to area Rb3. That is, in steps S608 and S609, the shift processing of the data stored in the second result display area reserved area Rb is executed by the FIFO (First In First Out, FIFO) method.

  In step S610, the MPU 62 sets a second result display unit flag in the RAM 64. In this step S610, since the MPU 62 has set the second result display unit flag, the second result display unit 462 is changed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 37 when the game time is consumed. Indicates to start the display.

  In step S611, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the shift of the hold information has been performed, transmits the set shift command to the voice emission control apparatus 90, and ends the data setting process. This shift command is a control of sound emission control of the execution of the shift of the holding information for the holding information stored in the second result display holding area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 37 It contains information for causing the device 90 to recognize. The audio light emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the second hold lamp unit 54 based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 decreases the number of game balls reserved in the second starting opening 37, that is, the second start storage number RbN stored in the second result display area Rb. The number of lighting of the second holding lamp unit 54 is decreased with the decrease of.

  As described above, in the data setting process in FIG. 14, for the first result display unit (for the first start port 36), the holding information stored in the first result display unit holding area Ra is set for the game cycle digest ) For the second result display unit (for the second starting opening 37) for setting the data setting process (S602 to S606) and the suspension information stored in the second result display unit reserved area Rb for the game game digest And the data setting process (S607 to S611). If the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start pending storage number RbN is not "0" or less, the data setting for the second result display unit is performed without executing the data setting process for the first result display unit. Execute the process When the MPU 62 determines that there is the hold information stored in the second result display area reserve area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the second start opening 37, the game ball to the first start opening 36 is a winning On the basis of the hold information stored in the second result display area Rb, regardless of whether or not there is the hold information stored in the first result display area reserve area Ra based on Set to

<Variation disclosure processing>
Next, the variation start process of step S505 of FIG. 13 will be described in detail. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start process. In the fluctuation start process, the MPU 62 executes steps S701 to S718, as shown in FIG.

  In step S701, the MPU 62 determines whether the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode. If the MPU 62 determines in step S 701 that the success or failure lottery mode is not the high probability mode (NO), in step S 702, the success or failure table for low probability mode (see FIG. Read from Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S 701 that the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode (YES), in step S 703, the winning table for the high probability mode (see FIG. 7B) is the winning table of the ROM 63. It is read from the storage area 631.

  After executing the process of step S702 or step S703, the MPU 62 executes a yes / no determination process in step S704. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, the low probability mode pass / fail table read in step S702, or the high probability mode read in step S703. By comparing with the table, the result (the result of success or failure) of the acceptance lottery is determined. In addition, the success or failure result is any of “big hit”, “specially out result”, and “normally out” result, and whether it is the low probability mode or the high probability mode, the success or failure is “big hit” Or “extra outlier” or “normally outlier”.

  In step S705, the MPU 62 determines whether the success or failure result determined in step S704 is "big hit". If the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the success or failure is "big hit" (YES), it executes the processing after step S706, and if it is determined in step S705 that the success or failure is not "big hit" ( NO), the process after step S712 is performed.

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the success or failure is "big hit" (YES), the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S706.

  Here, when the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64, it is shown that the first result display unit 461 starts variable display based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 36. Therefore, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64 in step S706 (NO), the first distribution table (see FIG. 8A) is stored in the ROM 63 in step S707. It reads from the distribution table storage area 632 of

  Further, when the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, it is shown that the second result display unit 462 starts variable display based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 37. Therefore, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S706 (YES), the second distribution table (see FIG. 8B) is stored in the ROM 63 in step S708. It reads from the distribution table storage area 632 of

  After executing the processing of step S 707 or step S 708, the MPU 62 executes distribution determination processing in step S 709. In this distribution determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the distribution table read in step S 707 or S 708 to obtain a distribution lottery result. Determine the (distribution result).

  In step S710, the MPU 62 executes stop result setting processing for the jackpot result. In the stop result setting process for the big hit result, the MPU 62 determines information on the symbol to be finally displayed on the first result display unit 461 or the second result display unit 462 of the main display unit 46, and the determined information That is, the information related to the symbol to be stopped and displayed is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 compares the distribution result determined in step S709 with the stop result table for the big hit result stored in advance in the ROM 63, and information related to the symbol to be finally displayed on the main display unit 46. Decide. The stop result table for the jackpot result defines the pattern of the symbols to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 46 different for each distribution result.

  In step S711, the MPU 62 sets, in the RAM 64, a flag corresponding to the distribution result determined in step S709. Specifically, the MPU 62 sets the low probability result flag when it determines that the distribution result is the “low probability result”, and specifies that it is the “invisible small round high probability result”, When the implicit small round high probability result flag is set and it is specified that it is the "explicit small round high probability result", the explicit small round high probability result flag is set and it is specified that it is the "most favorable result" If so, set the Most Favorable Results flag. Thereafter, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S716 and thereafter. In the processing of each of the following steps, the MPU 62 determines the distribution result with reference to the presence or absence of the flag set in the RAM 64.

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the success or failure is not a "big hit" (NO), it determines in step S712 whether or not the success or failure determined in step S704 is a "special outlier". If the MPU 62 determines in step S712 that the success or failure result is a "specially outlier result" (YES), it executes the processing of step S713 and subsequent steps, and determines that the success or failure result is not an "extraordinary result" in step S712. In the case (NO), the processing of step S 715 and thereafter is executed.

  In step S 713, the MPU 62 executes stop result setting processing for the special removal result. In the stop result setting process for the special out result, the MPU 62 determines and determines the information related to the symbol to be finally displayed on the first result display unit 461 or the second result display unit 462 of the main display unit 46. Information is stored in the RAM 64, that is, information relating to a symbol to be stopped and displayed. Here, the MPU 62 refers to the stop result table for the special removal result stored in advance in the ROM 63 to determine the information related to the symbol to be finally displayed on the main display unit 46 in the stop state. The aspect of the symbol set in the stop result table for the special out result is different from the aspect of the symbol set in the stop result table for the big hit result. In step S714, the MPU 62 sets a special out flag in the RAM 64. In each of the following processes, the MPU 62 refers to the presence or absence of the special out flag set in the RAM 64 to determine whether the result of the pass / fail is the “out of special result”.

  In step S715, the MPU 62 executes stop result setting processing for the normal removal result. In the stop result setting process for the normal distraction result, the MPU 62 determines information on a symbol to be finally displayed on the first result display unit 461 or the second result display unit 462 of the main display unit 46, and the determination is made The stored information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 refers to the stop result table for the normal removal result stored in advance in the ROM 63 to determine the information related to the symbol to be finally displayed on the main display unit 46 as a stop. In addition, the aspect of the symbol set in the stop result table for the normal out result is different from the aspect of the symbol set in the stop result table for the big hit result and the stop result table for the special out result.

  After executing any of the processes of step S711, step S714, and step S715, the MPU 62 executes a process of setting a display continuation time (display continuation period) in step S716. In addition, the setting process of a display continuation time (display continuation period) is demonstrated in detail later.

  In step S717, the MPU 62 sets a variation command and a type command. In step S301 of the above-described normal processing (see FIG. 11), the MPU 62 transmits the variation command and type command set in step S717 to the voice emission control device 90. The audio light emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62, which process will be described in detail later.

  Although the variable command includes information related to the display duration, it does not include information as to whether or not reach display occurs. Further, the type command includes information on the result of the pass / fail and information on the result of the distribution. More specifically, the type command includes, as information related to the result of the pass / fail, each piece of information related to the “big hit”, the “specially out of place result”, and the “normally out of place result”. In addition, in the type command, as information related to the distribution result, each information related to “low probability result”, “invisible small round high probability result”, “explicit small round high probability result”, and “most favorable result” It is included. In the following description, the pass / fail result and the distribution result are collectively referred to as a game result. That is, the type command includes information related to the game result.

  In step S 718, the MPU 62 determines whether the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64 and causes the main display unit 46 to start variable display based on the determination result. Here, when the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64, the variation display is started on the first result display unit 461 based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 36 when the game time is consumed. It indicates that

  Therefore, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64, it causes the first result display unit 461 to start variable display in step S718. When the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, the second result display unit 462 starts variable display based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 37 when the game time is consumed. It is shown that. Therefore, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 causes the second result display unit 462 to start variable display in step S718.

<Processing for setting display duration>
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of setting processing of the display continuation time. In the setting process of the display continuation time, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S808 as shown in FIG. In step S801, the MPU 62 acquires the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer of the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64. Further, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the reach display occurs in the symbol display device 51. Specifically, in step S802, the MPU 62 determines whether the distribution result determined in step S709 is the "low probability result" or the "most advantageous result".

  In step S802, if the distribution result is "low probability result" or "most favorable result" (YES), the MPU 62 determines that the result of step S704 in FIG. Determine if it is. If the MPU 62 determines in step S 803 that the acceptance result is the “normal outlier result” (YES), the reach table stored in advance in the ROM 63 and the reach stored in the holding ball storage area 642 in step S 804 A reach occurrence lottery is executed by comparison with the value of the random number counter C3.

  In step S805, the MPU 62 determines whether the reach display occurs in the reach occurrence lottery in step S804. If the MPU 62 determines that the reach display occurs in step S805 (YES), the MPU 62 refers to the reach generation display continuation time table stored in the ROM 63 in step S806. Further, when the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is not the “low probability result” or the “most favorable result” in step S 802 (NO), it determines that the success or failure result is not the “normal out result” in step S 803. (NO), and when it is determined in step S805 that the reach display is not generated (NO), the reach non-generation display continuation time table stored in the ROM 63 is referred to in step S807.

  In step S808, the MPU 62 determines the display continuation time after executing the processing of step S806 or step S807. Specifically, based on the reach generation display continuation time table referred to in step S806 or the reach non-occurrence display continuation time table referred to in step S806, the MPU 62 acquires the variation type counter acquired from the type counter buffer. Determine the display duration corresponding to the value of CS. Further, the MPU 62 sets the display continuation time determined in step S 807 in the display continuation time counter provided in the various counter areas 641 of the RAM 64.

  In the first embodiment, as described with reference to steps S804 to S808 in FIG. 16, the MPU 62 stores the reach table stored in the reach table storage area 633 of the ROM 63 and the storage ball storage area 642 The lottery of whether or not the reach display is to be generated is executed by comparing with the value of the reach random number counter C3. However, the speech emission control device 90 performs the lottery of whether or not the reach display is to be generated. It may be configured to execute.

  Here, in the first embodiment, the reach non-occurrence display continuation time table is set to shorten the display continuation time as the number of holdings increases. That is, the display continuation time at the time of digesting the hold information related to the first starting port 36 is set to be shorter as the number of holdings related to the first start port 36 increases. Moreover, the display continuation time at the time of digesting the hold information concerning the 2nd starting opening 37 is set so that it becomes short, so that the number of holdings concerning the 2nd starting opening 37 increases. When the first starting opening 36 or the second starting opening 37 is won by exceeding the maximum value (4 pieces) of the number of held pieces, the award balls can be paid out but the jackpot lottery can not be received. However, as in the present embodiment, the display continuation time is shortened as the number of held pieces increases, and the game times are consumed more quickly, thereby achieving a state in which the player holds a prize exceeding the maximum value of the held number (a prize ball is paid out) However, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a jackpot lottery condition that can not be received, and to provide an advantageous gaming state for the player.

  Further, in the reach non-occurrence display continuation time table, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the display continuation time is set shorter than in the low frequency support mode. That is, when the number of holdings is the same, the display continuation time of the high frequency support mode is set shorter than the display continuation time of the low frequency support mode. Further, the display continuation time table for the reach occurrence and the display continuation time table for the reach non-occurrence are set so that the display continuation times are different from each other.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the display continuation time determined by referring to the reach generation display continuation time table and the display continuation time determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display continuation time table Are different from each other. Therefore, even if information on whether or not reach display is generated is not included in the variation command, reach display on the audio emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, based on the information related to the display continuation time. Can be determined. In this sense, it can be said that the change command indirectly includes information as to whether or not the reach indication occurs. Note that the change command may directly include the information as to whether or not the reach display occurs.

  In the first embodiment, the display continuation time table for reach non-occurrence has a shorter display continuation time as the number of reservations is increased, but the display continuation time becomes longer as the number of reservations is increased. It may be set to the reverse relationship to the embodiment, and may be configured so that the display continuation time does not change (change) according to the number of holdings or the support mode. Further, the reach generation display continuation time table and the reach non-occurrence display continuation time table may be the same. In this case, the display continuation time corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired from the dynamic type counter buffer is determined with reference to the same display continuation time table regardless of the presence or absence of reach, various types of RAM 64 The display duration time counter provided in the counter area 641 may be set. Furthermore, a display duration table may be set individually for each of the pass / fail result and the distribution result.

<Playing state transition processing>
FIG. 17 is a view showing a flowchart of the gaming state transition processing. In the gaming state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S901 to S914, as shown in FIG. In step S901, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. When it is determined in step S901 that the open / close execution mode is not in effect (NO), the MPU 62 executes the processing in steps S902 to S910. When the MPU 62 determines that the open / close execution mode is in progress in step S901 (YES), the MPU 62 executes the processing of steps S911 to S914.

  If it is determined in step S901 that the open / close execution mode is not in effect (NO), the MPU 62 determines in step S902 whether or not variation display on the main display unit 46 has ended. If the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the variable display of the main display unit 46 has not ended (NO), the gaming state transition processing ends. If the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the variable display on the main display unit 46 has ended (YES), the MPU 62 determines in step S903 whether the result of the acceptance corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode. judge. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether the success or failure result is a "big hit" or a "special off result".

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S 903 that the result of acceptance does not correspond to the transition to the open / close execution mode (NO), that is, if it is determined that the result of acceptance is “normally out of place”, the gaming state transition processing finish. Further, when the MPU 62 determines that the result of the acceptance or rejection corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode in step S903 (YES), after setting the open / close execution mode flag in the RAM 64, the result of the acceptance or rejection in step S904. It is determined whether or not is an "extra outlier result".

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S904 that the acceptance result is the "special outlier result" (YES), the MPU 62 sets "2" in the open / close counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 641 of the RAM 64 in step S905. The open / close counter SOC is a counter for specifying by the MPU 62 the total number of times the large winning opening 381 of the variable winning device 38 is opened and closed when shifting to the open / close execution mode. If the MPU 62 determines in step S904 that the success or failure result is not a "special outlier result" (NO), that is, if it determines that the success or failure result is "big hit", the distribution result is small in step S906. It is determined whether the result is a round high probability result (“invisible small round high probability result” or “explicit small round high probability result”).

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S 906 that the distribution result is the small round high probability result (YES), it sets “2” to the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 641 of the RAM 64 in step S 907 . If the MPU 62 determines in step S 906 that the distribution result is not a small round high probability result (NO), that is, if it determines that the distribution result is a “low probability result” or a “most favorable result”, In step S 908, “15” is set to the round counter RC. The round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games with the MPU 62 when shifting to the open / close execution mode.

  In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of open / close execution modes having different end conditions. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has, as the open / close execution mode, the number-of-rounds defining mode in which transition is made when the success / failure result is “big hit” and the number of switchings in transition when the success / failure result is “specially out” And a prescribed mode.

  The round number regulation mode ends on the condition that a predetermined number of round games have been executed. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC. The open / close number setting mode ends on the condition that a predetermined total number of opening and closing of the big winning opening 381 has been executed, or that a predetermined number of gaming balls have won the large winning opening 381. Here, the total number of times of opening and closing of the special winning opening 381 corresponds to the value set in the opening and closing counter SOC. This open / close number setting mode does not end on the condition of the number of round game executions.

In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 executes the opening and closing of the one big winning opening 381 in one round game. In addition, one round game continues until one of the following two conditions (1) and (2) is satisfied. That is, in the first embodiment, after the pachinko machine 10 sets the open / close door 382 in the open state, the open / close door is satisfied by satisfying one of the following two conditions (1) and (2). Set 382 to the closed state again.
(1) A predetermined upper limit continuation time (upper limit continuation period) elapses (2) The total number of winning game balls to the large winning opening 381 reaches a predetermined upper limit number

  After the MPU 62 executes one of the processes of step S905, step S907, and step S908, in step S909, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 641 of the RAM 64 is set as a standby time (waiting period) for opening. Set "1000". The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, the timer interrupt process is performed in a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 2 seconds. In addition, the standby time for opening is not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily determined according to the combination of the gaming state and the symbol (special figure).

  As described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the result of the acceptance corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the waiting time for opening in the timer counter T regardless of the type of the game result. . In other words, the waiting time for opening is the same regardless of the type of game result. Note that the waiting time for opening is not limited to this, and may be configured to be slightly different according to the type of the game result, for example, to the extent that the player recognizes the same. In addition, for example, the waiting time for opening is largely different between when it is the game result of “low probability result” or “most advantageous result” and when it is the game result other than these, etc., the game result It may be configured to be largely different according to the type of

  In step S910, the MPU 62 sets an opening command. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the gaming state transition process. Here, the opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode, and the MPU 62 is set in step S 910 in step S 301 of the above-described normal processing (see FIG. 11). The opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. The sound emission control apparatus 90 recognizes the transition to the open / close execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This process will be described in detail later.

  Further, when the MPU 62 determines that the open / close execution mode is in progress at step S901 (YES), the winning opening / closing process is executed at step S911. The special winning opening / closing process in step S911 will be described in detail later.

  In step S912, after executing the special winning opening / closing process of step S911, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the opening / closing counter SOC is "0" or less and whether the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less. judge.

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S912 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less (NO), the gaming state transition process is ended. If the MPU 62 determines in step S912 that both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are less than or equal to "0" (YES), the value of the timer counter T is "0" in step S913. It is determined whether it is the following or not.

  When the MPU 62 determines that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less at step S913 (NO), it ends the gaming state transition processing. If the MPU 62 determines that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less at step S913 (YES), the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is cleared at step S914, and then the open / close execution is performed. Execute transition processing at the end of mode. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the gaming state transition process.

Next, the special winning opening / closing process of step S911 in FIG. 17 will be described in detail.
FIG. 18 is a view showing a flowchart of the special winning opening / closing process. In the special winning opening / closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1019 as shown in FIG. In step S1001, the MPU 62 determines whether the special winning opening 381 is open. If it is determined that the special winning opening 381 is not open at step S1001 (NO), the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S1002 and subsequent steps. When the MPU 62 determines that the special winning opening 381 is open at step S1001 (YES), the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S1006 and subsequent steps.

  When the MPU 62 determines that the special winning opening 381 is not open at step S1001 (NO), at step S1002, the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less, and the value of the round counter RC is "0". It is determined whether it is the following or not. If the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that both the value of the opening / closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are "0" or less (YES), the special winning opening / closing process is ended.

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less (NO), the value of the timer counter T is "0" in step S1003. It is determined whether it is less than or equal to. If the MPU 62 determines in step S1003 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less (NO), the special winning opening / closing process is ended.

  When the MPU 62 determines in step S1003 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less (YES), it executes the special winning opening open process in step S1004. The special winning opening opening process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1005, the MPU 62 sets an open command. Further, the MPU 62 transmits the release command set in step S1005 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of the above-described normal processing (see FIG. 11). Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the special winning opening / closing process. The sound emission control apparatus 90 recognizes that the open / close door 382 is set to the open state based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the special winning opening 381 is open (YES), whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less in step S1006, that is, the special winning opening is opened. It is determined whether the upper limit continuation time set in the timer counter T in step S1003 or step S1006 of the process has elapsed.

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 62 determines in step S1007 whether or not a winning in the special winning opening 381 has occurred. The determination as to whether or not the winning of the special winning opening 381 has occurred is performed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 504 corresponding to the special winning opening 381.

  If the MPU 62 determines that the winning of the special winning opening 381 has not occurred in step S1007 (NO), the special winning opening / closing process is ended. Further, when the MPU 62 determines that the winning of the special winning opening 381 has occurred in step S1007 (YES), the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by 1 in step S1008 and updated.

  In step S1009, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less. When the MPU 62 determines in step S1009 that the value of the winning counter PC is not "0" or less (NO), the special winning opening / closing process is ended. When the MPU 62 determines that the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less at step S1009 (YES), the MPU 62 executes a closing execution process at step S1010. In the closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open / close door 382 in the closed state by executing the drive control of the variable prize drive unit 383.

  In step S1011, the MPU 62 sets a closing command. The MPU 62 transmits the closing command set in step S1011 to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S301 of the above-described normal process (see FIG. 11). The audio light emission control device 90 recognizes that the open / close door 382 is set to the closed state based on the close command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

  In step S1012, the MPU 62 determines whether the pass / fail result is the “extra outlier result”. If the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 that the acceptance result is the “special outlier result” (YES), the MPU 62 executes processing of step S1018 and later described later.

  Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 that the result of the acceptance or rejection is not the “special outlier result” (NO), the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S1013 and subsequent steps. In step S1013, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC to update it. In step S1014, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less. If the MPU 62 determines in step S1014 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less (NO), the value of the timer counter T is set to "500" in step S1015. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the special winning opening / closing process.

  Here, after setting the open / close door 382 to the open state, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1015 is set to the close state again, and is then waited until the open / close door 382 is set to the open state again. It defines the time. In the first embodiment, the open standby time is set to 1 sec, but the open standby time is the same regardless of the type and progress of the open / close execution mode.

  Further, when the MPU 62 determines that the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less in step S1014 (YES), the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S1016 and subsequent steps. In step S1016, the MPU 62 sets "2000" in the timer counter T as the waiting time (waiting period) for ending. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, the timer interrupt process is performed in a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the waiting time for ending is 4 seconds. The waiting time for ending is not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily determined according to the combination of the gaming state and the symbol (special figure).

  The waiting time for ending is the same as the waiting time for opening regardless of the type of the game result. That is, the waiting time for ending is the same regardless of the type of the open / close execution mode. Note that the waiting time for ending is not limited to this, and may be configured to be slightly different according to the type of the game result, for example, to the extent that the player recognizes as similar. In addition, for example, the waiting time for ending is largely different between when it is the game result of the “low probability result” or the “most advantageous result” and when it is the game result other than these, etc., the game result It may be configured to be largely different according to the type of

  In step S1017, the MPU 62 sets an ending command. The MPU 62 transmits the ending command set in step S1017 to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S301 of the above-described normal processing (see FIG. 11). Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the special winning opening / closing process. The audio light emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the open / close execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

  Further, when the MPU 62 determines that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less at step S1006 (YES), the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1010 described above. If the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 that the acceptance result is the "special outlier result" (YES), in step S1018, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the open / close counter SOC for update.

  In step S1019, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less. When the MPU 62 determines that the value of the open / close counter SOC is not “0” or less at step S1019 (NO), the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S1015 and the subsequent steps. When the MPU 62 determines in step S1019 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is “0” or less (YES), the MPU 62 executes the above-described processing of S1016 and subsequent steps.

Next, the special winning opening opening process of step S1004 in FIG. 18 will be described in detail.
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special winning opening opening process. In the special winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1106 as shown in FIG. In step S 1101, the MPU 62 sets “8” to the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 641 of the RAM 64. In step S1102, the MPU 62 determines whether the result of the pass / fail is the “special outlier result”. If the MPU 62 determines in step S1102 that the acceptance result is the "special outlier result" (YES), the MPU 62 sets "85" in the timer counter T in step S1103. As described above, the MPU 62 updates the timer counter T by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, the timer interrupt process is executed in a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S1102 that the yes / no result is not a “special outlier result” (NO), the distribution result is a small round high probability result in step S1104 (“invisible small round high probability result” or It is determined whether or not the "explicit small round high accuracy result").

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S1104 that the distribution result is the small round high probability result (YES), the MPU 62 sets “85” in the timer counter T in step S1103 described above. As described above, the MPU 62 updates the timer counter T by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, the timer interrupt process is executed in a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S1104 that the distribution result is not a small round high probability result (NO), the MPU 62 sets “15000” in the timer counter T in step S1105. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, the timer interrupt process is executed in a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 seconds.

  After executing the processing of step S1103 or step S1105, the MPU 62 executes open execution processing of the special winning opening 381 in step S1106. In the release execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open / close door 382 in an open state by executing drive control of the variable winning prize drive unit 383. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the special winning opening opening process.

  The value set in the winning counter PC in step S1101 defines the upper limit of the total winning number of gaming balls to the special winning opening 381. Further, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1103 or step S1105 defines the upper limit continuation time until the closed state is set again after the open / close door 382 is set in the open state. Therefore, as described above, the MPU 62 sets two types of upper limit durations different in length by setting “85” or “15000” in the timer counter T. Specifically, the MPU 62 sets a long time mode in which the upper limit continuation time is set to 30 seconds, and a short time mode in which the upper limit continuation time is set to 0.17 seconds which is shorter than that of the long time mode.

  In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 causes the gaming ball firing mechanism 81 to fire the gaming ball by exciting the solenoid of the gaming ball firing mechanism 81 in a cycle of 0.6 sec. Further, the MPU 62 sets the upper limit of the total number of winning game balls to the large winning opening 381 to eight by setting “8” in the winning counter PC. Therefore, the upper limit continuation time (30 sec) of the long time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total number of winning game balls to the large winning opening 381 and the firing cycle of the game balls, It is easy to win the game ball of the large winning opening 381. On the other hand, since the upper limit continuation time (0.17 sec) of the short time mode is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball, it is difficult to win the game ball in the large winning opening 381. Depending on the timing, it is possible to win about one game ball in the big winning opening 381.

Next, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode in step S914 in FIG. 17 will be described in detail.
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode. In the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1201 to S1212 as shown in FIG.

  In step S 1201, the MPU 62 determines whether the distribution result is “the most advantageous result” or “the explicit small round high probability result”. If the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the distribution result is “the most advantageous result” or “the explicit small round high probability result” (YES), the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64 in step S1202. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64. By this, the MPU 62 sets or maintains the support mode in the frequent support mode.

In step S1203, the MPU 62 clears the number limit flag stored in the RAM 64.
Here, when the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number restriction flag is not set, the high frequency support mode is continued until at least a "big hit" is obtained in the lottery.

  In step S1204, the MPU 62 sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 64. If the high probability mode flag is already set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains this. By this, the MPU 62 sets or maintains the success or failure lottery mode in the high probability mode. This high probability mode is continued at least until it is a "big hit" in the lottery. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

  In addition, when the transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode is ended, the MPU 62 sets the flags set in the RAM 64 in accordance with the distribution result (low probability result flag, implicit small round high probability result flag, explicit small round high Clear the positive result flag and the most favorable result flag) and the special out flag. In step S701 of the above-mentioned fluctuation start process (see FIG. 15), the MPU 62 determines whether the high probability mode is the high probability mode by determining whether the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 64 or not. Is determined.

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the distribution result is not the “most favorable result” or the “explicit small round high probability result” (NO), the distribution result is “invisible small round height in step S1205. It is determined whether or not it is a definite result. If the MPU 62 determines in step S 1205 that the distribution result is “invisible small round high probability result” (YES), the MPU 62 determines whether the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S 1206. .

  When the MPU 62 determines that the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S1206 (YES), the MPU 62 executes the processing in step S1203 and subsequent steps. When the MPU 62 determines that the high frequency support flag is not set in the RAM 64 in step S 1206 (NO), the MPU 62 sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 64 in step S 1207. If the high probability mode flag is already set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains this. By this, the MPU 62 sets or maintains the success or failure lottery mode in the high probability mode. This high probability mode is continued at least until it is a "big hit" in the lottery. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S1205 that the distribution result is not “invisible small round high probability result” (NO), it determines in step S1208 whether the distribution result is “low probability result” .

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1208 that the distribution result is not a "low probability result" (NO), that is, if it determines that the success or failure result is a "special outlier result", transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode Finish.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1208 that the distribution result is the “low probability result” (YES), the MPU 62 clears the high probability mode flag in step S1209. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the pass / fail lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low probability mode is continued until at least a "lot hit" is made in the winning lottery and the distribution result is other than the "low result".

  In step S1210, the MPU 62 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64. By this, the MPU 62 sets or maintains the support mode in the frequent support mode. In step S1211, the MPU 62 sets “100” to the value of the game number counter provided in the various counter areas 641 of the RAM 64. In step S1212, the MPU 62 sets the number limit flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains this when the number limit flag is already set in the RAM 64. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

  Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number-of-times restriction flag is set, 100 times of game times which is the end reference number of times set in the game number counter Continue until digested. The MPU 62 clears the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times restriction flag when it has digested 100 game times. By this, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode. Note that the MPU 62 executes these processes as the process for supporting the electronic combination in step S306 of the above-described normal process (see FIG. 11), but the detailed description will be omitted.

  As described above, when the winning result is "big hit" and the sorting result is "most favorable result" or "explicit small round high probability result" in the sorting lottery, the gaming state is the current gaming state Regardless of the switching mode (i.e., the round number specification mode), the high probability mode is entered and the high frequency support mode is entered. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode continue at least until a "big hit" is obtained in the pass / fail lottery.

  Also, when the current support mode is the high frequency support mode, if the jackpot wins the jackpot and the sorting result is "invisible small round high probability result" in the sorting lottery, the gaming state After the end of the open / close execution mode (ie, the round number specification mode), the high probability mode is entered and the high frequency support mode is entered. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode continue at least until a "big hit" is obtained in the pass / fail lottery.

  On the other hand, when the current support mode is the low frequency support mode, the jackpot wins in the hit / off lottery, and the sorting result in the sorting lottery becomes the "invisible small round high probability result" The game state shifts to the high probability mode and shifts to the low frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number specification mode) ends. The high probability mode and the low frequency support mode continue at least until a "big hit" is obtained in the pass / fail lottery.

  In addition, when it becomes “big hit winning” in the success or failure lottery and the distribution result becomes “low probability result” in the distribution lottery, the gaming state is the open / close execution mode (that is, the number of rounds regardless of the current gaming state) After termination of the regular mode), transition to the low probability mode and transition to the frequent support mode. The low probability mode continues at least until the jackpot is won in the lottery, and the high frequency support mode does not support the jackpot in the lottery, and when 100 game times are digested, the low frequency support Transition to mode

  In addition, when it does not become the “big hit” in the success or failure lottery, that is, when the result of the success or failure in the success or failure lottery becomes “specially out of place result” or “normally out of place”, the gaming state does not shift.

<Electric Configuration of Audio Emission Control Device 90 and Display Control Device 100>
FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the sound emission control apparatus and the display control apparatus. As shown in FIG. 21, the voice emission control device 90 includes a voice emission control substrate 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the voice emission control substrate 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 that constitute the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit (RTC), a data input / output circuit, and the like in addition to the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into a chip.

  The ROM 93 is configured to use a memory (i.e., nonvolatile storage means) such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory which does not require external power supply for storage, as a read only memory. The ROM 93 has a plurality of areas (areas) logically separated by logical addresses, and stores in each area various control programs and fixed value data used for executing processing according to the programs. ing. The MPU 92 controls the execution of the effect based on the instruction from the main control device 60 by executing the process according to the control program stored in the ROM 93. Since the ROM 93 is chipped with the CPU and connected by the internal bus, it is relatively difficult to increase the data capacity, and specifically, the data capacity is 2 M bytes.

  The RAM 94 is configured to use a memory (i.e., volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to store and retain the SRAM, DRAM, etc. for reading and writing, and allows random access and is identical The time required for reading is earlier than that of the ROM 93 when compared with the data capacity of the. The RAM 94 has a plurality of areas (areas) logically separated by logical addresses, and has, for example, various areas such as various counter areas and various flag storage areas. The RAM 94 temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. The fact that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92 is not an essential configuration, and each may be configured as an individual chip.

  The MPU 92 includes an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main controller 60. Further, the input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the operation button 28. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to the display lamp device 23, the first to third holding lamp units 53 to 55, the speaker unit 24, the light emitting element driving unit 29, the display control apparatus 100, and the like. The MPU 92 executes drive control of the display lamp device 23, the first to third holding lamp units 53 to 55, the speaker unit 24, and the like based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60. Further, the MPU 92 analyzes the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to determine the content of the effect in the predetermined period, and transmits the command according to the content of the determined effect to the display control device 100. A signal path provided to connect the MPU 92 and the MPU 102 is used for this command transmission. The audio light emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) such as a harness provided with connectors at both ends of the signal line.

  The MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp device 23 as well as the display control device 100 when the content of the effect in the predetermined period is determined. In this case, although it is described in FIG. 21 that the sound emission control substrate 91 and the display lamp device 23 are directly connected, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sound emission control substrate 91 and the display lamp device A relay board may be interposed between the two.

  MPU92 performs drive control of the speaker part 24, when the content of the presentation in a predetermined period is determined. The sound output LSI 95 and the common ROM 96 are used to control the drive of the speaker unit 24.

  The common ROM 96 is configured to use a memory (i.e., nonvolatile storage means) such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory which does not require an external power supply for storage, as a read only memory. The common ROM 96 is not directly connected to the MPU 92, but is externally attached to the sound output LSI 95, so it is easier to increase its data capacity than the ROM 93. Specifically, its data capacity is 1 Gbyte. However, this data capacity is arbitrary, and may be 500 Mbytes or 4 Gbytes.

  The sound output LSI 95 includes an I / F 951, a register 952, a sound data processing unit 953, a DAC 954, and a data transfer unit 955. The sound output LSI 95 executes control for outputting a sound from the speaker unit 24 in accordance with the data transmitted from the MPU 92.

  The I / F 951 is an interface for the sound output LSI 95 to communicate with the MPU 92 via the bus B1 provided as a signal path group for two-way communication. The bus B1 connected to the I / F 951 includes eight signal paths, and data transmission / reception is performed between the MPU 92 and the sound output LSI 95 via each signal path.

  The register 952 has a function as a storage unit for temporarily storing various data used in the sound output LSI 95, and uses a memory that requires an external power supply for storage and storage for both reading and writing It is configured to Further, random access is possible, and the time required for reading is faster than that of the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 when compared with the same data capacity.

  The register 952 has a data capacity of multiple bytes so as to be able to store and hold a plurality of data simultaneously, and has a data capacity in units of kilobytes or megabytes. Specifically, it has a data capacity of about 10 kilobytes.

  The sound data processing unit 953 converts the sequence data and parameter data transmitted from the MPU 92 and stored in the register 952 so that they can be used for outputting sound, and the contents of the conversion result and the common ROM 96 It has a function of creating digital musical tone data using the read sound data. The sequence data includes time data indicating the output start timing and output order of a series of sounds, and the parameter data includes data that defines the pitch, volume, timbre, etc. of the sound at a predetermined timing. There is.

  In addition, the sound data processing unit 953 has a function of a plurality of tone generation channels so that a plurality of different sounds can be output simultaneously, and digital synthesized tone data is synthesized by synthesizing digital tone data created for each sound generation channel. Have the ability to create Although a plurality of tone generation channels have functions for 16 channels, the number of channels is arbitrary. Further, although the use of virtual tracks enables the use of more tracks (for example, 64 tracks) than the actual number of tone generation channels, the virtual tracks may not be used.

  The DAC 954 is a digital / analog converter and includes an analog signal amplification circuit. The DAC 954 has a function of amplifying an analog voice signal obtained by converting the digital musical tone data or the digital synthesized musical tone data generated by the sound data processing unit 953 into an analog signal and outputting the amplified signal to the speaker unit 24.

  The data transfer unit 955 is connected to the common ROM 96 via the bus B2 provided as a signal path group for two-way communication, and has a function of transferring data read from the common ROM 96 to the register 952 ing. The bus B2 provided between the data transfer unit 955 and the common ROM 96 is composed of 16 signal paths, and the number of the signal paths is larger than that of the bus B1 between the MPU 92 and the I / F 951. It has become a number. The data communication speed between the data transfer unit 955 and the common ROM 96 is faster than the data communication speed between the MPU 92 and the I / F 951. Based on the data converted from the sequence data and the parameter data in the sound data processing unit 953, the data transfer unit 955 reads the sound data necessary for sound output from the common ROM 96 and stores the data in the register 952.

  Here, the data transfer unit 955 not only has a function of transferring necessary sound data to the register 952 in the sound data processing unit 953 but also reads out necessary data in the MPU 92 from the common ROM 96 and stores the data in the register 952 It has a function of transferring the data stored in the register 952 to the MPU 92. The configuration related to data transfer will be described below.

<Data Configuration of ROM 93 and Common ROM 96>
First, the data configuration of the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 will be described with reference to FIG. 22 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of the ROM 93, and FIG. 22 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of the common ROM 96. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 22 (a), the ROM 93 has a program for executing processing for effect control by the MPU 92, processing data (1), program and processing data (2),. And processing data (P) are stored in advance. The program and processing data include a data table used to execute each effect, sequence data and parameter data to be provided to the sound output LSI 95. A program and processing data required to execute processing for effect control by the MPU 92 are all stored in the ROM 93.

  The ROM 93 is used to control the light emission of the display lamp device 23 as well as the program and processing data (1), the program and processing data (2), ..., the program and processing data (P) The light emission data (1), the light emission data (2),..., The light emission data (Q) are stored in advance. In each of the light emission data, information on the type of light emitting unit to be lighted, the lighting period, and the lighting order in the display lamp device 23 is set in a predetermined effect period, and the contents of these light emission patterns are It differs according to the type of each light emission data. The respective light emission data stored in the ROM 93 are different in the period of light emission control to be an object, and the content of the light emission pattern is also different.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 22 (b), the common ROM 96 contains sound data (1), sound data (2),..., Sound data used to output a predetermined sound from the speaker unit 24. Data (S) is stored in advance. Each of these sound data includes melody data actually produced by an instrument corresponding to various timbres and waveform data obtained by sampling the sound, and the melody with lyrics is pronounced by an instrument corresponding to various timbres. It includes waveform data obtained by sampling speech, in addition to the melody played. Sound data is all stored in the common ROM 96. Note that sound data stored in the common ROM 96 includes music (BGM) and sound data (music data and sound data) corresponding to sounds used in effects A to D in FIG. For sound data (music data and sound data) corresponding to music and sound used in the effects of the first mode M1 to the fifth mode M5, music and sounds used in the effects MA to MC in the fourth mode of FIG. Corresponding sound data (music data and sound data) and the like are included.

  The sound data is data of a digital signal obtained by converting an analog signal into a pulse train at a predetermined sampling frequency and a predetermined number of quantization signals by pulse code modulation (PCM). Specifically, the sampling frequency is 44.1 kHz and the number of quantization signals is 16 bits. Therefore, the waveform data of a sound consisting of an analog signal for 1 sec has a data amount of 1 × 44.1 k × 16 bits. Incidentally, the sampling cycle T1 in this case is 22.7 μsec.

  The sound data is set to be readable from the common ROM 96 per pulse code modulated data for one pulse, that is, data for one sample. That is, the address setting is performed for each data of one sample, and the data transfer unit 955 of the sound output LSI 95 can transfer data from the common ROM 96 in data units of one sample.

  The sampling frequency is not limited to 44.1 kHz as long as good sampling can be realized, and may be, for example, 32 kHz, 48 kHz or 96 kHz. Further, the number of quantization signals is not limited to 16 bits, and the number of bits other than 16 bits may be used as long as good quantization can be realized.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 22 (b), the common ROM 96 contains not only sound data (1), sound data (2),... Sound data (S) but also light emission data (Q + 1) and light emission data (Q + 2) ),..., Light emission data (R) are stored in advance. These pieces of light emission data are different in the period of light emission control to be an object, and the contents of the light emission pattern are also different.

  As described above, the light emission data used by the MPU 92 is stored not only in the ROM 93 directly connected to the MPU 92 via the bus, but also in the common ROM 96 connected to the sound output LSI 95. In other words, the light emission data is distributed to and stored in the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96.

  By storing the light emission data in the common ROM 96 as described above, the data capacity of the light emission data can be increased without increasing the storage capacity of the ROM 93. In particular, ROM 93 is relatively difficult to increase its data capacity due to being connected via the internal bus in MPU 92 as described above, and it is attempted to increase data capacity. Then, it becomes necessary to expand the internal bus width, and it is not easy to cope with it. On the other hand, the common ROM 96 increases its data capacity because it is externally connected to the sound output LSI 95, not directly connected to the MPU 92 as described above. It is relatively easy. Then, by storing the light emission data in the common ROM 96, it is possible to cope with the increase in the data capacity of the light emission data.

  Also, basically, when setting data in the ROM, about several percent (for example, about 2%) of the total data capacity is blank (unused area). In this case, for example, assuming that the data capacity of the common ROM 96 is 1 Gbyte, the blank is 20 Mbytes. This data capacity is a large data capacity as compared to 2 M bytes which is the data capacity of the ROM 93. According to this configuration, it is possible to distribute and store the light emission data using such blanks.

  Furthermore, since the sound data corresponds to melody and voice for a predetermined period, the data capacity for performing a series of outputs is relatively large. As a result, the sound data becomes hard to adapt to data capacity, and in this respect as well, blanking tends to occur in the common ROM 96. And according to this structure, it becomes possible to distribute and save light emission data using such a blank.

  The light emission data stored in the common ROM 96 is used by the MPU 92, and when it is necessary to use the MPU 92 in response to a transfer instruction from the MPU 92, the sound output LSI 95 uses the common data. The light emission data is read from the ROM 96, and the read light emission data is transferred to the MPU 92. Then, at the time of this transfer, the bus B1 connecting the MPU 92 and the sound output LSI 95 is used. That is, the light emission data distributed and stored in the common ROM 96 is transferred to the MPU 92 using the signal path for transferring data from the MPU 92 to the sound output LSI 95 or from the sound output LSI 95 to the MPU 92. Thus, for example, a ROM different from the ROM 93 is externally attached to the MPU 92, and the surplus emission data is generated without increasing the number of signal paths, as compared to the configuration in which the emission data becoming the surplus is stored in the ROM. Can be stored.

  Of the program and processing data used by the MPU 92 and the light emission data, all of the program and processing data are stored in the ROM 93, and a part of the light emission data is stored in the common ROM 96 By doing this, it is possible to better distribute data. That is, when the program and processing data are distributed to the common ROM 96, another program and processing data are required to transfer the program and processing data to the RAM 94 of the MPU 92, and the program design is complicated. It becomes a thing. On the other hand, the light emission data is a method of grasping the address where the light emission data is originally stored, reading out the light emission data based on the address, transferring it, and expanding it so that it can be used. Therefore, even if the light emission data is distributed, the program design is unlikely to be complicated.

  Furthermore, when a command of a rendering system is transmitted from the main control device 60, the MPU 92 first executes a predetermined process corresponding to the command using a program, and uses light emission data in the process of executing the predetermined process. And control the display lamp device 23. That is, while the program needs to be read out suddenly upon receipt of a command from the main control unit 60 and the read-out timing is highly arbitrary, the light emission data is used in the process of executing the predetermined processing. Low randomness of timing to be read. In addition, since light emission data is used on the premise of execution of a predetermined process using a program, the read priority is higher for the program, and if the read of the program is delayed, it will be in a process waiting state. Under these circumstances, the program is stored in the ROM 93, and at least a part of the light emission data is stored in the common ROM 96, so that the program can be read independently by the MPU 92 regardless of the state of the sound output LSI 95. It is possible to favorably realize the increase of the data amount for the light emission data in which the data amount tends to be larger than the program while making it possible.

  Furthermore, not all of the light emission data is stored in the common ROM 96, but a part of the light emission data is stored in the ROM 93, and the remaining is stored in the common ROM 96. The excellent effects as described above can be achieved while suppressing the increase in extremes.

<Configuration of Register 952 of Sound Output LSI 95>
Next, refer to FIG. 23 for the configuration of the register 952 used for instructing sound output from the MPU 92 to the sound output LSI 95 and transferring the sound data stored in the common ROM 96 from the sound output LSI 95 to the MPU 92. While explaining. FIG. 23 is a conceptual diagram for illustrating the configuration of register 952.

  As shown in FIG. 23, based on the areas 9523a to 9523e where data setting is performed when the MPU 92 instructs the sound output LSI 95 to output sound to the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and the data transfer instruction from the MPU 92. Buffers 9524a to 9524e for temporarily storing data read from the common ROM 96, an area 9525 where data setting is performed when a data transfer instruction is issued to the sound output LSI 95, and the sound output LSI 95. An area 9526 for recognizing the internal state in the MPU 92 is separately provided.

  More specifically, the areas 9523a for the first parameter, the area 9523b for the second parameter, and the area 9523c for the third parameter are used as the areas where data setting is performed when sound output instruction is performed. And a plurality of areas 9523a to 9523d for parameters such as an area 9523d for fourth and fourth parameters. In addition, an area 9523 e for sequence data is provided.

  In each of the parameter areas 9523 a to 9523 d, parameter data necessary for outputting a melody and a sound effect are stored, and parameter data necessary for outputting a sound are stored. As described above, by providing a plurality of parameter areas 9523 a to 9523 d, a plurality of sounds can be simultaneously generated. Also, the sequence data already described is stored in the area 9523 e for sequence data.

  Incidentally, since the sound output LSI 95 has a function for 16 channels, parameter data for a plurality of (specifically, four) channels is stored in the area for one parameter. Further, in the configuration using virtual tracks, a larger number of parameters may be stored in the area for one parameter.

  A transfer instruction area 9525 is provided as an area in which data setting is performed when the MPU 92 issues a data transfer instruction to the sound output LSI 95. The transfer instruction area 9525 stores address data of light emission data necessary for the MPU 92 and data for giving a transfer instruction to the MPU 92 of the light emission data read from the common ROM 96 to the sound output LSI 95. .

  A plurality of external read buffers 9524 a to 9524 e are provided as an area for temporarily storing and holding data read from the common ROM 96 based on a data transfer instruction from the MPU 92. The light emission data required by the MPU 92 is temporarily stored in the buffers 9524 a to 9524 e for external reading, and transferred to the MPU 92 when a predetermined reading timing is reached.

  A flag area 9526 is provided as an area for the MPU 92 to recognize the internal state of the sound output LSI 95. For example, a read completion flag is provided as flag area 9526, and transfer of corresponding data from common ROM 96 to the external read buffers 9524a to 9524e is completed in response to a data transfer instruction from MPU 92. In addition, “1” is stored in the read completion flag, and the fact is grasped by the MPU 92.

  The above areas 9523a to 9523e and 9525 to 9526 and the buffers 9524a to 5524e are all areas accessible by the MPU 92, but the areas 9523a to 9523e and 9525 to 9526 and the buffers 9524a to 5524e are simultaneously accessed. Instead, it is configured to switch between accessible targets. That is, the number of areas simultaneously accessible in the MPU 92 corresponds to the number of first to eighth signal paths (eight in the present embodiment) constituting the bus B1 between the MPU 92 and the sound output LSI 95. There is.

  Specifically, a first parameter area 9523a and one external read buffer 9524a are allocated as a first area 9521a corresponding to the first signal path constituting the bus B1, and the bus B1 is configured. As the second area 9521b corresponding to the second signal path, an area 9523b for the second parameter and one external read buffer 9524b are allocated, and a third area corresponding to the third signal path constituting the bus B1. A third parameter area 9523c and one external read buffer 9524c are allocated as 9521c, and a fourth area 9523d is a fourth area 9521d corresponding to a fourth signal path constituting the bus B1. And one external read buffer 9524d is assigned. To have. Further, an area 9523e for sequence data and one external read buffer 9524e are allocated as a fifth area 9521e corresponding to the fifth signal path constituting the bus B1.

  A transfer instructing area 9525 is allocated as an area corresponding to the sixth signal path forming the bus B1, and a flag area 9526 is allocated as an area corresponding to the seventh signal path forming the bus B1. .

  Selectors 9522a to 9522e are provided corresponding to the first area 9521a to the fifth area 9521e, respectively, for the register 952, and the selectors 9522a to 9522e are provided with the MPU 92 as the first area 9521a to the fifth area 9521e. Accessible areas can be switched. This switching is performed through binary switching to a selector area 9527 provided in the register 952 in correspondence to the eighth signal path constituting the bus B1.

  In detail, when the information in the area for selector 9527 is “0” which is an initial value, the first area 9521 a to the fifth area 9521 e are controlled for sound output by setting the area to be accessed by the selectors 9522 a to 9522 e. This corresponds to the areas 9523a to 9523e for use. That is, when the information in the selector area 9527 is an initial value, the MPU 92 can access the areas 9523 a to 9523 d for the respective parameters and the area 9523 e for the sequence data, and the sound output LSI 95 It becomes possible to issue an output instruction of That is, the sound output LSI 95 is in a first interference state with the MPU 92.

  When the information in the selector area 9527 is "1", which is the switching execution value, the first area 9521a to the fifth area 9521e are external read buffers 9524a due to the setting of the access target area by the selectors 9522a to 9522e. It corresponds to ~ 9524e. That is, when the information in the selector area 9527 is the switching execution value, the MPU 92 can access the external read buffers 9524 a to 9524 e, and can read the data for which the transfer instruction has been issued. It becomes. That is, the sound output LSI 95 is in the second interference state with respect to the MPU 92.

  On the other hand, the transfer instruction area 9525, the flag area 9526, and the selector area 9527 are not to be switched by the selectors 9522a to 9522e. Therefore, even if the sound output LSI 95 is in any interference state, the MPU 92 can access the transfer instruction area 9525, the flag area 9526, and the selector area 9527.

  The display control apparatus 100 includes a display control board 101, an MPU 102, a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 constituting the MPU 102, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Here, the MPU 102 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like in addition to the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into a chip. The MPU 102, the VDP 105, the character ROM 106, and the video RAM 107 are mounted on the display control board 101.

  The MPU 102 controls the VDP 105 based on a command transmitted from the audio light emission control device 90. Specifically, the MPU 102 analyzes the command transmitted from the sound emission control apparatus 90, and controls the VDP 105 by generating a command for the VDP 105 based on the analysis result.

  The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile memory that does not require an external power supply to hold stored information, and can not write. It is a semiconductor element. The program ROM 103 has various areas such as an effect data storage area 1031. These areas will be described in detail later.

  The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the program ROM 103 is executed, and is volatile which requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. It is a memory. The work RAM 104 has various areas such as various counter areas 1041 and various flag storage areas 1042. These areas will be described in detail later. In the first embodiment, volatile memory such as DRAM or SRAM is used as the work RAM 104, but nonvolatile memory such as MRAM may be used.

  The VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 51. Since the VDP 105 is formed into an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and its substance is to be said to be a microcomputer chip incorporating firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 reads image data from the character ROM 106 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 102, and stores the image data in the video RAM 107.

  The character ROM 106 previously stores various image data (image information) including sprite data such as symbols and characters displayed on the symbol display device 51, background data, moving image data and the like, and functions as an image data library. The character ROM 106 holds bit map format image data of various patterns, a color pallet table to be referred to when determining a color to be expressed in each dot of the bit map image, and the like. The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 51, and the display content of the symbol display device 51 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

  Returning to the explanation of the sound emission control device 90, the MPU 92 recognizes that it is necessary to start the effect for the game cycle by receiving the variation command transmitted from the main control device 60, and the effect for the game cycle Execute start processing. Further, by receiving an end command transmitted from the main control device 60, it is recognized that it is necessary to end the effects for the game use, and the effect for ending the game use is executed. Further, by receiving various commands for the jackpot effect transmitted from the main control device 60, it is recognized that it is necessary to start the jackpot effect or it is necessary to proceed, and the jackpot effect processing is executed. Further, by receiving a command for demonstration display transmitted from the main control device 60, it recognizes that it is necessary to start the demonstration display, and executes the processing for demonstration display. Note that the command reception from the main control device 60 in the MPU 92 is not limited to the configuration in which the command is directly received from the main control device 60, and may be a configuration in which the command relayed by the relay board is received. .

  In the game-use effect start process, the process of grasping the fluctuation display time for grasping the fluctuation display time (display continuation period) of the corresponding game time and the presence or absence of the reach display are grasped based on both commands of fluctuation command and type command. The reach display grasping process to be performed, the grasping process of jackpot result occurrence which grasps the presence or absence of the jackpot result, and the jackpot classification process of grasping the jackpot type when the jackpot result occurs are executed. In addition, based on the grasped result in reach display grasping processing, jackpot result occurrence grasping processing and jackpot type grasping processing, a display effect to determine the type of display effect to be performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in the main game run While executing the grasping process, the symbol type grasping process is executed to determine the type of symbol to be displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in the final game run. Then, based on the result of each grasping process, the display control apparatus 100 displays a fluctuation pattern command including information on fluctuation display time and information on type of display effect, and a symbol designation command including information on the type of symbol to be displayed in the final stop. Send to

  Further, in the game-use effect start process, in addition to the above-mentioned grasping processes, a notice display lottery process as to whether or not to perform notice display is executed. In this case, in the lottery process, the type lottery of the advance notice is also executed. Then, if it is determined that the advance notice display is generated, a notice command including the information of the notice display type is transmitted to the display control device 100. In addition, in the game circulation effect start process, based on the processing result of each process, light emission data for the game circulation (including sequence data and parameter data) and sound data for the game circulation (sequence data and parameter data) Are read from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, and the light emission mode by the display lamp device 23 and the output mode from the speaker unit 24 are defined.

  In the game turn effect end process, the light emission control of the display lamp device 23 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 24 in the current game turn are ended. In addition, in the game circulation effect end process, an end command including information to be ended of the game circulation effect is transmitted to the display control device 100. In the jackpot effect processing, based on the received various commands for jackpot effect, it grasps the effect mode such as opening time, each round time, each round time, each round time and ending time, and for the jackpot effect corresponding to the grasped result Is sent to the display control apparatus 100. In addition, based on the grasped result, the display data for the jackpot effect, the sequence data for the jackpot effect, the parameter data and the sound data, the light emission data are read from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, and the light emission of the display lamp device 23 during the jackpot effect The mode and the output mode of the sound from the speaker unit 24 are defined.

  In the process for demonstration display, the presentation mode of the demonstration display is grasped based on the received command for demonstration display, and the demonstration display command corresponding to the grasped result is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. Further, based on the grasped result, light emission data for demonstration display (including sequence data and parameter data) and sound data for demonstration display (including sequence data and parameter data) are read out from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, A light emission mode of the display lamp device 23 by the light emitting element drive unit 29 and an output mode of sound from the speaker unit 24 during the demonstration display are defined. The processing executed by the MPU 92 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60 includes processing for controlling the light emission of the various lamp units 53 to 55, in addition to the above processing.

  Further, the MPU 92 recognizes that the operation button 28 has been operated by receiving the operation signal transmitted from the operation button 28 based on the operation of the operation unit of the operation button 28, and the operation corresponding processing is performed. Run. In addition, even when the state being operated is released, it is recognized by the fall of the operation signal, and the operation corresponding processing is executed. In the operation corresponding process, an operation mode is specified according to the type of operation signal, and an operation generation command including information on the operation of the operation button 28 and information on the operation mode is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. Further, in the operation corresponding process, when the operation of the operation unit is canceled (cancelled), the operation cancellation command is transmitted to the display control device 100. Further, in the operation corresponding process, in addition to the transmission of the command, the light emission mode by the light emitting element drive unit 29 and the output mode of the sound from the speaker unit 24 are defined to correspond to the operation of the operation button 28.

<About the timer interrupt process executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device. The MPU 92 of the voice light emission control device 90 executes timer interrupt processing for advancing the game. In this timer interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 24, the MPU 92 executes steps S1301 to S1305 periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle).

  In step S1301, the MPU 92 executes command storage processing. In the command storage process, when the MPU 92 receives a command from the MPU 62, the MPU 92 stores the received command in the RAM 94. Specifically, the RAM 94 has a ring buffer for storing and reading the command received from the MPU 62, and the MPU 92 stores the command in the ring buffer in the order received from the MPU 62. The MPU 92 reads commands from the ring buffer in accordance with the order stored in the ring buffer.

  In step S1302, the MPU 92 executes effect determination processing based on the command received from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. In the effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes an effect for game use, an effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like. In step S1303, the MPU 92 executes a demonstration display execution process based on the command received from the MPU 62. In the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 92 executes the demonstration display when a predetermined start waiting period for demonstration start (for example, 3 sec) has elapsed without the start of a new game play after the game play is over. . The effect determination process of step S1302 will be described in detail later.

  In step S1304, the MPU 92 emits light for controlling the light emission of the display lamp device 23 and the first to third suspension lamp units 53 to 55 based on the contents of the effect determination process of step S1302 and the demonstration display execution process of step S1303. Execute control processing. In step S1305, the MPU 92 executes voice control processing for voice control of the speaker unit 24 based on the contents of the effect determination processing of step S1302 and the demonstration display execution processing of step S1303. Thereafter, the MPU 92 ends the timer interrupt process.

<About the effect determination process executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process. The MPU 92 of the voice light emission control device 90 executes the effect determination process in order to execute effects for game use, effects for the open / close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1401 to S1415 as shown in FIG.

  In step S1401, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the variation command and type command transmitted from the MPU 62 have been received. When the MPU 92 determines in step S1401 that each command has not been received (NO), the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S1409 and subsequent steps. In addition, when the MPU 92 determines that each command is received in step S1401 (YES), the game result is “most favorable result” or “low probability result” in step S1402 based on the content of the type command. It is determined whether the

  If the MPU 92 determines in step S1402 that the game result is "most favorable result" or "low probability result" (YES), the MPU 92 executes symbol determination processing corresponding to the type of the game result in step S1403. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is "the most advantageous result", the same odd number or the same even number is displayed as the stop result to be finally stopped on the stop symbol effective line L. If the information related to the combination of symbols having numbers (for example, “1.1.1” or “2.2.2”) is determined and it is determined that the game result is “low probability result”, the stop symbol effective line Information on a combination of symbols (for example, “2 ····· 2”) having the same even number as a stop result to finally stop and display on L is determined. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

  If the MPU 92 determines in step S1402 that the game result is not the “most favorable result” or the “low probability result” (NO), the game result is “normally out of step” based on the content of the type command in step S1404. It is determined whether it is a result. If the MPU 92 determines in step S 1404 that the game result is not the “normal out result” (NO), that is, the game result is “special out result”, “invisible small round high certainty result”, and “invisible small round high If it is determined that the result is "certain result", in step S1405, a common symbol determination process is executed. In the symbol determination processing for common use, the MPU 92 determines information concerning a combination of special symbols as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L. Specifically, the MPU 92 is not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a combination of special symbols having different numbers which are not selected in the case of a “normally out-of-order” result in the result of the lottery (for example, Decide "3.4.1". In addition, the combination of this special symbol is the same regardless of the type of the game result.

  Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “normal out result” in step S 1404 (YES), the MPU 92 executes symbol determination processing for the normal out in step S 1406. In the symbol determination processing for normal removal, the MPU 92 determines whether or not reach display occurs based on the content of the variation command.

  When it is determined that the reach display is generated, the MPU 92 determines the information related to the combination of the reach display symbols as the stop result of the final stop display on the stop symbol effective line L. In addition, the combination of the symbols of the reach display is randomly determined by lottery or the like. Moreover, MPU92 determines the information which concerns on the combination of the symbol different from the combination of each symbol mentioned above as a stop result which makes a stop display finally on a stop symbol effective line L, when it determines with reach display not occurring. Specifically, the MPU 92 randomly determines a symbol of a combination different from any of the combination of symbols having the same number, the combination of special symbols, and the combination of reach display symbols by lottery or the like.

  After executing any of the processes of step S1403, step S1405, and step S1406, the MPU 92 executes an effect pattern determination process in step S1407. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the data stored in advance in the ROM 93 to select an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command. Specifically, the MPU 92 selects, as the effect pattern, the effect continuation time (effect continuation period) and the content of the effect. Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp device 23 and the sound control of the speaker unit 24 based on the selected effect pattern.

  In step S1408, the MPU 92 generates a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in any of the processes in step S1403, step S1405, and step S1406, and a pattern command including the effect pattern selected in step S1407. Is sent to the display control apparatus 100. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 uses the data display area for the program ROM 103 to execute a data table for causing the symbol display device 51 to produce effects for the game run based on the stop result command and the pattern command transmitted from the MPU 92. Read from 1031 Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on the data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, a cycle of 20 msec) is reached. By this, the symbol display device 51 executes effects for the game circulation based on the effect pattern selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90, and stops the stop result determined by the MPU 92 on the stop symbol effective line L. Make it finally stop.

  After executing the process of step S1408, or when determining that the variation command and the type command have not been received (NO), the MPU 92 executes the process of step S1409 and subsequent steps. In step S1409, the MPU 92 determines whether an opening command has been received.

  If the MPU 92 determines in step S1409 that the opening command has not been received (NO), the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S1413 and subsequent steps. If the MPU 92 determines in step S1409 that an opening command has been received (YES), it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command in step S1410.

  In step S1411, the MPU 92 executes an effect determination process for the open / close execution mode corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S1410. In the process of determining the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “special out result” or the “invisible small round high probability result” in step S1410, as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode Select the effect A.

  Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “explicit small round high probability result”, the MPU 92 selects the effect B as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “most advantageous result”, the MPU 92 selects the effect C as the effect for the open / close execution mode. In addition, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “low probability result”, the MPU 92 selects the effect D as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Note that the durations of effect A and effect B correspond to the time when opening and closing the special winning opening 381 is performed twice in a short time mode in the opening and closing execution mode. Further, the durations of the effects C and D correspond to the time when the opening and closing of the special winning opening 381 is performed 15 times in a long time mode in the opening and closing execution mode.

  Further, in step S1411, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp device 23 and the sound control of the speaker unit 24 based on the selection result of the effects A to D.

  In step S1412, the MPU 92 transmits, to the display control apparatus 100, an open / close execution mode command including information related to the effect for the open / close execution mode selected in step S1411. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for causing the symbol display device 51 to produce effects for the open / close execution mode based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on the data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, a cycle of 20 msec) is reached. Thereby, the symbol display device 51 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

  After executing the processing of step S1412, or when it is determined that the opening command has not been received at step S1409 (NO), the MPU 92 causes the player to select the mode effect after the end of the jackpot game at step S1413. It is determined whether or not the type selection process is to be generated, and the effect type selection process is executed according to the determination result. The effect type selection process will be described in detail later.

  In step S1414, the MPU 92 executes effect transfer processing. In the effect transfer process, the MPU 92 performs a process of transition to a mode effect after the end of the jackpot game selected in step S1413. The details of the effect transfer process in step S1414 will be described later.

  In step S1415, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In the other processing, the MPU 92 executes processing for advancing the effect for the open / close execution mode and the effect after the open / close execution mode ends based on, for example, the release command, the close command and the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Thereafter, the MPU 92 ends the effect determination process.

<About the relationship between the game result and the game state>
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result and the game state and the like based on the execution of various processes will be described. FIG. 26 is a view showing the relationship between the game result and the game state and the like. Specifically, FIG. 26 is a view showing the relationship between the game result and the game state and the like excluding the “normally out of place result”, and the game results are arranged in the column direction, and the game state and the like are arranged in the row direction. The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 26, as a game result excluding the "normally out of place result", the success or failure result of "big hit" and "specially out of place", "invisible small round high certainty result", "explicitly It has the distribution results of “small round high probability result”, “most favorable result”, and “low probability result”.

  Here, as shown in the second row of Table 2 of FIG. 26, the "special outlier result" is a game result that is selected when it is not the "big hit" in the winning or losing lottery (symbol x in the figure). Further, the distribution result is a game result that is selected when the "big hit" is obtained in the lottery for success or failure (symbol in the figure). Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result excluding the “normally out of place result” and the game state and the like will be described. In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state etc. as follows, but the combination of the game result and the game state etc., the contents of the game result, The contents of the game state and the like are optional.

  In the "special out result", the open / close execution mode is not the round number regulation mode, but shifts to the opening / closing number regulation mode, and the opening and closing of the special winning opening 381 is executed twice in a short time manner. In addition, in the “special out-of-classification result”, it does not shift to the success or failure lottery mode. In the “invisible small round high probability result”, the open / close execution mode is shifted to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the upper limit number of times of 2 and the opening and closing of the big winning opening 381 is executed twice in a short time mode Be done. In the “invisible small round high probability result”, the pass / fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. As described above, the “specially disappointing result” and the “invisible few round high certainty result” are common in that the opening and closing of the big winning opening 381 is performed twice in a short time mode, although the types of opening and closing execution modes are different doing.

  Further, in the “specially out of place result” and the “invisible small round high probability result”, the stop result is a combination of special symbols and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect A. The effect A includes an effect for opening in the open / close execution mode, an effect for a situation in which the variable winning device in the open / close execution mode is opened and closed, and an effect during ending in the open / close execution mode. It is configured as a series of effects. Also, the support mode does not shift in the "special outlier result" and the "invisible little round high probability result". In addition, the symbol display device 51 does not display on the display screen G an image that clearly indicates that the high probability mode is in use at the game time after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  Therefore, the player can not grasp whether the game result is the “special out-of-order result” or the “invisible small round high-probability result” by confirming the stop result and the effect A. In other words, the symbol display device 51 wins the lottery in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends even when the “invisible small round high probability result” is obtained in the distribution lottery and the high probability mode is entered. Mode spoofs as if not transitioning. Therefore, the player can play the game while enjoying the prediction of whether the success or failure lottery mode has shifted to the high probability mode.

  In the "explicit small round high probability result", the opening and closing execution mode is shifted to the round number defining mode in which the round game is performed with the upper limit number of times twice, and the opening and closing of the big winning opening 381 is executed twice in a short time manner. Ru. Further, in the “explicit small round high probability result”, the pass / fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. Further, in the “explicit small round high probability result”, the stop result is a combination of special symbols and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is effect B. The effect B includes an effect for opening in the opening / closing execution mode, an effect for a situation in which the variable winning device is opened and closed, and an effect during ending in the opening / closing execution mode. It is configured. Also, in the "explicit small round high probability result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Furthermore, the symbol display device 51 displays on the display screen G an image that clearly indicates that it is the high probability mode in the game time after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Therefore, the player can grasp that the game result is the “explicit small round high probability result” by confirming the stop result and the effect for the open / close execution mode.

  In the "most favorable result" and "low probability result", the opening and closing execution mode is shifted to the round number defining mode in which the round game is performed with the upper limit number of times of 15 and the opening and closing of the special winning opening 381 is 15 in a long time mode. Run once. Here, in the "most advantageous result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number or the same even number, and the pass / fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the open / close execution mode The effect of is the effect C. The effect C includes an effect for opening in the opening / closing execution mode, an effect for a situation in which the variable winning device is opened and closed, and an effect during ending in the opening / closing execution mode. It is configured.

  Moreover, in the "low probability result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and the pass / fail lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect D and Become. Furthermore, in the "most favorable result" and the "low probability result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. The effect D includes an effect for opening in the opening / closing execution mode, an effect for a situation in which the variable winning device is opened and closed, and an effect during ending in the opening / closing execution mode. It is configured.

  In the first embodiment, the presentation time of each opening presentation is the same. Moreover, in 1st Embodiment, the presentation time of each ending production is the same. However, it is optional how long the presentation time of the opening presentation and the presentation time of the ending presentation are performed, and the presentation time of the opening presentation and the presentation of the ending presentation may be different times. In addition, the presentation time may be reached for each game result, that is, for each opening presentation, or only a part of the opening presentation may be different in presentation time. Furthermore, the rendering time may be reached for each game result, that is, for each ending effect, or only a part of the ending effects may be different.

<Game flow>
FIG. 27 is a diagram for explaining the game flow developed in the pachinko machine 10. When starting the game with the pachinko machine 10, the game is started from the first mode M1. The “first mode” (normal mode) is a mode in which the game mode in which the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode does not exist. In the first mode M1, by causing the game ball to enter the first starting opening 36, the special figure 1 starts to change and the game progresses.

  In the first mode M1, when the "invisible small round high probability result" is won, it shifts to the second mode M2 (takeoff mode). The “second mode” is a mode in which the game state in which the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode does not exist. The second mode M2 is a mode in which the next jackpot is committed, and the high probability mode continues until the next jackpot.

  In addition, in the first mode M1, if the "explicit small round high probability result" is won, it shifts to the third mode M3 (flight mode). The “third mode” is a mode in which the success or failure lottery mode is a high probability mode, and the support mode is a gaming state with no limit. The third mode M3 is a mode in which the next jackpot is committed, and the high probability mode and the support mode continue until the next jackpot.

  In the first mode M1, when the player wins the "most favorable result", the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) is entered. The “fourth mode” is a mode in which the success or failure lottery mode is a high probability mode, and the support mode is a gaming state with no limit on the number of times. The fourth mode M4 is a mode in which the next jackpot has been committed, and the high probability mode and the support mode continue until the next jackpot. In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has, as the effects of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode), a plurality of types of effects MA to MC (three types in the first embodiment) having different effect contents.

  In the first embodiment, an effect type selection effect for selecting the effect type in the fourth mode M4 is executed during the effect of the opening / closing execution mode of the “most advantageous result”, more specifically, during the round game. An image for selecting an effect in mode M4 is displayed on the display screen G. When the player operates the operation button 28 and selects a desired effect from among the effects MA to MC displayed on the display screen G, the effect in the fourth mode M4 to be shifted after the game of the “most advantageous result” is selected It will be a rendition. In the fourth mode M4, since the next jackpot is committed, the fourth mode M4 continues until the next jackpot.

  In the first mode M1, when the "low probability result" is won, the fifth mode M5 (revenge mode) is entered. The “fifth mode” is a game state mode in which the success or failure lottery mode is a low probability mode, and the support mode is a high frequency support mode up to a limit of 100 times. In the fifth mode M5, if the jackpot is not promised next time and the support mode wins the jackpot again by 100 times which is the number limit, it will be a revenge success, but the support mode will be 100 times which is the number limit If the jackpot is not won again, the revenge fails, the high-frequency support ends, and the success or failure lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode and the first mode M1 having no support mode.

  In addition, the game flow shown in FIG. 27 shows an example of a typical game flow, and does not cover all the flow of the game of the pachinko machine 10 which concerns on 1st Embodiment. For example, in the first embodiment, the mode transition is not performed for the special out result (small hit), but as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has the “special out result (small hit result)”. The “specially out of place result” is not a trigger for transition to the pass / fail lottery mode or the support mode, but is a trigger for transition to the open / close execution mode. Therefore, the mode transition may be made when the "special out-of-class result" is won.

<Example of effect image>
Next, the effect image displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described by way of an example. When the internal lottery of the jackpot is performed in the pachinko machine 10, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, and the variation display is performed on the main display unit 46, but as described above, the main display unit 46 The display area of is set to be extremely small, and it is difficult for the player focusing on various effects executed by the symbol display device 51 to easily recognize each information in the lighted state. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, as described with reference to FIG. 3, a variable display effect is performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 using a decoration figure that is a effect pattern. In FIG. 28, illustration of the background image is omitted.

<Before change display>
FIG. 28 (A): The special drawing 1 is in a state before the start of the fluctuation (the state of not being in demonstration effect). At this time, according to the stop display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, the decoration figure of the symbol display columns Z1 to Z3 is also in the state of being stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L.

<Changed display production start>
FIG. 28 (B): In synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1, the fluctuation display effect is started by the scroll of the symbol display columns Z1 to Z3 on the display screen of the display screen G. That is, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, each decoration figure of the symbol display columns Z1 to Z3 scrolls (flows) in the vertical direction in the display screen of the display screen G. Is started. In addition, the fluctuation display of each symbol display row Z1-Z3 is shown by the downward arrow in FIG. In addition, during the variable display, by displaying (transparent display) the individual effect pattern in a transparent state, it is displayed in a state where the image (background image) serving as the background of the effect pattern is easily visible at this time on the display screen. Be done.

  The background image in this case is, for example, a representation of a landscape such as an airfield. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode on presentation is, for example, the “first mode”. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as described above, the “first mode” is the gaming state (normal mode) in which the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is not. The pachinko machine 10 is additionally provided with various effect modes, and different background images are prepared for each effect mode. The difference between these modes corresponds to the difference between the internal "pass / fail lottery mode" and the "support mode". Although not particularly shown in FIG. 28, after that, for example, an image such as a specific character or an item may be displayed on the display screen to perform the notice effect.

<Stop display of symbol display column Z1>
FIG. 28C: When a predetermined time (for example, about half of the fluctuation time) elapses, the symbol display column Z1 first stops the fluctuation display. In this example, it represents that the decoration figure showing "8" of a number was stopped and displayed on stop symbol effective line L.

<Stop display of symbol display column Z3>
FIG. 28D: Following the symbol display row Z1, the symbol display row Z3 stops the variable display. In this example, it represents that the decoration figure showing "3" of a number was stopped and displayed on stop symbol effective line L. Since it has been determined that no reach condition has already occurred at this point, it is almost apparent in appearance that this change is a non-reach (normal) change. In addition, we shall exclude reach change by slip pattern etc. here. With "slip pattern", for example, a decoration drawing representing the number "7" is temporarily stopped and displayed temporarily, then a decoration drawing representing the number "8" is stopped and displayed by sliding the symbol display row by one pattern, It is what develops to reach by that. Alternatively, once the decoration drawing representing the numeral “9” is temporarily displayed, the decoration drawing slips by one symbol in the reverse direction and the decoration drawing representing the numeral “8” is stopped and displayed. The pattern which develops is also considered. In addition to this, for example, after a rendering symbol representing a completely different number such as "5" is temporarily stopped and displayed, a character appears on the screen and the variable display of the symbol display column Z3 is resumed. A pattern is also conceivable in which the decoration drawing representing 8 "is stopped and displayed to reach reach.

<Stop indication effect>
FIG. 28 (E): The last symbol display column Z2 stops the variable display in synchronization with the stop display of the special view 1 or the special view 2. When the result of the internal lottery this time is non-winning, and the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed in the non-winning (missing) mode, the non-winning (missing) combination is similarly stopped and displayed. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 28 (E), it represents that the decoration drawing representing the numeral "1" is stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L, and in this case, the combination of decoration drawings is "8 · 1・ Because it becomes a break of 3 ”, it is expressed in the effect that it corresponds to the usual" break "in this fluctuation.

  In the above, with reference to FIG. 28, an example of the variable display and the stop display (at the time of non-winning) performed using the decoration drawing for each change is described. While making the player have a sense of expectation for the success or failure of the jackpot through the effects displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 as such, at the end, clearly teaching the result of the internal lottery on the effect Can.

<Example of production of variable display>
In FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, in the first mode M1 (the winning lottery mode is the low probability mode and the gaming state without the support mode), the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and is distributed to the “most advantageous result” ( It is a continuous view showing an example of production of production C performed when what is called first hit. In the following description, descriptions of matters common to the above-described presentation example will be omitted. In FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, illustration of the background image is omitted.

<Before start of variable display effect>
FIG. 29A: The symbol display columns Z1 to Z3 are displayed on the display screen G in a large size. In each of the symbol display columns Z1 to Z3, combinations of decoration drawings representing the numbers "9.1.3" are stopped and displayed.

<Changed display production start>
FIG. 29 (B): Fluctuation display effects are started by scrolling the symbol display columns Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G.

<Stop display of symbol display column Z1>
FIG. 29C: The symbol display column Z1 is stopped and displayed on the display screen G. In FIG. 29C, the decoration drawing representing the numeral "1" is stopped and displayed.

<Stop display of symbol display column Z3>
In FIG. 29D, the symbol display column Z3 is stopped and displayed on the display screen G. In FIG. 29 (D), the decoration drawing representing the numeral "1" is stopped and displayed.

<Stop indication effect>
FIG. 29 (E): The symbol display column Z2 is stopped and displayed in synchronization with the stop display of the special view 1 or the special view 2. Normally, if the special symbol is stopped and displayed with the disengaging symbol, the decoration display which is the effect pattern displayed on the display screen G is also stopped and displayed in the same manner. However, in FIG. 29 (E), the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “the most advantageous result”, and the decoration display representing the numeral “1” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display column Z2.

<Effect in open / close execution mode>
When the combination of the decoration of the big hit is stopped and displayed on the display screen G, the open / close execution mode is then set, and the effect of the open / close execution mode according to the lottery result of the big hit is executed on the display screen G. Specifically, the effect C is executed as an effect of the open / close execution mode of the “most advantageous result” which is the result of the internal lottery.

  FIG. 30F: When the mode is switched to the open / close execution mode, an opening effect is executed. In this opening effect, for example, the background image displayed on the display screen G is largely changed, and the character image G1 such as "BONUS!" Is largely displayed on the display screen G, and the player is jacked a jackpot It is informed. In addition, as long as the player can be notified that the jackpot has been won, the notification may be made in another mode (for example, output of sound).

  FIG. 30G: Next, in order to inform the player that the game is played by right-handling, for example, a character image G2 of “right-handed!” And a right-pointing arrow are displayed large on the display screen G Ru. At this time, a right-pointing arrow is displayed on the right of the character image G3 of "right hitting!" So that playing a right hitting game is emphasized. Further, in accordance with the notification of the right-handed game on the display screen G, for example, a sound of “right-handed!” Is output from the speaker unit 24. In the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 2, the variable winning device 38 is provided on the right side of the game board 31, and in order to win the gaming ball to the big winning opening 381 of the variable winning device 38, Maximize the rotation operation amount and shift the arrival position of the gaming ball in the upper part of the game area 311 from the side on which the exit portion of the induction rail 34 is formed to the side on the opposite side (so-called right strike (G), the player is notified that the right-handed game is to be played. A right-pointing arrow and a character image G3 of "right-handed!" May be displayed so as to flow from the left side of the screen to the right side of the screen. Thereby, even a player who can not understand Japanese can intuitively understand that the right-handed game is played. Further, in the following description, a right-handed navigation that is an indication of a right-handed game in the jackpot gaming state is also referred to as a jackpot right-handed navigation for a jackpot.

  FIG. 30H: Following the opening presentation, presentation of a situation in which the variable winning device is opened and closed is executed. In this effect, for example, a battle effect is performed. This battle effect is performed for the purpose of informing the player that the character on the player's side and the enemy character battle, and winning the battle to shift to the high probability mode after the jackpot game. Further, on the upper end side of the display screen G, a plurality of characters “right-handed” and right-directed arrows “→” are displayed to indicate that the right-handed game is continued. Further, an effect may be performed in which the characters “right-handed” and the arrow “→” pointing to the right flow so as to flow from the left end to the right end of the display screen G.

  FIG. 30 (I): Also, during the effect of the situation in which the variable winning device is opened and closed, the effect type which causes the player to select the effect mode after the opening / closing execution mode described in step S1413 of FIG. A selection effect is performed. In this effect type selection effect, the player presses the left direction button 282 and / or the right direction button 283 of the operation button 28 to select from the images GA to GC indicating the effect type displayed on the display screen G. Select an image showing the effect type of. In the example shown in FIG. 30I, the image GA is an image showing the effect MA, the image GB is an image showing the effect MB, and the image GC is an image showing the effect MC. When the player depresses the operation button 28 to select one of the images GA to GC, the selected image is displayed on the display screen G larger than the other unselected images and is selected. Is configured to be explicit. When the player selects the desired effect and depresses the determination button 281 of the operation button 28, the effect corresponding to the selected image is determined as the effect of the fourth mode M4.

  In the first embodiment, when the player does not select / determine a desired effect within a predetermined time, specifically, by the fifteenth round which is the final round, an effect previously determined by the initial setting In one embodiment, the effect MA) is automatically selected as an effect in the fourth mode M4. If the player does not select / determine the effect mode within the predetermined time, the effect corresponding to the image being selected on the display screen G is automatically selected as the effect in the fourth mode M4 when the predetermined time has elapsed. You may do so. In the example shown in FIG. 30, the effect MB corresponding to the selected image GB (the image GB displayed larger than the other images on the display screen G) is automatically selected as the effect in the fourth mode M4. Ru.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 30I, the selected image is displayed on the display screen G larger than the other images, but the player can use the left direction button 282 of the operation button 28 and the Alternatively, when the right direction button 283 is pressed, the images GA to GC corresponding to the effects MA to MC may be moved to the center of the display screen G. In the example shown in FIG. 30J, since the image GB corresponding to the effect MB is selected, the image GB is arranged at the center of the display screen G. In the example shown in FIG. 30J, in order to clearly show the selected image to the player, the image GB being selected arranges the display screen G at the center and the other is selected. The image GB is displayed on the outermost surface by superimposing (superposing) on the non-image GA and GC, and it is clearly shown that the image GB is selected. In order to show the selected image more clearly to the player, the image GB being selected may be displayed larger than the other non-selected images GA and GC.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 30J, a time may be displayed on which gauges can be selected for the effects MA to MC. For example, a gauge image G4 indicating a time in which selection of effects MA to MC is possible is displayed on the lower side of image GB, and a remaining time in which selection of effects MA to MC is possible is indicated in red. Specifically, the boundary line L1 between the red area G4a (shaded area) and the white area G4b (white area) decreases with the passage of time. It may be configured to move to the left toward the display screen G. Further, a configuration in which the red area G4a (shaded area in FIG. 30J) of the gauge image G4 increases with the passage of time, specifically, the red area G4a (shaded area) and the white area G4b (white area) The boundary line L1 may be moved to the right toward the display screen G with the passage of time. Furthermore, details of the selected effect may be displayed on the display screen G, for example, an explanation of what the selected effect is. In this case, attribute information (metadata) in which each effect content is described is stored in the ROM 93 or the like, and the MPU 92 ROM93 the attribute information (metadata) of the effect being selected based on the operation signal of the operation button 28. And a command instructing the display control apparatus 100 to display the read attribute information on the display screen G. In addition, the attribute information of the effect is stored in the effect data storage area 1031 of the program ROM 103, and the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 selects the attribute information of the effect being selected based on the operation signal of the operation button 28 (Meta A command instructing the display control apparatus 100 to read data) from the effect data storage area 1031 of the program ROM 103 and display the read data on the display screen G may be transmitted. In addition, the music used in the effect being selected may be output from the speaker unit 24. Under the present circumstances, the music currently output by the production | presentation is once stopped, and the music used by the production | presentation under selection is output from the speaker part 24. FIG. As described above, by presenting the details of the selected effect to the player, the player can easily select the effect that suits his / her preference, and the interest is enhanced.

<Effect type (type) selection process>
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect type (type) selection processing. As described above, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control apparatus 90 executes the effect type selection process in step S1413 of the effect determination process of FIG. In this effect type selection process, as shown in FIG. 31, the MPU 92 executes steps S1501 to S1508 to cause the player to select an effect type to be executed in the fourth mode M4.

  In step S1501, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the game result is "the most advantageous result" based on the content of the type command received in step S1401 of FIG. If the MPU 92 determines in step S1501 that the game result is not the “most favorable result” (NO), the effect type selection process is ended.

  If the MPU 92 determines in step S1501 that the game result is "the most advantageous result" (YES), it determines in step S1502 whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the reception of the opening command. The MPU 92 counts the number of executions of the process of step S1502 to determine whether a predetermined time has elapsed. For example, if the predetermined time is 10 seconds and the interval at which the process of step S1502 is repeatedly performed is 2 msec, the MPU 92 counts the number of times of execution of the process of step S1502 and reaches 10 000 when it reaches 5000 times. judge. The configuration for measuring the predetermined time is arbitrary, and for example, the predetermined time may be measured using a real time clock (RTC). If the MPU 92 determines in step S1502 that the predetermined time has not elapsed from the reception of the opening command (NO), the MPU 92 ends the effect type selection process.

  Further, when the predetermined time has elapsed in step S1502 (YES), the MPU 92 controls the display control device 100 to start the effect for effect type selection in step S1503. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 based on an instruction from the MPU 92 to display an image of effect for selecting an effect type on the display screen G. As described above, in the effect type selection effect, the player wins a jackpot in a win or absence lottery, and the effect of the fourth mode M4 to be shifted when being distributed to the “most advantageous result” is three different types of effects. The effect type mode MA, MB, or MC is to be selected. The player operates the operation button 28 in this effect type selection effect to select a desired effect mode.

  In step S1504, the MPU 92 receives the player's selection of the effect type modes MA, MB, and MC by the operation button 28. The player depresses the left direction button 282 and / or the right direction button 283 of the operation button 28 to select an image corresponding to the desired effect MA to MC from the images GA to GC displayed on the display screen G. . In step S1504, when the player operates the operation button 28 to select the image GA, the MPU 92 controls the display control apparatus 100 to display the selected image GA larger than the other images GB and GC. Do. In the display control apparatus 100, based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 controls the VDP 105 to display the selected image GA larger than the other images GB and GC.

  Further, when the player operates the operation button 28 to select the image GB, the MPU 92 controls the display control apparatus 100 to display the selected image GB larger than the other images GA and GC. In the display control apparatus 100, based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 controls the VDP 105 to display the selected image GB larger than the other images GA and GC. Further, when the player operates the operation button 28 to select the image GC, the MPU 92 controls the display control apparatus 100 to display the selected image GC larger than the other images GA and GB. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display the selected image GC larger than the other images GA and GB based on an instruction from the MPU 92.

  In step S1505, the MPU 92 determines whether the player has operated the operation button 28 to determine the effect, that is, whether the pressing operation of the determination button 281 has been received. When it is determined in step S1505 that the pressing operation of the determination button 281 has been received (YES), the MPU 92 sets an effect corresponding to the selected image as an effect of the fourth mode M4. Specifically, when the determination operation is accepted in a state where the image GA is selected in step S1505, the MPU 92 shifts the effect MA after the first mode M1 in step S1506 in the fourth mode M4. Set as an effect. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a flag of effect MA as an effect of the fourth mode M4 in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 94.

  In step S1505, when the determination operation is accepted in a state where the image GB is selected, the MPU 92 sets the effect MB as the effect of the fourth mode M4 to shift after the first mode M1 in step S1506. Do. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a flag of the effect MB as an effect of the fourth mode M4 in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 94. In step S1505, when the determination operation is accepted in a state where the image GC is selected, the MPU 92 sets the effect MC as the effect in the fourth mode M4 to shift after the first mode M1 in step S1506. Do. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a flag of effect MC in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 94 as an effect of the fourth mode M4.

  When it is determined in step S1505 that the pressing operation of the determination button 281 is not received (NO), the MPU 92 determines whether a predetermined time has elapsed in step S1507. The MPU 92 determines whether a predetermined time has elapsed by counting the number of executions of the process of step S1507. For example, if the predetermined time is 10 seconds and the interval at which the process of step S1507 is repeatedly performed is 2 msec, the MPU 92 counts the number of times of execution of the process of step S1507 and reaches 10 000 when it reaches 5000 times. judge. Further, the configuration for measuring the predetermined time is arbitrary, and for example, the predetermined time may be measured using a real time clock (RTC).

  In step S1507, when the predetermined time has elapsed (YES), the MPU 92 sets the effect (in the first embodiment, the effect MA in the first embodiment) determined in advance in the fourth mode M4 in step S1508. Set Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a flag of effect MA as an effect of the fourth mode M4 in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 94. As described above, in step S1507, when a predetermined time has elapsed, an effect corresponding to the image being selected on display screen G is automatically determined as an effect in the fourth mode M4. Good.

  In step S1507, if the predetermined time has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 92 ends the effect type selection process.

<Another example of effect type selection processing>
The determination process of S1502 and step S1507 may be performed based on the number of rounds of the jackpot game instead of measuring the predetermined time in step S1502 and step S1507 of FIG. For example, the number of rounds of the jackpot game can be counted based on the number of receptions of the open command and the round start command (hereinafter also referred to as open command etc.) in step S1005 of FIG. In this case, in step S1502, the MPU 92 determines whether the number of receptions of release commands etc. is 3 (third round), and if the number of receptions of release commands etc is 3 then the effect type selection effect of step S1503 In step S1507, the MPU 92 determines whether the number of receptions of release commands and the like is 15 (the 15th round which is the final round). If the number of receptions of release commands and the like is 15, step S1508 The effects of the initial setting may be set.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart in another example of the effect type selection process. As described above, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control apparatus 90 executes the effect type selection process in step S1413 of the effect determination process of FIG. In this effect type selection process, as shown in FIG. 32, the MPU 92 executes steps S1601 to S1615 to cause the player to select an effect type to be executed in the fourth mode M4.

  In step S1601, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the game result is "the most advantageous result" based on the content of the type command received in step S1401 of FIG. If the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that the game result is not the "most favorable result" (NO), the effect type selection process is ended.

  If the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that the game result is "the most advantageous result" (YES), it sets a counter in step S1602 to count the number of open commands etc received after receiving the opening command. .

  In step S1602, the MPU 92 determines whether the gaming state is the third round of the jackpot game. Specifically, after receiving the opening command, the MPU 92 increments the counter each time it receives a release command or the like, and determines whether the number of receptions of the release command or the like has reached 3 (third round). If the MPU 92 determines in step S1603 that the number of receptions of the release command and the like is not 3 or more (NO), the effect type selection process is ended.

  Further, when the number of receptions of the release command and the like is 3 or more at step S1603 (YES), the MPU 92 controls the display control apparatus 100 to start the effect type selection effect at step S1604. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 based on an instruction from the MPU 92 to display an image of effect for effect type selection, specifically, an image shown in FIG. Display on

  In step S1605, the MPU 92 receives the player's selection of the effect type modes MA, MB, and MC by the operation button 28. The player depresses the left direction button 282 and / or the right direction button 283 of the operation button 28 to select an image corresponding to the desired effect MA to MC from the images GA to GC displayed on the display screen G. . In step S1605, when the player operates the operation button 28 to select the image GA, the MPU 92 controls the display control apparatus 100 to display the selected image GA larger than the other images GB and GC. Do. In the display control apparatus 100, based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 controls the VDP 105 to display the selected image GA larger than the other images GB and GC.

  Further, when the player operates the operation button 28 to select the image GB, the MPU 92 controls the display control apparatus 100 to display the selected image GB larger than the other images GA and GC. In the display control apparatus 100, based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 controls the VDP 105 to display the selected image GB larger than the other images GA and GC. Further, when the player operates the operation button 28 to select the image GC, the MPU 92 controls the display control apparatus 100 to display the selected image GC larger than the other images GA and GB. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display the selected image GC larger than the other images GA and GB based on an instruction from the MPU 92.

  In step S1606, the MPU 92 determines whether the player has operated the operation button 28 to determine the effect, that is, whether the pressing operation of the determination button 281 has been received. When it is determined in step S1606 that the pressing operation of the determination button 281 has been received (YES), the MPU 92 sets an effect corresponding to the selected image as an effect of the fourth mode M4. That is, in step S1606, when the determination operation is accepted while the image GA is selected, the MPU 92 sets the effect MA as the effect of the fourth mode M4 to shift after the first mode M1 in step S1607. Do. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a flag of effect MA as an effect of the fourth mode M4 in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 94.

  In step S1606, when the determination operation is accepted in a state where the image GB is selected, the MPU 92 sets the effect MB as the effect of the fourth mode M4 to shift after the first mode M1 in step S1607. Do. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a flag of the effect MB as an effect of the fourth mode M4 in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 94. In step S1606, when the determination operation is accepted in a state where the image GC is selected, the MPU 92 sets the effect MC as the effect in the fourth mode M4 to shift after the first mode M1 in step S1607. Do. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a flag of effect MC in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 94 as an effect of the fourth mode M4.

  In step S1608, the MPU 92 determines whether a release command or the like has been received. If it is determined in step S1608 that the release command or the like has not been received (NO), the MPU 92 ends the effect type selection process. If it is determined in step S1608 that the release command or the like has been received (YES), the MPU 92 determines in step S1609 whether the gaming state is the final round of the big hit game, that is, the 15th round. Specifically, after receiving the opening command, the MPU 92 increments the counter every time it receives the release command etc., and whether the number of received release commands etc. has reached the final round 15 or more (15th round) Determine if.

  If it is determined in step S1609 that the number of receptions of release commands and the like is not 15 or more (15th round) which is the final round (NO), the MPU 92 cancels the effect determined for the player in step S1610. Instructs you to make a notification to confirm the Specifically, the MPU 92 controls the display control apparatus 100 to display a character image for confirming whether to cancel the determined effect such as “Do you want to cancel the effect?” On the display screen G. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 based on an instruction from the MPU 92 to display a character image such as “Do you want to cancel the effect?” On the display screen G. Further, the MPU 92 controls so that the voice of “cancel production?” Is output from the speaker unit 24. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the voice of "Do you want to cancel the effect?" Stored in the common ROM 96 of the ROM 93, and outputs it to the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the sound of “Do you want to cancel the effect?” Is output from the speaker unit 24. If it is determined in step S1609 that the number of receptions of release commands and the like is 15 or more (15th round) which is the final round (YES), the MPU 92 ends the effect type selection effect process.

  In step S1611, the MPU 92 determines whether the effect determined in step S1606 has been cancelled. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether the effect has been canceled based on the operation of the operation button 28 by the player. If it is determined in step S1611 that the effect has been canceled (YES), the MPU 92 returns to the operation of step S1605. When it is determined in step S1611 that the effect is not canceled (NO), the MPU 92 ends the effect type selection effect process.

  If it is determined in step S1606 that the pressing operation of the determination button 281 has not been received (NO), the MPU 92 determines whether an open command or the like has been received in step S1612. In step S1612, when it is determined that the release command or the like is not received (NO), the MPU 92 ends the effect type selection process. If it is determined in step S1612 that the release command or the like has been received (YES), the MPU 92 determines in step S1613 whether the gaming state is the final round of the big hit game, that is, the 15th round. Specifically, after receiving the opening command, the MPU 92 increments the counter every time it receives the release command etc., and whether the number of received release commands etc. has reached the final round 15 or more (15th round) Determine if.

  If it is determined in step S1613 that the 15th round is made (YES), the MPU 92 performs the effect (in the first embodiment, the effect MA in the first embodiment) determined in the fourth mode M4 in step S1614. Set as an effect. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a flag of effect MA as an effect of the fourth mode M4 in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 94. In addition, in step S1613, when it is determined that it is the final round (15th round) (YES), an effect corresponding to the image currently selected on the display screen G is automatically determined as an effect in the fourth mode M4 You may do so. When the MPU 92 sets the effect in step S1614, the MPU 92 ends the effect type selection process.

  If it is determined in step S1613 that the final round (fifteenth round) is not determined (NO), the MPU 92 instructs in step S1615 to notify the player to select / determine an effect. Specifically, the MPU 92 causes the display control device 100 to display a character image prompting selection and determination of effects such as “Determine the effect!” And “Determine the effect!” On the display screen G. Control. In the display control apparatus 100, the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 controls the VDP 105 based on the instruction from the MPU 92 to display "Determine the effect!", "Determine the effect!" Display a text image prompting to select or make Further, the MPU 92 controls so that sounds such as “Determine the effect!” And “Determine the effect!” Are output from the speaker unit 24. Specifically, the MPU 92 stores sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to voices such as "Determine the effect!" And "Determine the effect!" Stored in the common ROM 96 of the ROM 93. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled to read out and set in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95 and to output a sound such as “Determine the effect!” And “Determine the effect!” From the speaker unit 24.

  In addition, it is optional at which timing to start the effect type selection effect, for example, the number of receptions of the release command and the like may be 1 (first round) or more and 15 or less (15th round). Further, the number of rounds to start the effect type selection effect may be randomly determined using a counter stored in the RAM 94. In the above description, although it is possible to cancel the effect according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game (specifically, the effect can be canceled until the 14th round), until a predetermined time or the number of rounds elapses It may be configured to be capable of canceling the effect.

<Effect transition process>
Next, transition processing to the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) when the jackpot is won in the success or failure lottery and the distribution result is the “most favorable result” will be described. Normally, when the jackpot is won in the lottery, the effect of the open / close execution mode according to the distribution result is executed and the ending period is ended, and then the effect of the next mode is started. However, in the pachinko machine of the first embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the hit / off lottery and the distribution result is the “most advantageous result”, the effect C in the opening / closing execution mode according to the most advantageous result is executed. Then, during the ending period of the effect C, the effect of the fourth mode M4 is started.

  Specifically, it is controlled such that the output of the music used in the rendering of the fourth mode M4 is started during the ending period of the rendering C corresponding to the most advantageous result. In the first embodiment, according to the effect type set in step S1506 or S1508 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 31, the timing at which the speaker unit 24 starts the output of music and sound changes. In the following description, in the effect of the fourth mode M4, the effect of music is referred to as a music effect, and the effect of an image for displaying on the display screen G is also referred to as an image effect.

  Hereinafter, the transition process to the fourth mode M4 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, there are three types of effects of the fourth mode M4 in the effects MA to MC, and the transition processing differs for each of the effects MA to MC. Hereinafter, the details of the transition processing of the effects MA to MC will be described. In the following description, a right-handed navigation that is an indication of a right-handed game at the time of transition to the fourth mode (RUSH mode) is also referred to as a right-handed navigation for RUSH.

<Migration process to production MA>
First, the case where the effect MA is set as the effect of the fourth mode M4 will be described. In the transition process to the effect MA, the output of the intro portion of the music used in the effect MA of the fourth mode M4 from the speaker unit 24 is started from the start time T1 of the ending period of the effect C corresponding to the "most favorable result" To be controlled. Here, in the effect MA, the ending period of the effect C and the period of the intro portion of the music used in the effect MA of the fourth mode M4 have the same length (time). Therefore, the output of the intro portion ends at time T2 when the ending period ends. Also, the speaker unit 24 is controlled so that the A melody part following the intro part is continuously output after the output of the intro part of the music is finished.

  Further, in the transition process to the effect MA, control is performed such that the sound of “A RUSH rush” is output from the speaker unit 24 during the output period of the intro portion. Specifically, the audio output of "A RUSH rush" is started after the audio start time TW1 from the start time T1 of the ending period, and the audio output of "A RUSH rush" simultaneously or almost simultaneously with the end of the output of the intro part Is controlled to end. Here, the audio start time TW1 is a time obtained by subtracting the audio output time of "A RUSH rush" from the output period of the ending period or the intro part. For example, when the output period of the ending period or the intro part is 10 seconds and the output time of the voice of “A RUSH rush” is 2 seconds, the voice start time TW1 is 8 seconds. In this case, it is controlled such that the voice output of "A RUSH rush" is started 8 seconds after the start time T1 of the ending period.

  At the end of the ending period T2, a sound of “right-handed” for suggesting a right-handed game is output, and control is made to start the right-handed navigation for RUSH. That is, the output of the voice "right-handed" is controlled to be started at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). In addition, at the end time T2 of the ending period, it is controlled such that the video effect of the effect MA is started. In addition, you may control on the display screen G so that characters, such as "Please hit right" may be displayed on the display screen G, at the time of completion | finish of an ending period T2, in order to suggest a hit game. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "right-handed", characters such as "Please hit right" are displayed at the end of the ending period, in other words, when the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) is started It is controlled.

<Migration process to effect MB>
Next, the case where the effect MB is set as the effect of the fourth mode M4 will be described. In the transition process to the effect MB, the output of the intro portion of the music used in the effect MB of the fourth mode M4 from the speaker unit 24 starts from the start time T1 of the ending period of the effect C corresponding to the "most favorable result". To be controlled. Here, in the effect MB, the period of the intro portion of the music used in the effect MB of the fourth mode M4 is longer than the ending period of the effect C. Therefore, the output of the intro portion continues even after the end time T2 of the ending period. Further, the speaker unit 24 is controlled so that the A melody part following the intro part is continuously output after the output of the intro part of the music is finished.

  In addition, in the transition process to the effect MB, control is performed such that the voice of “B RUSH rush” is output from the speaker unit 24 during the output period of the intro portion. Specifically, the audio output of "B RUSH inrush" is started after the audio start time TW2 from the start time T1 of the ending period, and the audio output of "B RUSH inrush" simultaneously or almost simultaneously with the end of the intro portion output Is controlled to end. Here, the voice start time TW2 is a time obtained by subtracting the voice output time of "B RUSH rush" from the output period of the intro part. For example, when the output period of the intro part is 11 sec and the output time of the voice of "B RUSH rush" is 2 sec, the voice start time TW2 is 9 sec. In this case, it is controlled such that the voice output of "B RUSH rush" is started 9 seconds after the start time T1 of the ending period.

  Here, in the transition process to the effect MB, the voice of “B RUSH rush” is output from the speaker unit 24 across the end time T2 of the ending period. For this reason, when the voice of "right-handed" for suggesting a right-handed game is output at T2 at the end of the ending period, the voice of "B RUSH rush" and the sound of "right-handed" are overlapped and output. Be done. Therefore, in this transition process to the effect MB, characters such as "Please hit right" to suggest a hit game at the end of the ending period T2 without outputting a voice of "right hit". Is displayed on the display screen G, and the RUSH right-handed navigation is controlled to start. That is, the display of characters such as "Please strike right" on the display screen G is controlled to be started at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). Further, at the end time T2 of the ending period, control is performed so that the image effect of the effect MB is started.

<Migration process to effect MC>
Next, the case where the effect MC is set as the effect of the fourth mode M4 will be described. In the transition process to the effect MC, the output of the intro portion of the music used in the effect MC of the fourth mode M4 from the speaker unit 24 is started from the start time T1 of the ending period of the effect C corresponding to the "most favorable result" To be controlled. Here, in the effect MC, the period of the intro portion of the music used in the effect MC in the fourth mode M4 is shorter than the ending period of the effect C. For this reason, the output of the intro part ends before the end time T2 of the ending period. Further, the speaker unit 24 is controlled so that the A melody part following the intro part is continuously output after the output of the intro part of the music is finished.

  Further, in the transition process to the effect MC, control is performed such that the audio of “C RUSH rush” is output from the speaker unit 24 during the output period of the intro portion. Specifically, the audio output of "C RUSH inrush" is started after the audio start time TW3 from the start time T1 of the ending period, and the output of the "C RUSH inrush" audio simultaneously or almost simultaneously with the end of the output of the intro part Is controlled to end. Here, the voice start time TW3 is a time obtained by subtracting the voice output time of "C RUSH rush" from the output period of the intro part. For example, when the output period of the intro part is 6 seconds and the output time of the voice of “C RUSH rush” is 2 seconds, the voice start time TW3 is 4 seconds. In this case, it is controlled so that the voice output of "C RUSH rush" is started 4 seconds after the start time T1 of the ending period.

  In addition, in the production MC, following the output of the voice of "C RUSH rush", a voice of "Please hit right" for suggesting a right-handed game is output, simultaneously with or substantially at the end of the ending period T2. At the same time, control is made so that the output of the "Please hit right" voice is ended. That is, the output time of the voice of "Please strike right" is the time obtained by subtracting the output period of the intro part from the ending period. In addition, in the transition process to the effect MC, at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4, characters such as “Please strike right” are displayed on the display screen G for suggesting a right strike game. Is controlled to start the right-handed navigation for RUSH.

<Effect data>
Next, data used for the transition process to the effect of the fourth mode M4 will be described. Music data and voice data used in each of the effects MA to MC in the fourth mode M4 are respectively stored in the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 of the voice emission control device 90 as sequence data, parameter data and sound data as described in FIG. It is stored. Specifically, the ROM 93 stores sequence data and parameter data corresponding to the music data A to C used in the effects MA to MC, respectively, and the common ROM 96 uses the effects MA to MC, respectively. Sound data corresponding to the music data A to C is stored. Then, the MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the sequence data and parameter data corresponding to the music data A to C are read from the ROM 93 and the sound data from the common ROM 96 and output from the speaker unit 24 as necessary. More specifically, sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the read music data A to C are set in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and the music data A to C are output (reproduced) from the speaker unit 24. Control the sound output LSI 95.

  Here, the music data A is associated with the effect MA by the data table stored in the ROM 93, the music data B is associated with the effect MB, and the music data C is associated with the effect MC. Therefore, if the effect type set in step S1506 or S1508 of the effect type selection process of FIG. The sound output LSI 95 is read out from the common ROM 96 and set in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95 so that the music data A is output (reproduced) from the speaker unit 24. Further, when the effect type set in step S1506 or S1508 of the effect type selection process of FIG. The sound output LSI 95 is read out from the ROM 96 and set in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95 so that the music data B is output (reproduced) from the speaker unit 24. Further, when the effect type set in step S1506 or S1508 of the effect type selection process of FIG. The sound output LSI 95 is read out from the ROM 96 and set in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95 so that the music data C is output (reproduced) from the speaker unit 24.

Also, music data A to C are intro part (prelude), A melody part (first melody of song), B melody part (melody following A melody), chorus part (chorus), interlude, out mouth It consists of multiple clauses such as (post-song). An example of a typical music composition is shown below. The following example A and example B are merely examples, and the configuration of the music used in the first embodiment is not limited to the examples shown below.
Example A) Intro → A mer → B mer → Sabi → Interlude → A mer → B mer → Sabi → Sin → C mer → Sabi → Outro Example B) Intro → A mer → B mer → B mer → Sabi → Intermedia → B mer → Sabi → C Melo → Outro

  The common ROM 96 and the ROM 93 store voice start times TW1 to TW3 described with reference to the voice data A to E and FIG. 33, respectively. Here, the voice data A to C and the voice start times TW1 to TW3 are associated with each other. The MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 to read out audio data stored in the common ROM 96 and output it from the speaker unit 24 as necessary. Here, the audio data A is “A RUSH rush” and the audio data B is "B RUSH rush", voice data C "C RUSH rush", voice data D "right-handed", voice data E "right-handed" voice as voice data.

  Further, the ROM 93 stores a time TE corresponding to the ending period described with reference to FIG. When determining whether the ending period has ended, the MPU 92 refers to the time TE corresponding to the ending period stored in the ROM 93.

Further, by the data table stored in the ROM 93, the audio data A is associated with the effect MA, the audio data B is associated with the effect MB, and the audio data C is associated with the effect MC. Also, the audio data D is associated with the effect MA, and the audio data E is associated with the effect MC. Therefore, when the effect type set in step S1506 or S1508 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 31 is the effect MA, the MPU 92 reads out the audio data A and the audio data D and outputs it from the speaker unit 24. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled. More specifically, sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to audio data A and audio data D are read out from ROM 93 and common ROM 96 and set in register 952 of audio output LSI 95, audio data A and audio data D The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the sound is output (reproduced) from the speaker unit 24.
Further, when the effect type set in step S1506 or S1508 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 31 is the effect MB, the MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 to read out the audio data B and output it from the speaker unit 24. Do. More specifically, the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to audio data B are read from ROM 93 and common ROM 96 and set in register 952 of sound output LSI 95, and audio data B is output from speaker unit 24 Control the sound output LSI 95 so that
Further, when the effect type set in step S1506 or S1508 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 31 is the effect MC, the MPU 92 reads the sound data C and the sound data E and outputs the sound data from the speaker unit 24. The output LSI 95 is controlled. More specifically, sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to audio data C and audio data E are read out from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and set in the register 952 of the audio output LSI 95, audio data C and audio data E The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the sound is output (reproduced) from the speaker unit 24.

  The MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 to read sound data corresponding to the sound data A to C from the common ROM 96 and output the sound data from the speaker unit 24 based on the sound start times TW1 to TW3. Specifically, when outputting the audio data A, the MPU 92 outputs sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the audio data A after the audio start time TW1 has elapsed (see FIG. 33) from the start time T1 of the ending period. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled to read out from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and output from the speaker unit 24. Further, when outputting the audio data B, the MPU 92 ROMs the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the audio data B after the audio start time TW2 has elapsed from the start time T1 of the ending period (see FIG. 33). The sound output LSI 95 is controlled to read out from the common ROM 96 and output from the speaker unit 24. Furthermore, when outputting the audio data C, the MPU 92 ROMs the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the audio data C after the audio start time TW3 has elapsed from the start time T1 of the ending period (see FIG. 33). The sound output LSI 95 is controlled to read out from the common ROM 96 and output from the speaker unit 24.

  Also, the video data used for each effect in the fourth mode M4 is stored in the effect data storage area 1032 of the program ROM 103 of the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. Specifically, video data A to D are stored in the effect data storage area 1032. The MPU 102 reads out the video data stored in the effect data storage area 1032 in accordance with the instruction from the MPU 92 and instructs the VDP 52 to display on the display screen G.

  Here, the video data A is associated with the effect MA by the data table, the video data B is associated with the effect MB, and the video data C is associated with the effect MC. Therefore, when the effect type set in step S1506 or S1508 in the effect type selection process of FIG. . Further, when the effect type set in step S1506 or S1508 of the effect type selection process of FIG. Further, when the effect type set in step S1506 or S1508 of the effect type selection process of FIG.

  Also, the video data D is image data for right-handed navigation for RUSH. When performing the RUSH right-handed navigation, the MPU 102 reads the video data D from the effect data storage area 1032 and instructs the VDP 52 to display it on the display screen G. When the video data D for RUSH right-handed navigation is stored in the character ROM 106 and the RUSH right-handed navigation is performed, the MPU 102 reads the video data D from the character ROM 106 and displays it on the display screen G. You may instruct to

<Migration process to the 4th mode (RUSH mode)>
Next, the transition process to the fourth mode M4 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing to the fourth mode (RUSH mode). Here, the operation of the sound emission control apparatus 90 of the transition processing to the fourth mode (RUSH mode) described with reference to FIG. 33 will be described. In the effect mode transition process, as shown in FIG. 34, the MPU 92 executes steps S1701 to S1706.

  In step S1701, the MPU 92 determines whether an ending command has been received. In the determination, the MPU 92 confirms whether an ending command is stored in the various flag storage areas. If the MPU 92 determines in step S1701 that the ending command has been received (YES), the MPU 92 determines the effect type of the fourth mode M4 in step S1702. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines the effect type in the fourth mode M4 based on the type of flag set in the various setting flag storage area in step S1506 or step S1508 in FIG. Further, in step S1701, when the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has not been received (NO), the effect type selection process is ended.

  If the determination result in step S1702 is the effect MA, the MPU 92 executes transition processing to the effect MA in step S1703. The transition processing to effect MA in step S1703 will be described with reference to FIG. Further, when the determination result in step S1702 is the effect MB, the MPU 92 executes transition processing to the effect MB in step S1704. The transition process to effect MB in step S1704 will be described with reference to FIG. Furthermore, when the determination result of step S1702 is effect MC, MPU92 performs the transition process to effect MC in step S1705. The transition process to effect MC in step S1705 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1706, the MPU 92 clears the flag set in the various setting flag storage area in step S1506 or step S1508 in FIG.

<Migration process to production MA>
Next, transition processing to effect MA in step S1703 of FIG. 34 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing at the time of effect MA setting. In the transition process to the effect MA, the MPU 92 executes steps S1801 to S1808 as shown in FIG.

  In step S1801, the MPU 92 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 to measure the time of step S1804 described later. Specifically, the ROM 93 is referred to, and a value corresponding to the voice start time TW1 is set as the measurement time. For example, when the cycle of the timer interrupt process is 2 msec and TW2 is set to "2 sec", the MPU 92 sets "1000" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the TW1 in the timer counter. The value set in the timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  In step S1802, the MPU 92 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 to measure the time of step S1806 described later. Specifically, the ROM 93 is referred to, and a value corresponding to the ending period TE is set. The value set in the timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  In step S1803, the MPU 92 starts output of music for presentation MA (BGM). Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the music data A for effect MA from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled to be output from the unit 24. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data A from the speaker unit 24 is started.

  In step S1804, the MPU 92 determines whether the voice start time TW1 has elapsed since receiving the ending command based on the value of the timer counter set in step S1801. If the MPU 92 determines that the voice start time TW1 has elapsed (YES), the MPU 92 starts output of voice for effect MA in step S1805. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the sound data A “A RUSH rush” for effect MA from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the audio data A is output from the speaker unit 24. Thereby, the output (reproduction) of the audio data A “A RUSH rush” is started from the speaker unit 24. If the MPU 92 determines in step S1804 that the voice start time TW1 has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 92 ends the transition processing to the effect MA.

  In step S1806, the MPU 92 determines whether the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S1802. If the MPU 92 determines that the ending period has ended (YES), it starts the right strike navigation for RUSH in step S1807. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the sound data D “right-handed” for effect MA from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95 The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the sound data D is output from the speaker unit 24. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the audio data D “right-handed” is started from the speaker unit 24, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started. When the MPU 92 determines that the ending period has not elapsed in step S1806 (NO), the transition processing to the effect MA ends.

  In step S1808, the MPU 92 instructs the display control apparatus 100 to start the video effect of the effect MA. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 to read out and reproduce the video data A stored in the effect data storage area 1032. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads the video data A from the effect data storage area 1032 based on an instruction from the MPU 92 and controls the VDP 105 to display the video data A on the display screen G.

  In addition, the structure which measures time of step S1804 and step S1806 is arbitrary, for example, you may measure using a real time clock (RTC).

<Migration process to effect MB>
Next, transition processing to effect MB in step S1704 of FIG. 34 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing at the time of effect MB setting. In the transition process to the effect MB, the MPU 92 executes steps S1901 to S1908 as shown in FIG.

  In step S1901, the MPU 92 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 to measure the time of step S1904 described later. Specifically, the ROM 93 is referred to, and a value corresponding to the voice start time TW2 is set as the measurement time. For example, when the cycle of the timer interrupt process is 2 msec and TW2 is set to "3 sec", the MPU 92 sets "1500" as the waiting time (waiting period) for TW2 in the timer counter. The value set in the timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  In step S1902, the MPU 92 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 to measure the time of step S1906 described later. Specifically, the ROM 93 is referred to, and a value corresponding to the ending period TE is set. The value set in the timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  In step S1903, the MPU 92 starts output of music (BGM) for effect MB. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the music data B for the effect MB from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled to be output from the unit 24. Thereby, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data B from the speaker unit 24 is started.

  In step S1904, the MPU 92 determines based on the value of the timer counter set in step S1901 whether or not the voice start time TW2 has elapsed since receiving the ending command. If the MPU 92 determines that the voice start time TW2 has elapsed (YES), the MPU 92 starts output of voice for effect MB in step S1905. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the sound data B “B RUSH rush” for the effect MB from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95 The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the audio data B is output from the speaker unit 24. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the audio data B “B RUSH rush” from the speaker unit 24 is started. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the voice start time TW2 has not elapsed in step S1904 (NO), the transition process to the effect MB is ended.

  In step S1906, the MPU 92 determines whether the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S1902. If the MPU 92 determines that the ending period has ended (YES), it starts striking navigation in step S1907. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 to read out and reproduce the video data D stored in the effect data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads the video data D from the effect data storage area 1032 and controls the VDP 105 to display it on the display screen G, and the RUSH right-handed navigation is started. . If the MPU 92 determines in step S1906 that the ending period has not elapsed (NO), the transition process to the effect MB is ended.

  In step S1908, the MPU 92 instructs the display control apparatus 100 to start the visual effect of the effect MB. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 to read out and reproduce the video data B stored in the effect data storage area 1032. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads the video data B from the effect data storage area 1032 based on an instruction from the MPU 92 and controls the VDP 105 to display the video data B on the display screen G.

  In addition, the structure which measures time of step S1904 and step S1906 is arbitrary, for example, you may measure using a real time clock (RTC).

<Migration process to effect MC>
Next, the transition process to effect MC in step S1705 of FIG. 34 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing at the time of effect MC setting. In the transition process to the effect MC, the MPU 92 executes steps S2001 to S2008 as shown in FIG.

  In step S2001, the MPU 92 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 to measure the time of step S2004 described later. Specifically, with reference to the ROM 93, a value corresponding to the voice start time TW3 is set as a measurement time. For example, when the cycle of the timer interrupt process is 2 msec and TW3 is set to "1 sec", the MPU 92 sets "500" as the waiting time (waiting period) for TW3 in the timer counter. The value set in the timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  In step S2002, the MPU 92 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 to measure the time of step S2006 described later. Specifically, the ROM 93 is referred to, and a value corresponding to the ending period TE is set. The value set in the timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  In step S2003, the MPU 92 starts output of music (BGM) for effect MC. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the music data C for the effect MC from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled to be output from the unit 24. Thereby, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data C from the speaker unit 24 is started.

  In step S2004, the MPU 92 determines, based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2001, whether or not the voice start time TW3 has elapsed since receiving the ending command. If the MPU 92 determines that the voice start time TW3 has elapsed (YES), the MPU 92 starts output of voice for effect MC in step S2005. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the sound data C “C RUSH rush” for the effect MC from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95 The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the audio data C is output from the speaker unit 24. As a result, output (reproduction) of the audio data C “C RUSH rush” from the speaker unit 24 is started.

  Further, in step S2005, after outputting the audio data C “C RUSH rush” for the effect MC, the MPU 92 shares the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the audio data E “Please hit right” with the ROM 93 and common The sound output LSI 95 is read out from the ROM 96 and set in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95 so that the sound data E is output from the speaker unit 24. Thereby, the output (reproduction) of the audio data E “Please hit right” from the speaker unit 24 is started. The MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the sound data E “Please hit right” is output after the sound data C “C RUSH rush” is output. Therefore, after the voice of “C RUSH rush” is output from the speaker unit 24, the voice of “please hit right” is subsequently output. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the voice start time TW3 has not elapsed in step S2004 (NO), the transition processing to the effect MC is ended.

  In step S2006, the MPU 92 determines whether the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2002. If the MPU 92 determines that the ending period has ended (YES), it starts striking navigation in step S2007. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 to read out and reproduce the video data D stored in the effect data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads the video data D from the effect data storage area 1032 and controls the VDP 105 to display it on the display screen G, and the RUSH right-handed navigation is started. . Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the ending period has not elapsed in step S2006 (NO), the transition processing to the effect MC ends.

  In step S2008, the MPU 92 instructs the display control apparatus 100 to start the visual effect of the effect MB. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 to read out and reproduce the video data C stored in the effect data storage area 1032. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads the video data C from the effect data storage area 1032 based on an instruction from the MPU 92 and controls the VDP 105 to display the video data C on the display screen G.

  In addition, the structure which measures time of step S2004 and step S2006 is arbitrary, for example, you may measure using a real time clock (RTC).

  In the first embodiment, the transition processing to each of the effects MA to MC has been described on the assumption that the effect types in the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) are three types of effects MA, MB, and MC, but the fourth mode M4 The effect type is not limited to the above three types, but may be arbitrary, and may be two or four or more.

According to such this embodiment, the following operations and effects can be achieved.
(1) In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the transition means (MPU 62) reproduces the gaming state when transitioning the gaming state from the big hit game (first gaming state) to the RUSH mode (second gaming state). (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) controls so that music data (BGM) in the RUSH mode (second gaming state) is reproduced during the period of the big hit game. Specifically, at the start of the ending period of effect C, control is performed to start the output of the intro portion of the music in the fourth mode M4 from the speaker unit 24. Therefore, when transitioning to a different gaming state, the gaming state can be shifted without breaking the flow of the gaming state, and the player can enjoy the game without losing the sense of exhilaration of the series of flows of the gaming state. Can. For this reason, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(2) In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, since the music data of the RUSH mode (the second gaming state) is reproduced when the reproduction means starts the ending period of the effect C, the music from the ending period of the effect C Even when the reproduction of the game is started, there is no sense of incongruity, and the transition can be made more smoothly without breaking the flow of the game even in the transition of the gaming state.

(3) The first notification (RUSH rush) enables the player to recognize the RUSH mode in which the first notification control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) shifts after the big hit game in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. The player can recognize that the gaming state to be shifted after the jackpot game is the RUSH mode so that the voice output of the) is performed. Therefore, the player's attention to the game can be improved, and the expectation of the game can be improved.

(4) In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first notification control means causes the first notification (voice output of RUSH rush) to end at the end of the reproduction of the intro portion of the music. The end and the end of the intro part of the music coincide, and a sense of togetherness and exhilaration can be obtained. Further, since the notification is made by voice, the notification can be surely made to the player who is looking away from the gaming machine.

(5) In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first notification control means causes the first notification to be started during the ending period of the jackpot game. Specifically, during the ending period, control is performed so that the audio output of “〇 RUSH rush” is started from the speaker unit 24. For this reason, the player can recognize the game content of the RUSH mode to shift after the jackpot game. As a result, the player's attention to the game can be improved, and the expectation of the game can be improved.

Second Embodiment
In the first embodiment, the music data (BGM) and the voice data of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) and the voice data are separately stored in the common ROM 96 of the voice emission control device 90, and music used in effects MA to MC Data (BGM) A to C separately read out and output voice data A to C of “A RUSH rush”, “B RUSH rush”, and “C RUSH rush”. However, as described with reference to FIG. 33, during the output of the intro portion of the music used in the effects MA to MC, the voices of “A RUSH rush”, “B RUSH rush”, and “C RUSH rush” are Each is output. For this reason, intro parts of the music data A to C may include voices of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush", respectively. In this second embodiment, a second embodiment will be described in which the intro portions of the music data A to C include voices of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush", respectively. Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described, but the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be assigned the same reference numerals and overlapping descriptions will be omitted.

<Effect data>
FIG. 38 shows music data stored in the common ROM 96. As shown in FIG. In the second embodiment, as described above, the intro portion of each music data A to C includes audio data of “A RUSH plunging”, “B RUSH plunging”, and “C RUSH plunging”, respectively. If you include a voice such as "Please strike right" in the intro part of the music, when doing so-called loop processing, where playback of the music ends and the music output is resumed, so Voices such as "Please" are also output at the time of loop (during second and subsequent playback). Therefore, in the second embodiment, the intro portion is preferably not included in the loop processing.

  Therefore, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38, sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to music data used in each of the effects MA to MC are divided into an intro part and other loop parts. Are stored in the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96. More specifically, music data A to C exclude sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to music data of only the intro portion including audio data such as "Please strike right", and the intro portion It is divided into sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the music data of the A melody part and thereafter, and stored in the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96.

  Then, for example, when looping music data A used in the effect MA, the MPU 92 reproduces the music data of the intro part at the time of outputting the music for the first time, and then continuously reproduces the music data of the loop part to loop When the music data of the part is finished, processing for outputting the music data of the loop part again (hereinafter, also described as loop processing) is performed. In addition, by performing the same processing as above for the music data B and C used in the effects MB and MC, at the time of loop processing, sound such as “Please hit right” is reproduced at the second and subsequent times (loop Output during processing is also prevented.

  The audio of "A RUSH rush" included in the intro portion of music data A is set to end the output of the audio of "A RUSH rush" simultaneously with or substantially simultaneously with the end of the output of the intro portion of music data A. ing. Also, the voice of "B RUSH rush" included in the intro portion of music data B is set to finish the output of the voice of "B RUSH rush" simultaneously with or substantially simultaneously with the end of the output of the intro portion of music data B ing. Furthermore, the audio of "C RUSH rush" included in the intro portion of music data C is set to terminate the output of the audio of "C RUSH rush" simultaneously with or substantially simultaneously with the end of the output of the intro portion of music data C ing.

  Further, the music data A is associated with the effect MA, the music data B is associated with the effect MB, and the music data C is associated with the effect MC by the data table stored in the ROM 93. Therefore, when the effect type set in step S1506 or S1508 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 31 is the effect MA, the MPU 92 reads the music data A and outputs the sound output LSI 95 to output from the speaker unit 24. Control. Further, when the effect type set in step S1506 or S1508 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 31 is the effect MB, the MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 to read the music data B and output it from the speaker unit 24. Do. Further, when the effect type set in step S1506 or S1508 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 31 is the effect MC, the MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 to read the music data C and output it from the speaker unit 24. Do. More specifically, the MPU 92 reads sequence data, parameter data and sound data from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 based on the program and processing data stored in the ROM 93 and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. . The sound output LSI 95 outputs (reproduces) music data A to C from the speaker unit 24 based on the data set in the register 952.

  Further, the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 store sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the audio data D and E. The MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the audio data stored in the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 as necessary, and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled to be output (reproduced) from the unit 24. Here, the voice data D is a "right-handed" voice, and the voice data E is a data of "right-handed" voice. Here, the audio data D is associated with the effect MA, and the audio data E is associated with the effect MC. Therefore, when the effect type set in step S1506 or S1508 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 31 is the effect MA, the MPU 92 reads the sound data D and outputs the sound output LSI 95 to output from the speaker unit 24. Control. Further, when the effect type set in step S1506 or S1508 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 31 is the effect MC, the MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 to read the audio data E and output it from the speaker unit 24. Do.

<Migration process to production MA>
Next, the transition process to the effect MA in the second embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing to effect MA of the second embodiment. In the transition process to the effect MA, the MPU 92 executes steps S2101 to S2106 as shown in FIG.

  In step S 2101, the MPU 92 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 to measure the time of step S 2103 described later. Specifically, the ROM 93 is referred to, and a value corresponding to the ending period TE is set as a measurement time. For example, if the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec and “10 sec” is set as the ending period TE, the MPU 92 sets “5000” as the waiting time (waiting period) of the ending period TE in the timer counter. The value set in the timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  In step S2102, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the music data A from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The music data A is output from the speaker unit 24 Control the sound output LSI 95. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data A from the speaker unit 24 is started. In addition, the intro portion of music data A includes audio data of "A RUSH rush". Therefore, after a predetermined time (TW1) has elapsed from the start of the output of the intro portion of the music data A, the voice "A RUSH rush" is output (reproduced) from the speaker unit 24 in accordance with the intro portion of the music data A.

  In step S2103, the MPU 92 determines whether the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2101. If the MPU 92 determines in step S2103 that the ending period has ended (YES), the MPU 92 starts the right strike navigation for RUSH in step S2104. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the sound data D “right-handed” from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled to be output from the speaker unit 24. Thereby, the output (reproduction) of the audio data D “right-handed” from the speaker unit 24 is started. If the MPU 92 does not determine in step S2103 that the ending period has ended (NO), it ends the transition process.

  In step S2105, the MPU 92 instructs the display control apparatus 100 to start the video effect of the effect MA. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 to read out and reproduce the video data A stored in the effect data storage area 1032. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads the video data A from the effect data storage area 1032 based on an instruction from the MPU 92 and controls the VDP 105 to display the video data A on the display screen G.

  In step S2106, the MPU 92 performs loop processing. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the output of the music data A has ended, and if the output of the music data A has ended, the MPU 92 corresponds to the loop portion (except for the intro portion) of the music data A. Sound data is read from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and set in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95 so that the loop portion of the music data A is output (reproduced) from the speaker unit 24. Control. Further, when the output of the music data A is not completed, the MPU 92 does not read the loop portion of the music data A.

  Note that the configuration for measuring the time in step S2103 is arbitrary, and may be measured using, for example, a real time clock (RTC).

<Migration process to effect MB>
Next, the transition process to the effect MB in the second embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing to effect MB according to the second embodiment. In the transition process to the effect MB, the MPU 92 executes steps S2201 to S2206 as shown in FIG.

  In step S2201, the MPU 92 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 to measure the time of step S2203 described later. Specifically, the ROM 93 is referred to, and a value corresponding to the ending period TE is set as a measurement time. For example, if the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec and “10 sec” is set as the ending period TE, the MPU 92 sets “5000” as the waiting time (waiting period) of the ending period TE in the timer counter. The value set in the timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  In step S2202, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the music data B from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and the music data B is output from the speaker unit 24. Control the sound output LSI 95. Thereby, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data B from the speaker unit 24 is started. Also, the intro portion of the music data B includes audio data of "B RUSH rush". Therefore, after a predetermined time (TW2) has elapsed from the start of the output of the intro portion of the music data B, the voice "B RUSH rush" is output (reproduced) from the speaker unit 24 according to the intro portion of the music data B.

  In step S2203, the MPU 92 determines whether the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2201. If the MPU 92 determines in step S2203 that the ending period has ended (YES), the MPU 92 starts the RUSH right strike navigation in step S2204. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 to read out and reproduce the video data D stored in the effect data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads the video data D from the effect data storage area 1032 and controls the VDP 105 to display it on the display screen G, and the RUSH right-handed navigation is started. . If the MPU 92 does not determine that the ending period has ended in step S 2203 (NO), it ends the transition process.

  In step S2205, the MPU 92 instructs the display control apparatus 100 to start the visual effect of the effect MB. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 to read out and reproduce the video data B stored in the effect data storage area 1032. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads the video data B from the effect data storage area 1032 based on an instruction from the MPU 92 and controls the VDP 105 to display the video data B on the display screen G.

  In step S2206, the MPU 92 performs loop processing. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the output of the music data B has ended, and when the output of the music data B has ended, the MPU 92 corresponds to the loop portion (except for the intro portion) of the music data B. Sound data is read from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and set in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95 so that the loop portion of the music data B is output (reproduced) from the speaker unit 24. Control. Further, when the output of the music data B is not completed, the MPU 92 does not read the loop portion of the music data B.

  In addition, the structure which measures time of step S2203 is arbitrary, for example, you may measure using a real time clock (RTC).

<Migration process to effect MC>
Next, the transition process to effect MC in the second embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing to effect MC according to the second embodiment. In the transition process to the effect MB, the MPU 92 executes steps S2301 to S2306 as shown in FIG.

  In step S2301, the MPU 92 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 in order to measure the time of step S2303 described later. Specifically, the ROM 93 is referred to, and a value corresponding to the ending period TE is set as a measurement time. For example, when the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec and the ending period TE is set to "10 sec", the MPU 92 sets "5000" as the waiting time (waiting period) of the ending period TE in the timer counter. The value set in the timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  In step S2302, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the music data C from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The music data C is output from the speaker unit 24. Control the sound output LSI 95. Thereby, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data C from the speaker unit 24 is started. In addition, the intro portion of the music data C includes audio data of "C RUSH rush" and "Please hit right". Therefore, after a predetermined time (TW3) has elapsed from the start of output of the intro portion of the music data C, the voice "C RUSH rush" is output from the speaker unit 24 according to the intro portion of the music data C, and the voice "C RUSH rush" After output, the sound of "Please hit right" is output (reproduced).

In step S2303, the MPU 92 determines whether the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2301. If the MPU 92 determines in step S2303 that the ending period has ended (YES), the MPU 92 starts typing navigation in step S2304. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 to read out and reproduce the video data D stored in the effect data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads the video data D from the effect data storage area 1032 and controls the VDP 105 to display it on the display screen G, and the RUSH right-handed navigation is started. . If the MPU 92 does not determine that the ending period has ended in step S 2303 (NO), it ends the transition process.

  In step S2305, the MPU 92 instructs the display control device 100 to start the video effect of the effect MC. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 to read out and reproduce the video data C stored in the effect data storage area 1032. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads the video data C from the effect data storage area 1032 based on an instruction from the MPU 92 and controls the VDP 105 to display the video data C on the display screen G.

  In step S2306, the MPU 92 performs loop processing. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the output of the music data C has ended, and when the output of the music data C has ended, the MPU 92 corresponds to the loop portion (except for the intro portion) of the music data C. The sequence data, parameter data and sound data are read from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and set in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95 so that the loop portion of the music data C is output (reproduced) from the speaker unit 24. Control. Further, when the output of the music data C is not completed, the MPU 92 does not read the loop portion of the music data C.

  In addition, the structure which measures time of step S2303 is arbitrary, for example, you may measure using a real time clock (RTC).

According to such this embodiment, the following operations and effects can be achieved.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment includes the voices of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush" in the intro portions of music data (BGM) A to C, respectively. There is. Therefore, there is no need to separately store the music data and audio data of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) in the storage means (ROM 93 and ROM 96 for common use), and "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush" There is no need to measure the time to output the "C RUSH rush" voice. Therefore, the storage capacity of the storage means (the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96) can be saved. Further, the arithmetic processing of the MPU 92 can be reduced. Also, the player can recognize the gaming state by the voices of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush" included in the first data. Therefore, the player's attention to the game can be improved, and the expectation of the game can be improved. In addition, data of the intro part that includes audio data of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush" is not repeatedly played back, but the data after A melody except the intro part is repeated The voices of "A RUSH plunge", "B RUSH plunge" and "C RUSH plunge" are repeatedly reproduced to play, and the player does not feel bothersome. The other effects are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

  In the first and second embodiments, the transition processing to each of the effects MA to MC has been described on the assumption that the effect type of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) is three types of effect MA, MB, and MC in the first and second embodiments. The effect type of the fourth mode M4 is not limited to the above three types, but is optional, and may be two types or four or more types.

  In the first and second embodiments, the embodiment in which the intro portion of music is reproduced at the time of transition to the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) is described, but the application of the present invention is not limited to the fourth mode M4. It can be applied to all mode transitions accompanied by changes in music, not limited to transition to

Third Embodiment
The first and second embodiments are embodiments in which the MPU 92, the sound output LSI 95, and the common ROM 96 are mounted on the sound emission control substrate 91 of the sound emission control device 90. In the first and second embodiments, the MPU 92 determines the content of the effect for a predetermined period based on the command received from the main control device 60, and performs the light emission control according to the content to various lamp parts It has a function. Further, the MPU 92 instructs the sound output LSI 95 to output sound in accordance with the contents of the determined effect, and causes the sound output LSI 95 to control the sound output from the speaker unit 24.

  In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42, an embodiment in which an audio light control board 91 is provided with a sound on light SOC (System on a Chip) 97 and a sound on light ROM 98 will be described. In the sound light SOC 97, a control core 971 that determines the execution content of the rendering according to the command received from the main control device and performs light emission control of the display lamp device 23 according to the determined rendering content, and the control core 971 A sound output core 972 that performs sound output control of the speaker unit 24 according to the contents of the presentation, and address data and data transfer unit 972 c of the sound output core 972 transmitted from the data transfer unit (DMA: Direct Memory Access) 971 c of the control core 971 A memory controller 974 for reading data from the sound light ROM 98 in accordance with the transmitted address data is incorporated. In this case, the sound output core 972 has priority over the control core 971 in reading data.

<Electric configuration concerning execution control of presentation>
Hereinafter, an electrical configuration for performing execution control of the effects of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the structure same as the pachinko machine 10 which concerns on 1st, 2nd embodiment, and the overlapping description is abbreviate | omitted.

  A sound emission control device 90 is provided as a control device for controlling the execution of the effect based on an instruction from the main control device 60. As shown in FIG. 42, the sound emission control device 90 includes a sound emission control board 91 on which a sound light SOC 97, a sound light ROM 98 and an amplification circuit 99 are mounted. The sound light SOC 97 includes a control core 971, a sound output core 972, a sound data processing unit 973, and a memory controller 974. The sound light SOC 97 is configured by integrating these elements into one chip.

  The control core 971 determines the specific content of the effect based on the command received from the main control device 60 and executes the light emission control of the display lamp device 23 in accordance with the determined content. Further, the control core 971 performs data setting according to the content of the determined effect on the register 972a provided in the sound output core 972, and the display control device 100 displays a command according to the content of the determined effect. Send to Thus, the sound output core 972 executes sound output control in a mode according to the content instructed from the control core 971, and the display control device 100 performs display control in a mode according to the content instructed from the control core 971. Run. Incidentally, data setting to the register 972a of the sound output core 972 by the control core 971 is performed through the data bus SL electrically connecting the control core 971 and the sound output core 972 in the sound light SOC 97. The control core 971 and the sound output core 972 can communicate bi-directionally through the data bus SL, and the data setting is performed on the sound output core 972 from the control core 971 as described above. From 972 to the control core 971, a signal indicating that sound output is being performed is transmitted.

  The control core 971 is used to read program data and control data stored in advance in the sound light ROM 98, in addition to the CPU 971a which is a central processing unit including a control unit and an operation unit, and also executes the program The RAM 971 b is built in for temporarily storing data necessary for the operation. The RAM 971b is configured to use a memory (ie, volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to store and retain SRAM, DRAM, etc. for reading and writing, and allows random access and is identical The time required for reading is earlier than that of the sound ROM 98 in comparison with the data capacity of the above. The data capacity of the RAM 971b has a data capacity of multiple bytes so as to be able to store and hold a plurality of data simultaneously, and has a data capacity of kilobytes or megabytes. Specifically, it has a data capacity of about 4 megabytes. The data capacity is smaller than the data capacity of the sound ROM 98. However, the data capacity of the RAM 971b is not limited to this, and it is optional as long as control can be suitably executed in the control core 971.

  The control core 971 also incorporates a data transfer unit 971c that instructs the memory controller 974 to read data from the sound ROM 98 based on an instruction from the CPU 971a. When the data corresponding to the data read instruction is written by the CPU 971a to the internal register of the data transfer unit 971c, the data transfer unit 971c instructs the memory controller 974 until all the data corresponding to the read instruction is read to the RAM 971b. Address data for instructing to read out the data. The transmission of the address data is performed in synchronization with a clock signal periodically transmitted from a clock circuit incorporated in the data transfer unit 971c (for example, 4 MHz).

  The sound output core 972 executes the sound output control of the speaker unit 24 in accordance with the contents of the effect determined in the control core 971. The sound output core 972 incorporates a register 972a, an HWD 972b, an SCM 972d, and a data transfer unit 972c.

  The register 972a has a function as a storage means for temporarily storing various data used by the sound output core 972, and a memory requiring an external power supply for storage and retention is used for both reading and writing It is configured to be used. Further, random access is possible, and the time required for reading is faster than the sound light ROM 98 when compared with the same data capacity. The register 972a has a data capacity of many bytes so as to be able to store and hold a plurality of data simultaneously, and has a data capacity in units of kilobytes or megabytes. Specifically, it has a data capacity of about 2 megabytes. The data capacity is smaller than the data capacity of the sound light ROM 98 and smaller than the data capacity of the RAM 971 b of the control core 971. However, the data capacity of the register 972a is not limited to this, and it is optional as long as the control can be suitably performed in the sound output core 972.

  The HWD 972 b and the SCM 972 d have a function of creating digital musical tone data using sound data read from the sound light ROM 98 according to the sequence data and parameter data transmitted from the control core 971 and stored in the register 972 a. The sequence data includes time data indicating the output start timing and output order of a series of sounds, and the parameter data includes data that defines the pitch, volume, timbre, etc. of the sound at a predetermined timing. There is. The sequence data and the parameter data are set as a set of mutually corresponding data, and a series of sound output is enabled by using the set of sequence data and the parameter data. Also, the period of sound output determined by one set of sequence data and parameter data is constant at a specific time regardless of the type of sequence data and parameter data, for example, one game cycle or one open / close execution It is 2.1 sec, which is shorter than the mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be shorter or longer than 2.1 sec. Further, it may be configured as a series of melody, and in this case, the period of the sound output determined by the sequence data and the parameter data will vary according to the type of the data.

  The HWD 972 b is for creating digital musical tone data in order to reproduce pre-sampled recorded data, and generates sine wave data using the recorded data for HWD stored in advance in the ROM 98 for sound light. , Enables playback of recorded data. The recording data may be compressed data such as MP3 or non-compressed data. The SCM 972 d does not create digital musical tone data from recording data for a predetermined time, but creates digital musical tone data by combining rectangular wave data stored in advance in the ROM for sound light 98 in time series, thereby using the electronic musical tone data It enables the reproduction of sound (so-called picopico sound).

  Here, the configuration of the register 972a used to create digital musical tone data in the HWD 972b and the SCM 972d will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of 43. The register 972a is provided with a sequence area 111, a parameter area 112, an HWD area 113, and an SCM area 114. The sequence data already described is written in the sequence area 111, and the parameter data already described is written in the parameter area 112.

  The HWD 972 b reads the recording data stored in the sound ROM 98 into the HWD area 113 by referring to the sequence data written in the sequence area 111 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 112, and records the recording data. By creating digital musical tone data from data, output of recorded sound is enabled. The HWD area 113 is provided with a first CH area 113a to a sixteenth CH area 113p, and it is possible to create digital musical tone data based on different recording data in each of the CH areas 113a to 113p. Thus, sounds corresponding to a plurality of different recording data can be simultaneously output.

  The SCM 972 d refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 111 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 112 to read out the rectangular wave data stored in the sound ROM 98 to the SCM area 114, and the rectangle By creating digital musical tone data from wave data, it is possible to output electronic sound. In the SCM area 114, first CH areas 114a to 16th CH areas 114p are provided, and it is possible to create different digital musical tone data in the respective CH areas 114a to 114p. Thereby, a plurality of different electronic sounds can be output simultaneously.

  The 1st CH area 113a to the 16th CH area 113p of the HWD area 113 and the 1st CH area 114a to the 16th CH area 114p of the SCM area 114 respectively store an area capable of storing two digital musical tone data already created. While performing sound output control using digital musical tone data created in one of the storable areas, a digital corresponding to the next execution period with respect to the execution period of the sound output control Tone data is created in the other storable area. As a result, it becomes possible to simultaneously produce the necessary digital musical tone data in the execution period of the next sound output control while outputting the sound, and it becomes possible to continuously output the sound.

  Referring back to FIG. 42, the sound data processing unit 973 of the sound light SOC 97 has a function as a digital / analog converter, and the digital musical tone data and the SCM area created in the HWD area 113 of the register 972a. The digital tone data created at 114 is converted into an analog sound signal, and is output to an amplification circuit 99 formed on the display control board 101. The amplification circuit 99 amplifies the output level of the analog sound signal to a level according to the volume set by the volume, and outputs the amplified sound signal to the speaker unit 24. Thus, a predetermined sound is output from the speaker unit 24. Further, when digital musical tone data is simultaneously generated in a plurality of CH areas 113a to 143p in the HWD area 113, the sound data processing unit 973 synthesizes the digital musical tone data and simultaneously generates the digital musical tone data in the SCM area 114. When digital musical tone data are created simultaneously in a plurality of CH areas 114a to 144p, the digital musical tone data are synthesized. When digital tone data is created in each of the HWD area 113 and the SCM area 114, the digital tone data is synthesized. When the synthesis is performed as described above, the digital synthesized musical tone data after the synthesis is converted into an analog sound signal, amplified by the amplifier circuit 99 as described above, and output to the speaker unit 24. This makes it possible to simultaneously output a plurality of different sounds from the speaker unit 24.

  As described above, when outputting sound, sound data, which is either recording data or rectangular wave data, is read from the sound ROM 98 to the register 972a, but reading of the sound data is performed in the sequence area 111 of the register 972a. It is performed by the data transfer unit 972 c of the sound output core 972 based on the stored sequence data.

  Specifically explaining using an explanatory view of FIG. 44 showing an example of sequence data, pointer data set corresponding to processing timing of the sound output core 972 is determined in the sequence data SD. The content data of sound output and the content data of data transfer are defined corresponding to each pointer data. The processing timing of the sound output core 972 is generated in synchronization with a clock signal periodically transmitted from a clock circuit (not shown) incorporated in the sound output core 972. In this case, the cycle of the clock signal is shorter than the cycle of the clock signal of the data transfer unit 972c, and is specifically 10 MHz. At the processing timing of the sound output core 972, each of the HWD 972b, the SCM 972d, and the data transfer unit 972c performs an operation corresponding to the sequence data and the parameter data.

  The content data of the sound output in the sequence data SD is used to create digital musical tone data for each channel in the HWD 972 b and the SCM 972 d. In this case, the content data of the sound output is set corresponding to the pointer data, and creation of digital musical tone data based on the content data of the sound output set corresponding to each pointer data is transferred to the register 972a in advance. It is performed using the sound data that has been

  The content data of the data transfer in the sequence data SD is used to specify the data read timing from the sound light ROM 98 in the data transfer unit 972c, and the area of the sound light ROM 98 in which the data to be read is stored. Used to identify address data. The content data of data transfer is such that a plurality of predetermined pointer data exist between the read timing of sound data corresponding to one channel and the read timing of sound data corresponding to the next channel. Data for reading instruction is set. Data for reading out sound data of a data amount that enables output of sound for a predetermined time is set as data of the first data read instruction, and the sound data is 1 for either the HWD 972 b or the SCM 972 d. It corresponds to this channel. Therefore, when a plurality of digital musical tone data are synthesized to output a sound, an instruction to read out data corresponding to the number of digital musical tone data is issued. Further, sound data read out based on one data read instruction corresponds to data enabling sound output over 700 μsec as the predetermined time in the corresponding channel. In this case, the HWD 972 b and the SCM 972 d each have 16 channels, and the time required to read out 700 μsec worth of sound data for all of these 16 channels is less than 700 μsec. As a result, it is possible to create digital musical tone data for enabling the output of sound for the next predetermined time that is continuous with the predetermined time while outputting the sound for the predetermined time.

  The data transfer unit 971 c of the control core 971 and the data transfer unit 972 c of the sound output core 972 read data from the common sound light ROM 98. The sound light ROM 98 is configured to use a memory (i.e., nonvolatile storage means) that does not require an external power supply for storage and retention as a read only memory. Specifically, although a NOR flash memory is used as the sound light ROM 98, a NAND flash memory may be used. The sound light ROM 98 stores various control programs and fixed value data used when executing processing according to the programs.

  The data configuration of the sound light ROM 98 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In the sound light ROM 98, program data (1), program data (2),..., Program data (L) for executing processing for effect control by the CPU 971a of the control core 971 are made in advance. It is memorized. By using these program data, the CPU 971a executes main processing, timer interrupt processing, and the like described later. In the sound light ROM 98, processing data (1), processing data (2),..., Processing data (M) are stored in advance. These processing data include a data table used to execute each effect, and sequence data and parameter data to be provided to the sound output core 972. In the sound light ROM 98, command data (1), command data (2),..., Command data (N) are stored in advance. The command data is used to instruct the display control device 100 in the CPU 971a of the control core 971 to provide an effect content.

  In the sound light ROM 98, light emission data (1), light emission data (2),..., Light emission data as well as data used to execute processing by the CPU 971a of the control core 971 as described above (P) is stored, and sound data (1), sound data (2),..., Sound data (Q) are stored. In each light emission data, information of the type of light emitting unit to be turned on of the display lamp device 23, the lighting period, and the lighting order is set in a predetermined effect period, and the contents of these light emission patterns are each light emission It depends on the type of data. The respective light emission data stored in the sound light ROM 98 differ in the target light emission control period and in the content of the light emission pattern. Each sound data includes recording data consisting of a sine wave, and also includes rectangular wave data used to output an electronic sound.

  As shown in FIG. 42, the sound light ROM 98 is electrically connected to the memory controller 974 of the sound light SOC 97 via the address bus SL1 and the data bus SL2. Memory controller 974 is electrically connected to control core 971 via address bus SL3 and data bus SL4, and electrically connected to sound output core 972 via address bus SL5 and data bus SL6. .

  To the memory controller 974, the address data of the read instruction target is transmitted from the data transfer unit 971c of the control core 971 via the address bus SL3. The memory controller 974 includes the control side address buffer 974a for storing the address data received from the data transfer unit 971c, and the address data is newly stored from the data transfer unit 971c when no unprocessed address data is stored. Is received, the address data is stored in the control side address buffer 974a. At this time, a normal acceptance signal indicating that the address data has been received normally is transmitted from the memory controller 974 to the data transfer unit 971c via the data bus SL4, whereby the data transfer unit 971c receives the address data normally. It is identified that On the other hand, when address data is newly received from the data transfer unit 971c in a situation where unprocessed address data is stored in the control side address buffer 974a, the address data is not stored in the control side address buffer 974a. In this case, since the normal accept signal is not transmitted to the data transfer unit 971c, it is specified that the data transfer unit 971c needs to transmit the same address data again.

  When corresponding to the address data transmitted from the data transfer unit 971c, the memory controller 974 transmits the address data via the address bus SL1 to the sound ROM 98, and the data corresponding to the address data via the data bus SL2 Is received from the sound ROM 98. Then, the received data is transmitted to the RAM 971b of the control core 971 or the internal register of the CPU 971a via the data bus SL4.

  To the memory controller 974, the data transfer unit 972c of the sound output core 972 transmits the address data of the read instruction target via the address bus SL5. The memory controller 974 includes the sound output side address buffer 974b to store the address data received from the data transfer unit 972c, and an address is newly added from the data transfer unit 972c when no unprocessed address data is stored. When data is received, the address data is stored in the sound output side address buffer 974b. At this time, a normal acceptance signal indicating that the address data has been accepted normally is transmitted from the memory controller 974 to the data transfer unit 972c via the data bus SL6, whereby the data transfer unit 972c receives the address data normally. It is identified that On the other hand, when address data is newly received from the data transfer unit 972c in a situation where unprocessed address data is stored in the sound output side address buffer 974b, the address data is not stored in the sound output side address buffer 974b. In this case, since the normal acceptance signal is not transmitted to the data transfer unit 972c, it is specified that the data transfer unit 972c needs to transmit the same address data again.

  When it corresponds to the address data transmitted from the data transfer unit 972c, the memory controller 974 transmits the address data to the sound ROM 98 via the address bus SL1, and the data corresponding to the address data via the data bus SL2. Is received from the sound ROM 98. Then, the received data is transmitted to the register 972a of the sound output core 972 via the data bus SL6.

  The memory controller 974 incorporates a clock circuit, and processing in the memory controller 974 is performed in synchronization with a clock signal periodically transmitted from the clock circuit. In this case, the cycle of the clock signal is shorter than the cycle of the clock signal of the data transfer unit 972c and the cycle of the clock signal of the sound output core 972, and is specifically 15 MHz.

Fourth Embodiment
In the first to third embodiments, the case in which the ending period of the jackpot game is fixed has been described. In this fourth embodiment, depending on the type of jackpot, specifically, the type (class) of the special symbol and the mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) of the pachinko machine 10, all round games of the jackpot game are all An embodiment in which the ending period performed after the termination is changed will be described. Hereinafter, although the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to third embodiments will be assigned the same reference numerals and overlapping descriptions will be omitted.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the pachinko machine 10 large winning opening opening and closing process of the fourth embodiment. In the special winning opening / closing process of the fourth embodiment, the MPU 62 executes steps S2401 to S2419 as shown in FIG. In step S2401, the MPU 62 determines whether the special winning opening 381 is open. When it is determined that the special winning opening 381 is not open at step S2401 (NO), the MPU 62 executes the processing after step S2402A. When the MPU 62 determines that the special winning opening 381 is open at step S2401 (YES), the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S2406 and the subsequent steps.

  When the MPU 62 determines that the special winning opening 381 is not open at step S2401 (NO), at step S2402, the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less, and the value of the round counter RC is "0". It is determined whether it is the following or not. If the MPU 62 determines in step S2402 that both the value of the opening / closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are "0" or less (YES), the special winning opening / closing process is ended.

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S2402 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less (NO), the value of the timer counter T is "0" in step S2403. It is determined whether it is less than or equal to. If the MPU 62 determines in step S 2403 that the value of the timer counter T is not “0” or less (NO), it ends the special winning opening / closing process.

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S 2403 that the value of the timer counter T is less than or equal to “0” (YES), it executes the special winning opening open process in step S 2404. The special winning opening opening process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  In step S2405, the MPU 62 sets an open command. Further, the MPU 62 transmits the release command set in step S2405 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of the above-described normal process (see FIG. 11). Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the special winning opening / closing process. The sound emission control apparatus 90 recognizes that the open / close door 382 is set to the open state based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S2401 that the special winning opening 381 is open (YES), whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less in step S2406, that is, the special winning opening is opened. It is determined whether the upper limit continuation time set in the timer counter T has elapsed in step S2403 or step S2406 of the process.

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S2406 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less (NO), it determines in step S2407 whether or not a winning in the special winning opening 381 has occurred. The determination as to whether or not the winning of the special winning opening 381 has occurred is performed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 504 corresponding to the special winning opening 381.

  When the MPU 62 determines that the winning of the special winning opening 381 has not occurred at step S2407 (NO), the special winning opening / closing process is ended. If the MPU 62 determines in step S2407 that a winning in the special winning opening 381 has occurred (YES), the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the winning counter PC and updates the value in step S2408.

  In step S2409, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less. If the MPU 62 determines in step S2409 that the value of the winning counter PC is not "0" or less (NO), the special winning opening / closing process is ended. When the MPU 62 determines in step S2409 that the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 62 executes a closing execution process in step S2410. In the closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open / close door 382 in the closed state by executing the drive control of the variable prize drive unit 383.

  In step S 2411, the MPU 62 sets a closing command. The MPU 62 transmits the closing command set in step S2411 to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S301 of the above-described normal process (see FIG. 11). The audio light emission control device 90 recognizes that the open / close door 382 is set to the closed state based on the close command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

  In step S 2412, the MPU 62 determines whether the pass / fail result is “a special out result”. If the MPU 62 determines in step S 2412 that the acceptance result is the “special outlier result” (YES), the MPU 62 executes processing of step S 2418 and later described later.

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S 2412 that the yes / no result is not the “special outlier result” (NO), the MPU 62 executes the process of step S 2413 and subsequent steps. In step S 2413, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC to update it. In step S 2414, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less. When the MPU 62 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not “0” or less at step S 2414 (NO), the value of the timer counter T is set to “500” at step S 2415. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the special winning opening / closing process.

  Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S 2415 sets the open / close door 382 in the open state, and then sets the open / close door 382 again in the closed state, and waits for the open door until the open / close door 382 is set in the open state again. It defines the time. In the first embodiment, the open standby time is set to 1 sec, but the open standby time is the same regardless of the type and progress of the open / close execution mode.

  Further, when the MPU 62 determines that the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less in step S 2414 (YES), the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S 2416 and subsequent steps. In step S2416, the MPU 62 performs an ending period setting process. In this ending period setting process, the MPU 62 refers to the ending period determination table, determines the ending period according to the type of special symbol and the mode (high probability mode or low probability mode), and corresponds to the determined ending period The value is set to the timer counter T. The details of the ending period setting process will be described later.

  The waiting time for ending is the same as the waiting time for opening regardless of the type of the game result. That is, the waiting time for ending is the same regardless of the type of the open / close execution mode. Note that the waiting time for ending is not limited to this, and may be configured to be slightly different according to the type of the game result, for example, to the extent that the player recognizes as similar. In addition, for example, the waiting time for ending is largely different between when it is the game result of the “low probability result” or the “most advantageous result” and when it is the game result other than these, etc., the game result It may be configured to be largely different according to the type of

  In step S2417, the MPU 62 sets an ending command. The MPU 62 transmits the ending command set in step S2417 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of the above-described normal processing (see FIG. 11). Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the special winning opening / closing process. The audio light emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the open / close execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

  Further, when the MPU 62 determines that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less at step S2406 (YES), the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S2410 described above. If the MPU 62 determines in step S 2412 that the acceptance result is the “special outlier result” (YES), the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the open / close counter SOC in step S 2418 to update it.

  In step S2419, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less. When the MPU 62 determines that the value of the open / close counter SOC is not “0” or less at step S 2419 (NO), the MPU 62 executes the process after step S 2415 described above. When the MPU 62 determines in step S2419 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is “0” or less (YES), the MPU 62 executes the above-described processing from S2416.

  FIG. 47 is a view showing a data table of an ending period determination table stored in the ROM 63 of the main control device 60 of the fourth embodiment. More specifically, it is an ending period determination table for determining an ending period after all round games in the jackpot game have ended. In the fourth embodiment, the ending period is determined according to the type of special symbol and the mode (high probability mode or low probability mode). For example, as shown in FIG. 47, in the case of the special symbol 1 (hereinafter, also referred to as a special figure 1), if the mode is a high probability mode, "10 sec" is determined as the ending period, and the mode is a low probability mode If there is, "5 sec" is determined as the ending period. Further, in the case of the special symbol 2 (hereinafter, also referred to as a special figure 2), "5 sec" is determined as the ending period if the mode is the high probability mode, and "2 sec as the ending period if the mode is the low probability mode "Is determined.

  In the example shown in FIG. 47, when the special symbol is the same, the ending period is set differently depending on whether it is the high probability mode or the low probability mode, but the special symbol is the same. In this case, the ending period may be set to be the same regardless of whether the mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode. Also, the ending period shown in FIG. 47 is merely an example, and is not limited to the times (10 sec, 5 sec, 2 sec) shown in FIG. Depending on the probability mode, the ending period may be different.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart of an ending period setting process according to the fourth embodiment. The setting process of the ending period will be described below with reference to FIG.
In step S2501, the MPU 62 confirms the gaming state at the time of jackpot game winning. Specifically, based on the contents of the flags stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 64 (flags corresponding to the type command transmitted from the main control device 60), the gaming state at the time of the jackpot game winning is confirmed. Next, in step S2502, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the type of the special symbol of the jackpot game is the special figure 1. When the type of the special symbol of the big hit game is the special figure 1 in step S2502 (YES), in step S2503, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the mode is the high probability mode. If the mode is the high probability mode in step S2503 (YES), in step S2504, the MPU 62 sets the ending period to “10 sec” with reference to the ending period determination table (see FIG. 47) stored in the ROM 63. . Specifically, since the timer interrupt process is performed in a cycle of 2 msec, the MPU 62 sets "5000" corresponding to the ending period of 10 sec in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 641 of the RAM 64.

  If the mode is not the high probability mode (NO) in step S2503, that is, if the mode is the low probability mode, MPU 62 refers to the ending period determination table (see FIG. 47) stored in ROM 63 in step S2505. Set the ending period to "5 sec". Specifically, since the timer interrupt process is performed in a cycle of 2 msec, the MPU 62 sets "2500" corresponding to 5 sec which is the ending period in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 641 of the RAM 64.

  In addition, when the type of special symbol of the big hit game is not special figure 1 in step S2502 (NO), in other words, when the type of special symbol of the big hit game is special figure 2, the MPU 62 has high probability of mode in step S2506. It is determined whether or not the mode is selected. If the mode is the high probability mode in step S2506 (YES), in step S2505, the MPU 62 sets the ending period to "5 sec" with reference to the ending period determination table (see FIG. 47) stored in the ROM 63. . Specifically, since the timer interrupt process is performed in a cycle of 2 msec, the MPU 62 sets "2500" corresponding to 5 sec which is the ending period in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 641 of the RAM 64.

  If the mode is not the high probability mode (NO) in step S2506, that is, if the mode is the low probability mode, MPU 62 refers to the ending period determination table (see FIG. 47) stored in ROM 63 in step S2507. Set the ending period to "2 sec". Specifically, since the timer interrupt process is performed in a cycle of 2 msec, the MPU 62 sets “1000” corresponding to 5 sec, which is the ending period, in the timer counter T.

  The value set in the timer counter T in steps S2504, S2505 and S2507 is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. The configuration for measuring the ending period is arbitrary, and may be measured using, for example, a real time clock (RTC).

  FIG. 49 is a diagram for describing notification timings of RUSH rush and right-handed navigation for RUSH according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 49, in the fourth embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is selected by the MPU 62 because the ending period changes according to the type of special symbol and whether the mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode. In accordance with the ending period, the notification timing of RUSH rush and RUSH right-handed navigation (the suggestion of the right-handed game at the time of transition to the fourth mode M4 (hereinafter, RUSH mode)) is changed. Hereinafter, the RUSH mode transition process will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

<Pattern A>
First, referring to FIG. 49 (a), the ending period TE is longer than the time obtained by adding the notification time of the RUSH rush (voice output time) TX and the notification time of the RUSH right-handed navigation (voice output time) TY. The case of (TE ≧ (TX + TY)) will be described. As shown in FIG. 49 (a), when the ending period TE is more than the time obtained by adding the notification time TX of RUSH rush and the notification time TY of right-handed navigation for RUSH, notification of RUSH rush from the speaker unit 24 (Specifically, sound output (playback) of “〇 RUSH rush”) and notification time of right-handed navigation for RUSH from the speaker unit 24 (specifically, sound output of “Please hit right” (playback) ) Is controlled within the ending period TE.

  More specifically, the voice output of "〇 RUSH rush" is started after the voice start time TW4 from the start time T1 of the ending period, and "「 strike right "after the voice output of" 〇 RUSH rush " The voice output of "" is started. Here, the voice start time TW4 is a value obtained by subtracting the notification time of the RUSH rush (voice output time) TX and the notification time of the right-handed navigation for RUSH (voice output time) TY from the ending period TE, and the ending period At the end of T2, control is made to end the voice output of "Please hit right" at the same time as or substantially simultaneously with T2.

  When the ending period TE is the same as the time obtained by adding the notification time TX of the RUSH rush and the notification time TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH, the time TW4 is 0 sec. Further, also in the example shown in FIG. 49 (a), the music in the RUSH mode, which is shifted after the big hit game from the ending period start time T1, is controlled to be started to output (reproduce). Specifically, control is performed such that the output of the intro portion of the music used in the effect of the fourth mode M4 from the speaker unit 24 is started from the start time T1 of the ending period TE. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 49 (a), the period of the intro portion of the music used for the effect of the fourth mode M4 is shorter than the ending period TE. Therefore, the output of the intro portion ends before the end time T2 of the ending period TE. Further, the speaker unit 24 is controlled so that the A melody part following the intro part is continuously output after the output of the intro part of the music is finished.

  Further, in the transition process shown in FIG. 49 (a), control is performed such that the voice of “RUSH rush” is output from the speaker unit 24 during the output period of the intro portion. As described above, the output of the "RUSH rush" voice is started after the voice start time TW4 from the start time T1 of the ending period, and the output of the "RUSH rush" voice ends simultaneously with or almost simultaneously with the end of the intro portion output. Is controlled. In addition, following to the output of the sound of "RUSH rush", the sound of "Please hit right" to suggest a right hit game is outputted, and "right hit at the same time or almost simultaneously with the end of the ending period T2 Control is performed so that the output of the voice of "Please end". Therefore, the game state can be shifted without breaking the flow of the game state, the player can enjoy the game without losing the exhilaration of the series of flows of the game state, and the fun of the game is improved. Can be In addition, you may control on the display screen G so that characters, such as "Please hit right" may be displayed on the display screen G, at the time of completion | finish of an ending period T2, in order to suggest a hit game. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "Please strike right", characters such as "Please strike right" are displayed at the end of the ending period, in other words, when the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) is started. Controlled to

<Pattern B>
Next, referring to FIG. 49 (b), from the time when the ending period TE is the notification time of the RUSH rush (voice output time) TX and the notification time of the RUSH right-handed navigation (voice output time) TY. A case is also described in which the time is short (TE <(TX + TY)) and the notification time (voice output time) TX or more of the RUSH inrush (TE ≧ TX). In the case where the ending period TE is shorter than the sum of the notification time TX of RUSH rush and the notification time TY of right-handed navigation for RUSH, as shown in FIG. 49 (b), it is more than the notification time TX of RUSH rush , Notification of RUSH rush from the speaker unit 24 (specifically, audio output (reproduction) of "〇 RUSH rush") is performed within the ending period TE, notification of right-handed navigation for RUSH (specifically, ""Pleaseright-click" audio output (playback) is controlled to be performed after the ending period TE.

  More specifically, the voice output of “〇 RUSH rush” is started after the voice start time TW5 from the start time T1 of the ending period. Here, the voice start time TW5 is a value obtained by subtracting the notification time (voice output time) TX of the RUSH inrush from the ending period TE, and simultaneously or substantially simultaneously with the end T2 of the ending period "00 RUSH rush" It is controlled to end the voice output of In addition, after the voice output of “突入 RUSH rush”, in other words, voice output of “Please hit right” at the same time as or substantially simultaneously with the end of the ending period T 2 is started.

  When the ending period TE is the same as the notification time TX of the RUSH rush, the time TW5 is 0 sec. Also in the example shown in FIG. 49 (b), the music in the RUSH mode, which is shifted after the big hit game from the ending period start time T1, is controlled to be started to output (reproduce). Specifically, control is performed such that the output of the intro portion of the music used in the effect of the fourth mode M4 from the speaker unit 24 is started from the start time T1 of the ending period TE. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 49 (b), the ending period TE and the period of the intro portion of the music used in the effect of the fourth mode M4 have the same length (time). Therefore, the output of the intro portion ends at time T2 when the ending period ends. Also, the speaker unit 24 is controlled so that the A melody part following the intro part is continuously output after the output of the intro part of the music is finished.

  Further, in the transition processing shown in FIG. 49 (b), control is performed such that the voice of “RUSH rush” is output from the speaker unit 24 during the output period of the intro portion. As described above, the output of the "RUSH rush" voice is started after the voice start time TW5 from the start time T1 of the ending period, and the output of the "RUSH rush" voice ends simultaneously with or almost simultaneously with the end of the intro portion output. To be controlled. Further, at the end of the ending period T2, a voice of "Please hit right" for suggesting a right hit game is outputted, and the right hit navigation for RUSH is controlled to be started. That is, the output of the voice of "Please strike right" is controlled to be started at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). In addition, at the end time T2 of the ending period, it is controlled such that the video effect of the effect MA is started. Therefore, the game state can be shifted without breaking the flow of the game state, the player can enjoy the game without losing the exhilaration of the series of flows of the game state, and the fun of the game is improved. Can be In addition, you may control on the display screen G so that characters, such as "Please hit right" may be displayed on the display screen G, at the time of completion | finish of an ending period T2, in order to suggest a hit game. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "Please strike right", characters such as "Please strike right" are displayed at the end of the ending period, in other words, when the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) is started. Controlled to

<Pattern C>
Next, referring to FIG. 49 (c), from the time when the ending period TE is the notification time (voice output time) TX of RUSH rush plus the notification time (voice output time) TY of right-handed navigation for RUSH A case is also described in which the length is short (TE <(TX + TY)) and shorter than the notification time (voice output time) TX of RUSH inrush (TE <TX). As shown in FIG. 49 (c), when the ending period TE is shorter than the notification time TX of the RUSH rush, the RUSH rush notification (specifically, the audio output of “RUS RUSH rush”) from the speaker section 24 ( Reproduction) and notification of right-handed navigation for RUSH (specifically, sound output (reproduction) of “Please hit right”) are controlled to be performed after the end of the ending period TE at time T2.

  More specifically, the audio output of “RUS RUSH rush” is started from the end T2 of the ending period TE. Further, in the case shown in FIG. 49 (c), the right-handed navigation for RUSH by video is started from the end time T2 of the ending period TE. If you start voice output of "Please hit right" after voice output of "〇 RUSH rush", then right-handed navigation for RUSH has not been started even though you have already entered RUSH mode This is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, when you enter the RUSH mode and output the voice of "Please hit right", the audio will overlap with the "RUSH rush". For this reason, in the example shown in FIG. 49 (c), without outputting the voice of "Please strike right," start right navigation by RUSH from the video from the end T2 of the ending period TE, and then strike "right Please start voice output after "音 声 RUSH rush" voice output.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 49 (c), the music in the RUSH mode, which is shifted after the big hit game from the ending period start time T1, is controlled to start output (reproduction). Specifically, control is performed such that the output of the intro portion of the music used in the effect of the fourth mode M4 from the speaker unit 24 is started from the start time T1 of the ending period TE. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 49 (c), the period of the intro portion of the music used in the effect of the fourth mode M4 is longer than the ending period TE. Therefore, the output of the intro portion continues even after the end time T2 of the ending period TE. Further, the speaker unit 24 is controlled so that the A melody part following the intro part is continuously output after the output of the intro part of the music is finished.

  Further, in the transition process shown in FIG. 49 (c), control is performed such that the voice of “RUSH rush” is output from the speaker unit 24 during the output period of the intro portion. As described above, the output of the "RUSH rush" voice is started after the voice start time TW6 from the start time T1 of the ending period, and the output of the "RUSH rush" voice ends simultaneously with or almost simultaneously with the end of the intro portion output. To be controlled. Here, the voice start time TW6 is the same as the ending period TE. In the example shown in FIG. 49 (c), at the end T2 of the ending period TE, a voice of “RUSH rush” is output from the speaker unit 24. For this reason, when the voice of "Please strike right" is output at the end of the ending period TE at T2 to suggest a right-handed game, the voice "Please strike right" with the voice of "RUSH rush" Are overlapped and output. Therefore, in the transition process shown in FIG. 49 (c), the voice of "Please hit right" is not output at the end of the ending period TE at the end T2, suggesting a right-handed game at the end T2 of the ending period TE. Characters such as "Please strike right" are displayed on the display screen G, and control is performed so that the right strike navigation for RUSH is started. That is, the display of characters such as "Please strike right" on the display screen G is controlled to be started at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). Therefore, the game state can be shifted without breaking the flow of the game state, the player can enjoy the game without losing the exhilaration of the series of flows of the game state, and the fun of the game is improved. Can be

  FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect transition processing to the RUSH mode of the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 50, the effect transfer process to the RUSH mode of the fourth embodiment will be described. In this effect transfer process, as shown in FIG. 50, the MPU 92 executes steps S2601 to S2612.

  In step S2601, the MPU 92 determines whether an ending command has been received. In the determination, the MPU 92 confirms whether an ending command is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. In step S2601, when the MPU 92 determines that the ending command is received (YES), in step S2602, the MPU 92 acquires the ending period TE based on the ending command. The ending period TE may be obtained by including information on the length (sec) of the ending period TE in the ending command transmitted from the main control device 60, or the ending period determination table shown in FIG. Is stored in the ROM 93 of the voice emission control device 90, and the type (type) of the special symbol and the mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) are determined from the command type to recognize the ending period TE. It is also good. Further, in step S2601, when the MPU 92 does not determine that the ending command has been received (NO), the effect transfer process is ended.

  In step S2603, the MPU 92 starts outputting the RUSH mode music to shift after the jackpot game. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to music data (BGM) in the RUSH mode from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled to be output from the unit 24. As a result, output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the RUSH mode music is started from the speaker unit 24.

  In step S2604, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the ending period TE is equal to or longer than the sum of the notification time TX of the RUSH rush and the notification time TY of the RUSH right-handed navigation (TE TE (TX + TY)). If the ending period TE is equal to or longer than the sum of the notification time TX of the RUSH rush and the notification time TY of the RUSH right-handed navigation in step S2604 (YES), the MPU 92 proceeds to step S2609 described later in step S2605. The timer counter T provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 is set to measure the time of. Specifically, the value corresponding to TW4 is set in the timer counter T with reference to the data table stored in the ROM 93. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  If the ending period TE is not longer than the sum of the notification time TX of the RUSH rush and the notification time TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH in step S2604 (NO), the MPU 92 determines the ending period TE in step S2606. , It is determined whether or not the notification time TX of RUSH rush or more (TE ≧ TX). If the ending period TE is at least the notification time TX of the RUSH rush in step S2606 (YES), the MPU 92 is provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 in step S2607 to measure the time of step S2609 described later. The timer counter T is set. Specifically, the value corresponding to TW5 is set in the timer counter T with reference to the data table stored in the ROM 93. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  If the ending period TE is not longer than the notification time TX of the RUSH rush in step S2606 (NO), the MPU 92 is provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 in step S2608 to measure the time of step S2609 described later. The timer counter T is set. Specifically, the value corresponding to the ending period TE is set in the timer counter T with reference to the data table stored in the ROM 93. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  In step S2609, the MPU 92 determines whether the time set in step S2605, step S2607 or step S2608 has elapsed, that is, whether the value set in the timer counter T has become zero. In step S2609, when the time set in step S2605, step S2607 or step S2608 has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 92 ends the effect transfer process.

  If the time set in step S2605, step S2607 or step S2608 has passed in step S2609 (YES), the MPU 92 starts output of RUSH rush audio data in step S2610. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the RUSH rush audio data from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95 and the RUSH rush audio data is a speaker The sound output LSI 95 is controlled to be output from the unit 24. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the RUSH inrush sound from the speaker unit 24 is started.

  In step S2611, the MPU 92 determines whether the output of the RUSH inrush audio data has been completed. If the output of the RUSH inrush voice data is completed in step S2611 (YES), in step S2612, the MPU 92 starts the output of the right-handed navigation voice data for RUSH. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the voice data of the right-handed navigation for RUSH from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that data is output from the speaker unit 24. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the RUSH inrush sound from the speaker unit 24 is started. When the output of the RUSH rush voice data is not completed in step S2611 (NO), the MPU 92 ends the effect transfer process.

  In the above-mentioned FIG. 49 and FIG. 50, the ending period TE determined according to the type of special symbol and the mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode, the notification time for RUSH rush and the right-handed navigation for RUSH We have determined the notification timing of "RUSH rush" and "Please hit right" based on comparison with the notification time TY, but whether the special symbol type and mode are high probability mode or low probability mode An ending period TE determined in accordance with the notification time TX of RUSH rush and a notification time TY of right-handed navigation for RUSH are known in advance. Therefore, the notification timing of "RUSH plunging" and "Please hit right" may be determined in advance depending on the type of the special symbol and whether the mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a data table of a notification timing determination table of RUSH inrush and right-handed navigation for RUSH stored in the ROM 93 of the voice emission control device according to the fourth embodiment. More specifically, it is a data table for determining the notification timing of RUSH rush to notify the player of the RUSH mode to shift after the jackpot game. The notification timing of RUSH rush is determined with reference to the special symbol type and mode (high probability mode or low probability mode). For example, in the case of Special Figure 1, if the mode is a high probability mode, "TW4" is determined as the notification timing, and if the mode is a low probability mode, "TW5" is determined as the notification timing. Further, in the case of Special Figure 2, if the mode is a high probability mode, "TW5" is determined as the notification timing, and if the mode is a low probability mode, "TE" is determined as the notification timing.

  Here, “TW4”, “TW5” and “TE” are waiting time (waiting time) from the start time T1 of the ending period, and when “TW4” is determined as the notification timing, the time at the start of the ending period Notification of "RUSH rush" is started after T1 to TW4. In addition, when “TW5” is determined as the notification timing, the notification of “RUSH rush” is started after the start time T1 to TW5 of the ending period. Furthermore, when “TE” is determined as the notification timing, notification of “RUSH rush” is started after TE from the start time T1 of the ending period, that is, at the end of the ending period.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing another example of the flowchart of the effect transfer process to the RUSH mode according to the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, another example of the flowchart of the effect transfer process to the RUSH mode according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In this effect transfer process, as shown in FIG. 52, the MPU 92 executes steps S2701 to S2712.

  In step S2701, the MPU 92 determines whether an ending command has been received. In the determination, the MPU 92 confirms whether an ending command is stored in the various flag storage areas. If it is determined in step S2701 that the MPU 92 has received the ending command (YES), the MPU 92 determines in step S2702 whether the type and mode of the special symbol of the jackpot game is the high probability mode or the low probability mode. get. Specifically, the MPU 92 acquires, based on the type command received from the main control device 60, whether the type and mode of the special symbol is the high probability mode or the low probability mode. Further, in step S2701, when the MPU 92 does not determine that the ending command has been received (NO), the effect transfer process is ended.

  In step S2703, the MPU 92 starts outputting RUSH mode music (BGM) to shift after the jackpot game. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the music data in the RUSH mode from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled to be output. As a result, output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the RUSH mode music is started from the speaker unit 24.

  In step S2704, the MPU 92 determines whether the type of the special symbol for the jackpot game is the special view 1 and the mode is the high probability mode. In step S2704, when the type of special symbol is the special figure 1 and the mode is the high probability mode (YES), the MPU 92 performs various counters of the RAM 94 in step S2705 to measure the time of step S2709 described later. The timer counter T provided in the area is set. Specifically, the value corresponding to TW4 is set in the timer counter T with reference to the notification timing determination table (FIG. 51) stored in the ROM 93. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  In step S2704, when the type of special symbol of the jackpot game is special figure 1 and the mode is not the high probability mode (NO), in step S2706, the type of special symbol is special figure 1 and the mode is low in step S2706. It is determined whether the mode is the probability mode or the type of the special symbol is the special figure 2 and the mode is the high probability mode. In step S2706, when the type of special symbol is the special figure 1 and the mode is the low probability mode or the type of the special symbol is the special figure 2 and the mode is the high probability mode (YES), the MPU 92 makes the step S2707 In order to measure the time of step S2709 described later, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 is set. Specifically, a value corresponding to TW5 is set in the timer counter T with reference to the notification timing determination table (FIG. 51) stored in the ROM 93. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  In step S2706, when the type of special symbol is the special figure 1 and the mode is the low probability mode, and the type of the special symbol is the special figure 2 and the mode is not the high probability mode (NO), the MPU 92 makes the step S2708. In order to measure the time of step S2709 described later, the timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 is set. Specifically, with reference to the notification timing determination table (FIG. 51) stored in the ROM 93, the timer counter T is set to a value corresponding to the ending period TE. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  In step S2709, the MPU 92 determines whether the time set in step S2705, step S2707 or step S2708 has elapsed, that is, whether the value set in the timer counter T has become zero. If the time set in step S2705, step S2707 or step S2708 has not elapsed in step S2709 (NO), the MPU 92 ends the effect transfer process.

  If the time set in step S2705, step S2707 or step S2708 has passed in step S2709 (YES), the MPU 92 starts output of RUSH rush audio data in step S2710. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the RUSH rush audio data from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95 and the RUSH rush audio data is a speaker The sound output LSI 95 is controlled to be output from the unit 24. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the RUSH inrush sound from the speaker unit 24 is started.

  In step S 2711, the MPU 92 determines whether the output of the RUSH inrush audio data is completed. If the output of the RUSH inrush voice data is completed in step S 2711 (YES), in step S 2712, the MPU 92 starts the output of the right-handed navigation voice data for RUSH. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the voice data of the right-handed navigation for RUSH from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that data is output from the speaker unit 24. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the RUSH inrush sound from the speaker unit 24 is started. When the output of the RUSH inrush voice data is not completed in step S2711 (NO), the MPU 92 ends the effect transfer process.

  In the above description, in the pattern B of FIG. 49 (b), the ending period TE adds the notification time (voice output time) RUSH rush notification time TX and the notification time (voice output time) TY for RUSH right-handed navigation If it is shorter than the time (TE <(TX + TY)) and the notification time of RUSH rush (voice output time) is more than TX (TE TX TX), the voice output of "〇 RUSH rush" is at the start of the ending period Starting from T1 after the voice start time TW5, control is made to end the voice output of "〇 RUSH rush" simultaneously with or substantially simultaneously with the end time T2 of the ending period. However, the audio output of “〇 RUSH rush” may be started from the start time T1 of the ending period. Also, in this case, the voice output of “Please right-click” may be started at the same time or substantially at the same time as the voice output of “〇 RUSH rush”.

  Thus, in the pattern B of FIG. 49 (b), in the case where the voice output of “「 RUSH rush ”is controlled to be started from the start time T1 of the ending period, the timer counter T is selected in step S2607 of FIG. The value to be set to 0 may be set to 0, or if the ending period TE is at least the notification time TX of the RUSH rush in step S2606 of FIG. 50 (YES), the MPU 92 may perform the operation of step S2610. Good.

  Furthermore, in the pattern B of FIG. 49 (b), when the voice output of “音 声 RUSH rush” is controlled to start from the start time T1 of the ending period, the value of TW5 of the notification timing determination table shown in FIG. May be 0, or in step S2706 of FIG. 52, if the special symbol type is the special figure 1 and the mode is the low probability mode, or the special symbol type is the special figure 2 and the mode is the high probability mode (YES), the MPU 92 may perform the operation of step S2710.

  Further, in the above description, in the pattern C of FIG. 49 (c), the ending period TE adds the notification time (voice output time) TX of RUSH rush and the notification time (voice output time) TY of right-handed navigation for RUSH. In the case where it is shorter than the time (TE <(TX + TY)) and shorter than the notification time (voice output time) TX of RUSH inrush (TE <TX), notification of RUSH inrush from the speaker unit 24 (specifically " 〇 RUS RUSH rush 'voice output (play) and notification of right-handed navigation for RUSH (specifically, "Please hit right" voice output (play)) will be performed after T2 at the end of the ending period TE Is controlled. However, the audio output of “〇 RUSH rush” may be started from the start time T1 of the ending period. Also, in this case, the voice output of “Please right-click” may be started at the same time or substantially at the same time as the voice output of “〇 RUSH rush”.

  Thus, in the pattern C of FIG. 49C, in the case of controlling the voice output of “〇 RUSH rush” to be started from the start time T1 of the ending period, the timer counter T is selected in step S2608 of FIG. The value to be set to 0 may be set to 0, or if the ending period TE is not longer than the notification time TX of the RUSH rush at step S2606 in FIG. 50 (NO), the MPU 92 may perform the operation of step S2610. .

  Furthermore, in the pattern C of FIG. 49 (c), when the voice output of “出力 RUSH rush” is controlled to start from the start time T1 of the ending period, the value of TE in the notification timing determination table shown in FIG. May be 0, or at step S2706 in FIG. 52, if the special symbol type is the special figure 1 and the mode is the low probability mode and the special symbol type is the special figure 2 and the mode is not the high probability mode ( (NO), the MPU 92 may perform the operation of step S2710.

  Next, another example of transition processing to the fourth mode M4 (hereinafter, RUSH mode) of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 53, a transition process in the case where the ending period TE and the length of the intro portion of music (BGM) in the fourth mode M4 are different (hereinafter referred to as intro length TI) will be described. Hereinafter, another example of the transition process to the RUSH mode will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

<Migration process A>
First, a case where the ending period TE is longer than the intro length TI (a case where 10 sec is set as the ending period TE in the ending period setting process of FIG. 48) will be described with reference to FIG. 53 (a). In the transition process in this case, since the ending period TE is longer than the intro length TI, the output of the intro ends during the ending period TE. Therefore, the first special effect is executed from the end of the output of the intro to the end of the ending period TE. This first special effect causes, for example, an audio such as "Hajimeyo!" To be output from the speaker unit 24, and an image corresponding to this audio (for example, an image spoken by a character) to be displayed on the display screen G It is controlled, and an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation to shift to the RUSH mode and an uplifting feeling is executed.

  Specifically, it is controlled so that the output of the intro portion of the music used in the RUSH mode performance from the speaker unit 24 is started from the start time T1 of the ending period TE. In addition, it is controlled so that the A melody part following the intro part is continuously output after the end of the output of the intro part. In addition, the first special effect is executed from the end of output of the intro to the end of the ending period TE. In addition, at the end of the ending period T2, the RUSH right-handed navigation for controlling the right-handed game is controlled to start. That is, the right-handed navigation for RUSH is controlled to be started at the end of the ending period TE, in other words, at the start of the RUSH mode. In addition, at the end T2 of the ending period TE, control is performed so that an image effect of the effect is started.

  In addition, the volume of the right-handed navigation for RUSH is controlled to be reproduced smaller than usual. By making the volume of the right-handed navigation for RUSH smaller than normal when entering RUSH, it prevents the player from making "right-handed" voice for right-handed navigation for RUSH offensive to the player during RUSH entry, It is possible to prevent the player from being raised. In addition, control may be performed such that characters such as “Please strike right” are displayed on the display screen G at the end of the ending period T2 in order to suggest a right strike game. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "right strike", characters such as "Please strike right" may be controlled to be displayed on the display screen G. Further, in this transition process, control is performed so that the sound of “RUSH rush” is output from the speaker unit 24 after the output of the intro portion is finished. Further, in the example of FIG. 53 (a), RUSH rush notification is performed before right-handed navigation, but RUSH rush notification may be performed after right-handed navigation.

<Migration process B>
Next, the case where the ending period TE is shorter than the intro length TI (when 5 sec is set as the ending period TE in the ending period setting process of FIG. 48) will be described with reference to FIG. In the transition process in this case, since the ending period TE is shorter than the intro length TI, the intro is output even after the ending period TE ends. Therefore, the second special effect is executed from the end of the ending period TE to the end of the output of the intro. This second special effect displays the number of prize balls and logos acquired in the big hit game on the display screen G, and feels as if the ending period continues even though it is in the RUSH mode. An effect given to the player is executed. If the difference between the length of the ending period TE and the length of the intro TI is long (large), the number of prize balls and logos acquired in the big hit game may be displayed on the display screen G, or any character May be controlled to display the time adjustment.

  Specifically, control is performed such that the output of the intro portion of the music used in the effect of the fourth mode M4 from the speaker unit 24 is started from the start time T1 of the ending period TE. In addition, it is controlled so that the A melody part following the intro part is continuously output after the end of the output of the intro part. Further, the second special effect is executed from the end time T2 of the ending period TE to the end of the output of the intro. In addition, at the end of the ending period T2, the RUSH right-handed navigation for controlling the right-handed game is controlled to start. That is, the right-handed navigation for RUSH is controlled to be started at the end of the ending period TE, in other words, at the start of the RUSH mode. In addition, at the end T4 of the intro output, control is performed such that the video effect of the effect in the RUSH mode is started.

  In addition, the volume of the right-handed navigation for RUSH is controlled to be reproduced smaller than usual. By making the volume of the right-handed navigation for RUSH smaller than normal when entering RUSH, it prevents the player from making "right-handed" voice for right-handed navigation for RUSH offensive to the player during RUSH entry, It is possible to prevent the player from being upset. In addition, control may be performed such that characters such as “Please strike right” are displayed on the display screen G at the end of the ending period T2 in order to suggest a right strike game. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "right strike", characters such as "Please strike right" may be controlled to be displayed on the display screen G. Further, in this transition process, control is performed so that the sound of “RUSH rush” is output from the speaker unit 24 after the output of the intro portion is finished. Further, in the example of FIG. 53 (b), RUSH rush notification is performed after right-handed navigation, but RUSH rush notification may be performed before right-handed navigation.

<Migration process C>
Next, referring to FIG. 53 (c), the case where the ending period TE is much shorter than the intro length TI (when 2 sec is set as the ending period TE in the ending period setting process of FIG. 48) will be described. . In the transition processing in this case, since the ending period TE is much shorter than the intro length TI, the ending period TE ends with little output of the intro portion during the ending period TE. For this reason, in the case shown in FIG. 53C, the output of the intro is started after the ending period TE ends. Also, after the output of the intro is finished, it is controlled so that the A melody part following the intro part is continuously output.

  Specifically, it is controlled such that the output of the intro portion of the music used in the RUSH mode performance from the speaker unit 24 is started from the end T2 of the ending period TE. In addition, it is controlled so that the A melody part following the intro part is continuously output after the end of the output of the intro part. In addition, at the end of the ending period T2, the RUSH right-handed navigation for controlling the right-handed game is controlled to start. That is, the right-handed navigation for RUSH is controlled to be started at the end of the ending period TE, in other words, at the start of the RUSH mode. In addition, at the end T2 of the ending period TE, control is performed so that the image effect of the effect of the RUSH mode is started.

  In addition, the volume of the right-handed navigation for RUSH is controlled to be reproduced smaller than usual. By making the volume of the right-handed navigation for RUSH smaller than normal when entering RUSH, it prevents the player from making "right-handed" voice for right-handed navigation for RUSH offensive to the player during RUSH entry, It is possible to prevent the player from being upset. In addition, control may be performed such that characters such as “Please strike right” are displayed on the display screen G at the end of the ending period T2 in order to suggest a right strike game. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "right strike", characters such as "Please strike right" may be controlled to be displayed on the display screen G. Further, in this transition process, control is performed so that the sound of “RUSH rush” is output from the speaker unit 24 after the output of the intro portion is finished.

  When the ending period TE is much shorter than the intro length TI (when 2 sec is set as the ending period TE in the ending period setting process of FIG. 48), the output of the intro portion is as shown in FIG. It may be controlled so that the output of the A melody part of the music used in the rendering of the RUSH mode from the speaker unit 24 is started from the end T2 of the ending period TE without performing the. Further, in the examples of FIGS. 53 (c) and 53 (d), the RUSH rush notification is performed after the right-handed navigation, but the RUSH rush notification may be performed before the right-handed navigation.

<Effect transition process>
Next, the transition processing to the RUSH mode described with reference to FIG. 53 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 54 to 57. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing to the RUSH mode. Here, the operation of the sound emission control device 90 of the transition processing to the RUSH mode described with reference to FIG. 54 will be described.

  In step S2801, the MPU 92 determines whether an ending command has been received. In the determination, the MPU 92 confirms whether an ending command is stored in the various flag storage areas. If it is determined in step S2801 that the MPU 92 has received the ending command (YES), the MPU 92 determines in step S2802 whether the type and mode of the special symbol of the jackpot game is the high probability mode or the low probability mode. get. Specifically, the MPU 92 acquires, based on the type command received from the main control device 60, whether the type and mode of the special symbol is the high probability mode or the low probability mode. Further, in step S2801, when the MPU 92 does not determine that the ending command has been received (NO), the effect transfer process is ended.

  In step S2803, the MPU 92 determines whether the type of special symbol for the jackpot game is the special view 1 and the mode is the high probability mode. If the special symbol type is the special figure 1 and the mode is the high probability mode in step S2803 (YES), the MPU 92 performs the transition process A (step S2804) described with reference to FIG. If the ending period TE is longer than the intro length TI). The details of the migration process A will be described later.

  In step S2803, when the type of special symbol of the jackpot game is special figure 1 and the mode is not the high probability mode (NO), in step S2805, the type of special symbol is special figure 1 and the mode is low in step S2805. It is determined whether the mode is the probability mode or the type of the special symbol is the special figure 2 and the mode is the high probability mode. In step S2805, when the type of special symbol is the special figure 1 and the mode is the low probability mode or the type of the special symbol is the special figure 2 and the mode is the high probability mode (YES), the MPU 92 makes the step S2806 Then, the transition process B (when the ending period TE is shorter than the intro length TI) described with reference to FIG. 53 (b) is executed. The details of the migration process B will be described later.

  When the type of special symbol of the jackpot game is special figure 1 and the mode is not the high probability mode in step S2805 (NO), MPU 92 refers to FIG. 53 (c) and FIG. 53 (d) in step S2807. The transition process C described above (when the ending period TE is much shorter than the intro length TI) is executed. The details of the migration process C will be described later.

<Migration process A>
Next, the transition process A of step S2804 in FIG. 54 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the migration process A.
In step S2901, the MPU 92 sets timer counters T1 and T2 provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 to measure the time of steps S2903 and S2905 described later. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a value corresponding to the ending period TE (10 sec) in the timer counter T1 as a measurement time, and sets a value corresponding to the intro length TI in the timer counter T2 as a measurement time. For example, if the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec, the MPU 92 sets "5000" to the timer counter T1, and if the intro length TI is 7 sec, the MPU 92 sets "3500" to the timer counter T2. . The values set in the timer counters T1 and T2 are updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  In step S2902, the MPU 92 starts output of music (BGM) for effect in RUSH mode. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the music data for RUSH mode effect from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled to be output from the unit 24. Thus, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data from the speaker unit 24 is started. In addition, the MPU 92 starts displaying the effect image for the ending period. Specifically, the MPU 92 transmits a command to the display control apparatus 100 so that the presentation image for the ending period is displayed on the display screen G. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 performs control so that the rendering image for the ending period is displayed on the display screen G based on the command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  In step S2903, the MPU 92 determines whether the output of the intro portion of the BGM has ended based on whether the value of the timer counter T2 set in step S2901 is zero. If the MPU 92 determines that the output of the intro part has not ended (NO), the migration processing A is ended without executing the processing of step S2904 and subsequent steps. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the output of the intro part is finished (YES), the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S2904 and subsequent steps.

  In step S2904, the MPU 92 starts the first special effect. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the voice of "end!" From the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and "starts!" The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the voice of the speaker unit 24 is output from the speaker unit 24. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice of "Hajimeyo!" Is started from the speaker unit 24. Further, the MPU 92 controls the display screen G to display an image (for example, an image spoken by a character) corresponding to the sound. Specifically, the MPU 92 transmits a first special effect start command to the display control apparatus 100 so that an image corresponding to the sound is displayed on the display screen G. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 performs control such that a video corresponding to the audio is displayed on the display screen G based on the first special effect start command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  Further, in step S2904, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the voice of "RUSH rush" for RUSH rush following from the voice of "Hajime yo!" From the ROM 93 and the ROM 96 for common, and sounds It is set in the register 952 of the output LSI 95, and the sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the voice of “RUSH rush” is output from the speaker unit 24. Thereby, the output (reproduction) of the sound of “RUSH rush” from the speaker unit 24 is started. In addition, it may be made to display on the display screen in a text "Hajimeyo!", And output the voice of "RUSH plunging" from the speaker part 24, or output the voice of "Hajime yo!" From the speaker part 24. The characters “RUSH rush” may be displayed on the display screen G.

  In step S2905, the MPU 92 determines whether the ending period TE has ended based on whether the value of the timer counter T1 set in step S2901 is zero. If the MPU 92 determines that the ending period TE has not ended (NO), the migration processing A is ended without executing the processing of step S2906 and subsequent steps. If the MPU 92 determines that the ending period TE has ended (YES), the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S2906 and thereafter. In step S2906, the MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 to end the first special effect. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the sound such as "Starting!" From the speaker unit 24 is stopped. Further, the MPU 92 transmits a first special effect stop command to the display control device 100. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 controls the display of the video corresponding to the audio on the display screen G to be stopped based on the first special effect stop command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  In step S2907, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the sound data "Please hit right" for RUSH right-handed navigation from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 to the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the sound data “Please hit right” is output from the speaker unit 24. As a result, the output (playback) of the audio data "Please hit right" is started from the speaker unit 24, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started.

  In step S2908, the MPU 92 instructs the display control apparatus 100 to start video effects for RUSH effect. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 to read out and reproduce the RUSH effect video data stored in the effect data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out the video data for RUSH effect from the effect data storage area 1032 and controls the VDP 105 to display it on the display screen G.

  In addition, the structure which measures time of step S2903 and step S2905 is arbitrary, for example, you may measure using a real time clock (RTC).

<Migration process B>
Next, the transition process B of step S2806 in FIG. 54 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the migration process B.
In step S3001, the MPU 92 sets timer counters T1 and T2 provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 to measure the time of steps S3003 and S3005 described later. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a value corresponding to the ending period TE (5 sec) in the timer counter T1 as a measurement time, and sets a value corresponding to the intro length TI in the timer counter T2 as a measurement time. For example, if the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec, the MPU 92 sets "2500" to the timer counter T1, and if the intro length TI is 7 sec, the MPU 92 sets "3500" to the timer counter T2. . The values set in the timer counters T1 and T2 are updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  In step S3002, the MPU 92 starts output of music (BGM) for effect in the RUSH mode. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the music data for RUSH mode effect from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled to be output from the unit 24. Thus, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data from the speaker unit 24 is started. In addition, the MPU 92 starts displaying the effect image for the ending period. Specifically, the MPU 92 transmits a command to the display control apparatus 100 so that the presentation image for the ending period is displayed on the display screen G. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 performs control so that the rendering image for the ending period is displayed on the display screen G based on the command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  In step S3003, the MPU 92 determines whether the ending period TE has ended based on whether the value of the timer counter T1 set in step S3001 is zero. When the MPU 92 determines that the ending period TE has not ended (NO), the migration processing B ends without executing the processing of step S3004 and subsequent steps. When the MPU 92 determines that the ending period TE has ended (YES), the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S3004 and subsequent steps. In step S3004, the MPU 92 starts a second special effect. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the display control apparatus 100 to display on the display screen G a character image (for example, a logo-ized Arabic numeral) corresponding to the number of winning balls obtained in the big hit game. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display a character image corresponding to the number of winning balls on the display screen G based on an instruction from the MPU 92.

  In step S3005, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the sound data "Please hit right" for RUSH right-handed navigation from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and register them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the sound data “Please hit right” is output from the speaker unit 24. As a result, the output (playback) of the audio data "Please hit right" is started from the speaker unit 24, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started.

In step S3006, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the output of the intro portion of the BGM has ended based on whether the value of the timer counter T2 set in step S3001 is zero. If the MPU 92 determines that the output of the intro part is not completed (NO), the migration processing B is ended without executing the processing of step S3007 and subsequent steps. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the output of the intro part is finished (YES), the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S3007 and subsequent steps.
In step S3007, the MPU 92 instructs the display control apparatus 100 to stop the second special effect. Specifically, the MPU 92 transmits a second special effect stop command to the display control device 100. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 controls the display screen G to stop displaying the character image corresponding to the winning ball number acquired in the big hit game based on the second special effect stop command transmitted from the MPU 92. I do.

  In step S3008, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the voice of "RUSH rush" for RUSH rush from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the voice of “” is output from the speaker unit 24. Thereby, the output (reproduction) of the sound of “RUSH rush” from the speaker unit 24 is started. In addition to displaying “RUSH rush” in text on the display screen, a sound of “RUSH rush” may be output from the speaker unit 24.

  In step S3009, the MPU 92 instructs the display control apparatus 100 to start an image effect for RUSH effect. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 to read out and reproduce the RUSH effect video data stored in the effect data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out the video data for RUSH effect from the effect data storage area 1032 and controls the VDP 105 to display it on the display screen G.

  In addition, the structure which measures time of step S3003 and step S3006 is arbitrary, for example, you may measure using a real time clock (RTC).

<Migration process C>
Next, the transition process C of step S2807 in FIG. 54 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the migration process C.
In step S3101, the MPU 92 sets a timer counter T1 provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 to measure the time of step S3102 described later. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a value corresponding to the ending period TE (2 sec) in the timer counter T1 as a measurement time. For example, when the cycle of the timer interrupt process is 2 msec, the MPU 92 sets “1000” to the timer counter T1. The value set in the timer counter T1 is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  In step S3102, the MPU 92 determines whether the ending period TE has ended based on whether the value of the timer counter T1 set in step S3101 is zero. If the MPU 92 determines that the ending period TE has not ended (NO), the migration processing B is ended without executing the processing of step S3103 and subsequent steps. If the MPU 92 determines that the ending period TE has ended (YES), the MPU 92 executes the process of step S3103 and subsequent steps.

  In step S3103, the MPU 92 starts output of music (BGM) for effect in RUSH mode. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the music data for RUSH mode effect from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled to be output from the unit 24. Thus, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data from the speaker unit 24 is started. In addition, the MPU 92 starts displaying the RUSH mode effect video. Specifically, the MPU 92 transmits a command to the display control apparatus 100 so that a presentation image for RUSH mode is displayed on the display screen G. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 performs control such that a rendering image for RUSH mode is displayed on the display screen G based on a command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  In step S3104, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the sound data "Please hit right" for RUSH right-handed navigation from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, and outputs them to the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the sound data “Please hit right” is output from the speaker unit 24. As a result, the output (playback) of the audio data "Please hit right" is started from the speaker unit 24, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started.

  In addition, the structure which measures time of step S3102 is arbitrary, for example, you may measure using a real time clock (RTC).

According to such this embodiment, the following operations and effects can be achieved.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is a transition means (MPU 62) for shifting the gaming state from the big hit game (first game state) to the RUSH mode (second game state), and RUSH mode (second game state) ) The notification (the first notification) of RUSH rush that enables the player to recognize) is different depending on the type of jackpot game, specifically, whether the type and mode of the special symbol is the high probability mode or the low probability mode The notification control means (MPU 92, the speaker part 24) performed at a timing is provided. In pachinko machines, the ending period may differ depending on the type of jackpot, specifically the type of the special figure and the mode and mode of the special drawing, but in such a case, the ending period If the first notification is performed without considering the length of the first notification, the first notification is given across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or after entering the RUSH mode (slightly later) There is a possibility that the first notification may be notified at a timing when there is a sense of incompatibility, such as However, since the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment performs notification (first notification) of RUSH rush at different timings according to the type of the big hit game (first game state), the player does not feel discomfort. The notification (first notification) of RUSH rush can be performed, and the interest is improved.

(2) The notification control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment notifies of RUSH rush (first notification) according to the length of the ending period of the big hit game (first game state) At different times. Therefore, notification of the RUSH rush (first notification) is performed without considering the length of the ending period, and the first notification is performed across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or the RUSH mode is entered. It is possible to suppress that the first notification is performed at a timing when there is a sense of discomfort, such as the first notification being performed later (with a slight delay).

(3) In the notification control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the length of the ending period of the big hit game (the first game state) is required for the notification (the first notification) of RUSH rush. The notification (first notification) of the RUSH rush is performed at different timings depending on whether it is shorter than the time. Therefore, notification of the RUSH rush (first notification) is performed without considering the length of the ending period, and the first notification is performed across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or the RUSH mode is entered. It is possible to prevent the first notification from being notified at a timing when there is a sense of incongruity, such as the first notification being performed later (with a slight delay).

Fifth Embodiment
In the first to fourth embodiments described above, the embodiment has been described in which the type (type) of the effect in the RUSH mode is selected during the round of the big hit game. In the fifth embodiment, an embodiment will be described in which the type (type) of effects in the fourth mode M4 (hereinafter, RUSH mode) is selected during the ending period of the jackpot game. Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described, but the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to fourth embodiments will be assigned the same reference numerals and overlapping descriptions will be omitted.

  FIG. 58 is a schematic view showing the timing of the effect type selection process of the fifth embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 58, the timing of the effect type selection process corresponding to 1st-4th embodiment and the timing of the effect type selection process corresponding to 5th Embodiment are demonstrated for contrast. FIG. 58 (a) is a diagram showing a flow in the case of executing selection effect during the round game of the first to fourth embodiments. FIG. 58 (b) is a diagram showing a flow in the case of executing selection effect during the ending period of the fifth embodiment. In FIG. 58, “OP” indicates an opening, “ED” indicates an ending, and “R” indicates a round.

  First, with reference to FIG. 58A, the flow of effects in the jackpot game when the selection effect is executed during the round game will be described. In the sound emission control device 90, the opening effect is started with the start of the big hit game (time t10). Next, when the opening time ends, in the sound emission control device 90, the opening effect is ended, the round game is started, and the round effect is started (time t11). Thereafter, when the round game has been performed a predetermined number of times (for example, three times), the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect type selection process as a round effect (time t12).

  In addition, in the sound emission control device 90, when the effect type selection process is executed as a round game, the selection effect is executed in the same display manner as when the effect type selection process is executed as an ending effect. After that, when all the round games end, the sound emission control device 90 ends the round effect and starts the ending effect (time t13). Thereafter, when the ending period ends, in the sound emission control device 90, the ending effect is ended and the jackpot game is ended (at time t14). Then, after the end of the jackpot game, the selected effect mode (for example, effect MB) is set, and the sound emission control device 90 displays a background image corresponding to the effect MB.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58 (b), the flow of effects during the jackpot game when the selection effect is executed during the ending period will be described. In the sound emission control device 90, the opening effect is started at the start of the jackpot game (time t20). Next, when the opening time ends, in the sound emission control device 90, the opening effect is ended and the round game is started, and the round effect is started (time t21).

  Thereafter, when all rounds (for example, 15 times) of round games are finished, in the sound emission control device 90, the round effect is ended and the ending effect is started (time t22). At this time, in the sound emission control device 90, a selection effect is executed as an ending effect. Specifically, in the sound emission control device 90, operation images corresponding to the effects MA to MC in the RUSH mode are displayed. Further, in the sound emission control device 90, the information corresponding to the currently selected effect MB is displayed larger than the information corresponding to the effects MA and MC different from the currently selected effect MB.

  Further, when the operation button 28 is operated during execution of the selection effect and the selected effect is changed, in the sound emission control device 90, the information corresponding to the newly selected effect MA is not selected. The information is displayed larger than the information corresponding to the effects MB and MC (at time t23). Thereafter, when the ending period ends, in the sound emission control device 90, the ending effect (selection effect) is ended, and the jackpot game is ended (at time t24). Then, after the end of the jackpot game, the selected effect mode (here, the effect MA) is set, and the sound emission control device 90 displays a background image corresponding to the effect MA.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect type selection processing of the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, the effect type selection process is executed during the ending period. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 executes the effect type selection process after receiving the ending command in step S1414 of FIG. 25 is the effect determination process of the first to fourth embodiments. It is different from In this effect type selection process, as shown in FIG. 59, the MPU 92 executes steps S3201 to S3213 to cause the player to select an effect type to be executed in the RUSH mode. Hereinafter, the effect type selection process of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S3201, the MPU 92 determines whether the game result is the "most advantageous result" based on the content of the received type command. If the MPU 92 determines in step S3201 that the game result is not the “most favorable result” (NO), the effect type selection process is ended.

  If the MPU 92 determines that the game result is "the most advantageous result" at step S3201 (YES), whether or not the ending command has been received at step S3202 (the flag of the ending command is stored in various flag areas of the RAM 94) To determine if it is If the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has not been received in step S3202 (NO), the effect type selection process is ended.

  In step S3202, when the MPU 92 determines that the ending command is received (YES), in step S3203, the timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 measures the ending period TE in the ending period TE. Set the corresponding value. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  In step S3204, the MPU 92 controls the display control apparatus 100 to start an effect for selecting an effect type. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 based on an instruction from the MPU 92 to display an image of effect for effect type selection, specifically, an image shown in FIG. Display on

  In step S3205, the MPU 92 receives the player's selection of the effect type modes MA, MB, and MC by the operation button 28. The player depresses the left direction button 282 and / or the right direction button 283 of the operation button 28 to select an image corresponding to the desired effect MA to MC from the images GA to GC displayed on the display screen G. . In step S3205, when the player operates the operation button 28 to select the image GA, the MPU 92 controls the display control apparatus 100 to display the selected image GA larger than the other images GB and GC. Do. In the display control apparatus 100, based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 controls the VDP 105 to display the selected image GA larger than the other images GB and GC.

  Further, when the player operates the operation button 28 to select the image GB, the MPU 92 controls the display control apparatus 100 to display the selected image GB larger than the other images GA and GC. In the display control apparatus 100, based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 controls the VDP 105 to display the selected image GB larger than the other images GA and GC. Further, when the player operates the operation button 28 to select the image GC, the MPU 92 controls the display control apparatus 100 to display the selected image GC larger than the other images GA and GB. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display the selected image GC larger than the other images GA and GB based on an instruction from the MPU 92.

  In step S3206, the MPU 92 determines whether the player has operated the operation button 28 to determine the effect, that is, whether the pressing operation of the determination button 281 has been received. If it is determined in step S3206 that the pressing operation of the determination button 281 has been received (YES), the MPU 92 sets an effect corresponding to the selected image as an effect of the RUSH mode in step S3207. That is, in step S3206, when the determination operation is accepted with the image GA selected, in step S3207, the MPU 92 sets the effect MA as the effect of the RUSH mode to shift after the first mode M1. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a flag of effect MA as an effect of the RUSH mode in various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 94.

  In step S3206, when the determination operation is accepted in a state where the image GB is selected, in step S3207, the MPU 92 sets the effect MB as the effect in the RUSH mode to shift after the first mode M1. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a flag of the effect MB as an effect of the RUSH mode in various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 94. Further, in step S3206, when the determination operation is received in a state where the image GC is selected, in step S3207, the MPU 92 sets the effect MC as the effect in the RUSH mode to shift after the first mode M1. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a flag of effect MC as an effect of the RUSH mode in various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 94.

  In step S3208, the MPU 92 determines whether the ending period TE set in step S3203 has elapsed based on the value of the timer counter. If it is determined in step S3208 that the ending period TE has elapsed (YES), the MPU 92 ends the effect type selection process. If it is determined in step S3208 that the ending period TE has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 92 instructs the player to notify the player of cancellation of the determined effect in step S3209. .

  Specifically, the MPU 92 controls the display control apparatus 100 to display a character image for confirming whether to cancel the determined effect such as “Do you want to cancel the effect?” On the display screen G. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 based on an instruction from the MPU 92 to display a character image such as “Do you want to cancel the effect?” On the display screen G. Further, the MPU 92 controls so that the voice of “cancel production?” Is output from the speaker unit 24. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the voice of "Do you want to cancel the effect?" Stored in the common ROM 96 of the ROM 93, and outputs it to the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the sound of “Do you want to cancel the effect?” Is output from the speaker unit 24.

  In step S3210, the MPU 92 determines whether the effect determined in step S3206 has been cancelled. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether the effect has been canceled based on the operation of the operation button 28 by the player. If it is determined in step S3210 that the effect has been canceled (YES), the MPU 92 returns to the operation of step S3205. When it is determined in step S3210 that the effect is not canceled (NO), the MPU 92 ends the effect type selection effect process.

  When it is determined in step S3206 that the pressing operation of the determination button 281 has not been received (NO), the MPU 92 causes the timer counter to determine whether the ending period set in step S3203 has ended in step S3211. Based on the value of. If it is determined in step S3211 that the ending period has ended (YES), the MPU 92 sets an effect (for example, effect MA) determined in advance by initial setting as an effect in the RUSH mode in step S3212. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a flag of effect MA as an effect of the RUSH mode in various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 94. If it is determined in step S3211 that the ending period has ended (YES), an effect corresponding to the image currently selected on the display screen G may be automatically determined as an effect in the RUSH mode. When the MPU 92 sets the effect in step S3213, the effect processing for effect type selection ends.

  If it is determined in step S3211 that the ending period has not ended (NO), the MPU 92 instructs in step S3213 to notify the player to select / determine an effect. Specifically, the MPU 92 causes the display control device 100 to display a character image prompting selection and determination of effects such as “Determine the effect!” And “Determine the effect!” On the display screen G. Control. In the display control apparatus 100, the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 controls the VDP 105 based on the instruction from the MPU 92 to display "Determine the effect!", "Determine the effect!" Display a text image prompting to select or make Further, the MPU 92 controls so that sounds such as “Determine the effect!” And “Determine the effect!” Are output from the speaker unit 24. Specifically, the MPU 92 stores sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to voices such as "Determine the effect!" And "Determine the effect!" Stored in the common ROM 96 of the ROM 93. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled to read out and set in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95 and to output a sound such as “Determine the effect!” And “Determine the effect!” From the speaker unit 24.

  FIG. 60 is a diagram for describing notification timings of RUSH rush and right-handed navigation for RUSH according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 60, in the fifth embodiment, since the staging of RUSH is determined during the ending period of the jackpot game, the pachinko machine 10 RUSH rushes and RUSH according to the remaining time of the ending period after the staging is determined. Change the notification timing of right-handed game suggestion at the time of right-handed navigation (RUSH mode) transition. Hereinafter, the transition process to the RUSH mode will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  In the fifth embodiment, since the RUSH mode is selected and determined during the ending period, the RUSH mode is not determined at the beginning of the ending period, and the RUSH mode music is output from the beginning of the ending period ( Can not play). For this reason, in the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 (a) to (c), output (reproduction) of music (BGM) in RUSH mode is started from time T3 when the effect in RUSH mode is determined. To be controlled.

<Pattern A>
First, referring to FIG. 60 (a), the remaining time TR of the ending period TE (hereinafter also referred to as remaining time TR) after the determination of the RUSH mode effect is the notification time (voice output time) TX of the RUSH rush. The case where it is more than the time (TR> = (TX + TY)) which added and the alerting time (voice output time) TY of right-handed navigation for RUSH and is explained.

As shown in FIG. 60 (a), when the remaining time TR is equal to or more than the time obtained by adding the notification time TX of RUSH rush and the notification time TY of right-handed navigation for RUSH, the notification of RUSH rush from the speaker unit 24 (Specifically, sound output (playback) of “〇 RUSH rush”) and notification time of right-handed navigation for RUSH from the speaker unit 24 (specifically, sound output of “Please hit right” (playback) ) Is controlled to be performed within the remaining time TR.
More specifically, the audio output of "〇 RUSH rush" is from the time of decision T3 of the effect from the remaining time TR to the notification time of RUSH rush (voice output time) TX and the notification time of the right-handed navigation for RUSH (voice The output time is started after the time (TR-(TX + TY)) after subtraction of TY, and the voice output of "Please hit right" is started after the notification of the RUSH rush.

<Pattern B>
Next, referring to FIG. 60 (b), the remaining time TR of the ending period TE after the determination of the RUSH mode effect is the notification time of the RUSH rush (voice output time) TX and the notification time of the right-handed navigation for RUSH A case where the time obtained by adding (voice output time) TY is shorter (TR <(TX + TY)) and the notification time of RUSH inrush (voice output time) TX or more (TR ≧ TX) will be described. As shown in FIG. 60 (b), the remaining time TR is shorter than the sum of the notification time TX of RUSH rush and the notification time TY of right-handed navigation for RUSH, and is more than the notification time TX of RUSH rush , Notification of RUSH rush from speaker unit 24 (specifically, audio output (reproduction) of “) RUSH rush”) is performed within the remaining time TR, and notification of right-handed navigation for RUSH (specifically, “ It is controlled such that the audio output of the "Please strike right" audio output (playback) is performed after the end of the ending period.

  More specifically, the audio output of “〇 RUSH rush” is the elapsed time (TR−TX) obtained by subtracting the notification time (voice output time) TX of RUSH rush from the remaining time TR from the decision time T3 of the rendition It will be started later, and the voice output of "Please hit right" will be started subsequently.

<Pattern C>
Next, referring to FIG. 60 (c), when the remaining time TR of the ending period TE after the determination of the RUSH mode effect is shorter than the notification time (voice output time) TX of the RUSH rush (TR <TX) Will be explained. As shown in FIG. 60 (c), when the remaining time TR of the ending period TE is shorter than the notification time TX of RUSH inrush, notification of RUSH inrush from the speaker unit 24 (specifically, "〇 RUSH inrush") Audio output (playback) is controlled to be performed after T2 at the end of the ending period TE.

  More specifically, the audio output of “〇 RUSH rush” is started after the remaining time TR has elapsed from the determination time T3 of the effect. Further, in the case shown in FIG. 60 (c), right-handed navigation for RUSH by video is started from the end time T2 of the ending period TE. If you start voice output of "Please hit right" after voice output of "〇 RUSH rush", then right-handed navigation for RUSH has not been started even though you have already entered RUSH mode This is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, when you enter the RUSH mode and output the voice of "Please hit right", the audio will overlap with the "RUSH rush". For this reason, in the example shown in FIG. 60 (c), without outputting the voice of "Please strike right", right-handed navigation by RUSH is started by the video from the end T2 of the ending period TE, " Please start voice output after "音 声 RUSH rush" voice output.

  In the fifth embodiment, since the RUSH mode is selected and determined during the ending period, the RUSH mode is not determined at the beginning of the ending period, and the RUSH mode music is output from the beginning of the ending period ( Can not play). For this reason, in the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60 (c), the output (reproduction) of music (BGM) in RUSH mode is controlled to be started from the time when the rendering in RUSH mode is determined. .

  FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing to the RUSH mode of the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, the transition process to the RUSH mode of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In this effect transfer process, as shown in FIG. 61, the MPU 92 executes steps S3301 to S3315. In the fifth embodiment, since the RUSH mode is selected and determined during the ending period, the RUSH mode is not determined at the beginning of the ending period, and the RUSH mode music is output from the beginning of the ending period ( Can not play). For this reason, in the fifth embodiment, output (reproduction) of music (BGM) in the RUSH mode is started from the time point when the rendering in the RUSH mode is determined.

  In step S3301, the MPU 92 determines whether an ending command has been received. In the determination, the MPU 92 confirms whether an ending command is stored in the various flag storage areas. If it is determined in step S3301 that the ending command has been received (YES), the MPU 92 acquires the ending period TE in step S3302. Here, acquisition of the ending period TE may be made possible by including information on the length (sec) of the ending period TE in the ending command transmitted from the main control device 60, or the ending period TE The time may be stored in advance in the ROM 93 of the sound emission control device 90 and acquired.

  Next, in step S3303, the MPU 92 starts a timer to calculate the remaining time TR in step S3306 described later. Further, in step S3301, when the MPU 92 does not determine that the ending command has been received (NO), the effect transfer process is ended.

  Next, in step S3304, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the type (class) of effects in the RUSH mode to be shifted after the jackpot game is determined. In step S3304, when the type (type) of the RUSH mode effect to be shifted after the big hit game is determined (YES), in step S3305, the MPU 92 outputs the RUSH mode music (BGM) to be transferred after the big hit game. Start. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the music data (BGM) corresponding to the determined effects MA to MC from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and outputs them to the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that music data is output from the speaker unit 24. Thereby, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the RUSH mode music corresponding to the effect determined from the speaker unit 24 is started.

  More specifically, when the effect MA is determined, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the music data (BGM) corresponding to the effect MA from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and outputs the sound It is set in the register 952 of the LSI 95, and the sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that music data is output from the speaker unit 24. Further, when the effect MB is determined, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the music data (BGM) corresponding to the effect MB from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and registers 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the music data is output from the speaker unit 24. Furthermore, when the effect MC is determined, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the music data (BGM) corresponding to the effect MC from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and registers 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the music data is output from the speaker unit 24.

  Next, in step S3306, the MPU 92 calculates the remaining time TR of the ending period TE (hereinafter, also referred to as the remaining time TR). Specifically, the MPU 92 stops the timer started in step S3303 and calculates the time (hereinafter also referred to as measurement time) started in step S3303 and stopped in step S3306. Next, the MPU 92 subtracts the measurement time from the ending period TE to calculate the remaining time TR of the ending period TE. Further, in step S3304, when it is not determined that the type of the effect in the RUSH mode to be shifted after the big hit game is determined (NO), the MPU 92 ends the effect transfer process.

  In step S3307, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the remaining time TR is equal to or greater than the time obtained by adding the notification time TX of the RUSH rush and the notification time TY of the RUSH right-handed navigation (TR ≧ (TX + TY)). If it is determined in step S3307 that the remaining time TR is equal to or longer than the sum of the notification time TX for RUSH rush and the notification time TY for RUSH right-handed navigation (YES), the MPU 92 performs step S3308 to be described later. In order to measure the time of S3312, the timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 is set. Specifically, a value corresponding to a time (TR− (TX + TY)) obtained by subtracting the notification time of the RUSH rush (voice output time) TX and the notification time of the right-handed navigation for RUSH (voice output time) TY from the remaining time TR. Is set to the timer counter T. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  If the remaining time TR is shorter than the sum of the notification time TX of the RUSH rush and the notification time TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH in step S3307 (NO), the MPU 92 determines the remaining time TR in step S3309. It is determined whether or not RUSH rush notification time TX or more (TE ≧ TX). If it is determined in step S3309 that the remaining time TR is equal to or longer than the notification time TX of RUSH rush (YES), the MPU 92 is provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 in step S3310 to measure the time of step S3312 described later. The timer counter T is set. Specifically, a value corresponding to the time (TR-TX) obtained by subtracting the notification time (voice output time) TX of the RUSH rush from the remaining time TR is set in the timer counter T. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  If the remaining time TR is shorter than the notification time TX of the RUSH rush in step S3309 (NO), the MPU 92 is provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 in step S3311 to measure the time of step S3312 described later. The timer counter T is set. Specifically, a value corresponding to the remaining time TR is set in the timer counter T. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  In step S3312, the MPU 92 determines whether the time set in step S3308, step S3310 or step S3311 has elapsed, that is, whether the value set in the timer counter T has become zero. In step S3312, when the time set in step S3308, step S3310 or step S3311 has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 92 ends the effect transfer process.

  If, in step S3312, the time set in step S3308, step S3310 or step S3311 has elapsed (YES), in step S3313, the MPU 92 starts output of RUSH rush audio data. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the RUSH rush audio data from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95 and the RUSH rush audio data is a speaker The sound output LSI 95 is controlled to be output from the unit 24. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the RUSH inrush sound from the speaker unit 24 is started.

  In step S3314, the MPU 92 determines whether the output of the RUSH inrush audio data has ended. If the output of the RUSH inrush voice data is completed in step S3314 (YES), the MPU 92 starts the output of the right-handed navigation voice data for RUSH in step S3315. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the voice data of the right-handed navigation for RUSH from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that data is output from the speaker unit 24. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the RUSH inrush sound from the speaker unit 24 is started. When the output of the RUSH rush voice data is not completed in step S3314 (NO), the MPU 92 ends the effect transfer process.

  In the above description, in the pattern B of FIG. 60 (b), the remaining time TR of the ending period TE is the notification time of the RUSH rush (voice output time) TX and the notification time of the right-handed navigation for RUSH (voice output time) If it is shorter than the time added with TY (TE <(TX + TY)) and the notification time of RUSH rush (voice output time) is more than TX (TE TX TX), the voice output of "〇 RUSH rush" is It is controlled to start after the time (TR-TX) obtained by subtracting the notification time (voice output time) TX of the RUSH inrush from the remaining time TR from the determination time T3 of the effect. However, the audio output of “〇 RUSH rush” may be started from the decision T3 of the effect. Also in this case, the voice output of “Please right-click” may be started at the same time or substantially at the same time as the voice output of “H RUSH rush”.

  Thus, in the pattern B of FIG. 60 (b), in the case of controlling so that the voice output of “〇 RUSH rush” is started from the determination time T3 of the effect, the timer counter T is selected in step S3310 of FIG. The value to be set may be 0, or if the remaining time TR of the ending period TE is equal to or more than the notification time TX of the RUSH rush in step S3309 of FIG. 61 (YES), the MPU 92 performs the operation of step S3313. You may

  Further, in the above description, in the pattern C of FIG. 60C, the remaining time TR of the ending period TE is the notification time of the RUSH rush (voice output time) TX and the notification time of the right-handed navigation for RUSH (voice output time) Notification of RUSH inrush from the speaker unit 24 (specifically, in the case where it is shorter than the time obtained by adding TY and (TE <(TX + TY)) and informing time of RUSH inrush (audio output time) TX (TE <TX) Specifically, control is performed such that the audio output (playback) of “〇 RUSH rush” is performed after T2 at the end of the ending period TE. However, the audio output of “〇 RUSH rush” may be started from the decision T3 of the effect. Also, in this case, the voice output of “Please right-click” may be started at the same time or substantially at the same time as the voice output of “〇 RUSH rush”.

  Thus, in the pattern C of FIG. 60 (c), in the case of controlling so that the voice output of “〇 RUSH rush” is started from time T3 of effect determination, in step S3311 of FIG. If the remaining time TR of the ending period TE is not longer than the notification time TX of the RUSH rush in step S3309 of FIG. 61 (NO), the MPU 92 performs the operation of step S3313. You may

According to such this embodiment, the following operations and effects can be achieved.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is a transition means (MPU 62) for transitioning the gaming state to the RUSH mode (second gaming state) to shift after the big hit game from the big hit game (first game state), and RUSH mode Notification control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) for notifying (the first notification) of RUSH rush that enables the player to recognize the player and an operation for accepting the determination of the effect type of the RUSH mode (second gaming state) A means (operation button 28) is provided, and the notification control means performs notification (first notification) of RUSH rush at different timings according to the timing when the effect type of the RUSH mode (second gaming state) is determined. .

  There is a pachinko machine that performs selection of the RUSH mode effect type that shifts after the big hit game during the big hit game ending period. In such a case, when the RUSH rush notification is given without considering the timing at which the RUSH mode effect type is determined, in other words, the length of the remaining time of the ending period, the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode Further, there is a possibility that the first notification may be notified at a timing when the first notification is uncomfortable, such as the first notification may be performed, or the first notification may be performed after entering the RUSH mode (slightly after). However, according to the pachinko machine of the fifth embodiment, the RUSH rush notification is performed at different timings according to the timing when the selection of the RUSH mode effect type is received, so RUSH rush without causing the player to feel discomfort. Notification can be performed to improve the interest.

(2) The notification control means of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment performs notification of RUSH rush at different timings according to the length of the remaining time of the ending period of the jackpot technique. For this reason, after the notification of RUSH rush is performed without considering the length of the remaining time of the ending period, and the first notification is performed across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or after entering the RUSH mode ( It is possible to suppress that the first notification is performed at a timing when there is a sense of discomfort, such as the first notification being performed slightly later).

(3) The notification control means of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment notifies of RUSH rush according to whether or not the length of the remaining time of the ending period of the jackpot technique is shorter than the time required for the notification of RUSH rush. At different times. For this reason, after the notification of RUSH rush is performed without considering the length of the remaining time of the ending period, and the first notification is performed across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or after entering the RUSH mode ( It is possible to prevent the notification of the first notification at a timing when there is a sense of discomfort, such as the first notification being performed slightly later).

[Modifications of the fourth and fifth embodiments]
Even if the ending period changes according to the type (type) of the special symbol and the mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) of the pachinko machine 10 described in the fourth embodiment, the fifth embodiment The form which selects the kind (type) of the presentation of RUSH mode can be applied during a round game. In this case, the ending period changes according to the type (type) of the special symbol and the mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) of the pachinko machine 10, and the type (type of RUSH mode effect during this changing ending period ) Will be selected.

  However, either the first notification ("RUSH rush") and the second notification ("Please hit right") are performed during the ending period, or only the first notification is performed during the ending period, and the second notification when RUSH mode is entered The determination as to whether to perform the first notification and the second notification when entering the RUSH mode depends on the remaining time TR of the ending period. Therefore, during the round game of the fifth embodiment when the ending period changes according to the type (type) of the special symbol of the fourth embodiment and the mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) of the pachinko machine 10 Also in the case of applying the form of selecting the type (type) of the effect in the RUSH mode, it is possible to cope with the flowchart of the transition processing described with reference to FIG.

  Specifically, if the ending command is received in step S3301 of FIG. 61 (YES), the type and mode of the jackpot game symbol (high probability mode as in step S2602 of FIG. 50) in step S3302 of FIG. An ending period TE corresponding to the low probability mode is acquired. Then, when calculating the remaining time TR in step S3306 in FIG. 61, the measuring time is subtracted from the ending period TE corresponding to the type and mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) of the symbol of the jackpot game and the ending period When the ending period changes according to the type (type) of the special symbol of the fourth embodiment and the mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) of the pachinko machine 10 by calculating the remaining time TR of TE, The form which selects the kind (type) of the effect of RUSH mode in the round game of 5th Embodiment can be applied.

<Migration process A>
First, the case where the remaining time TR is longer than the intro length TI (for example, when an effect is selected immediately after the start of the ending period TE) will be described with reference to FIG. 62 (a). In the transition processing in this case, since the remaining time TR is longer than the intro length TI, the intro output ends during the ending period TE. Therefore, the first special effect is executed from the end of the output of the intro to the end of the ending period TE. This first special effect causes, for example, an audio such as "Hajimeyo!" To be output from the speaker unit 24, and an image corresponding to this audio (for example, an image spoken by a character) to be displayed on the display screen G It is controlled, and an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation to shift to the RUSH mode and an uplifting feeling is executed.

  Specifically, it is controlled such that the output of the intro portion of the music used in the rendering of the RUSH mode is started from the speaker unit 24 from the presentation determination time T3 of the RUSH mode. In addition, it is controlled so that the A melody part following the intro part is continuously output after the end of the output of the intro part. In addition, the first special effect is executed from the end of output of the intro to the end of the ending period TE. In addition, at the end of the ending period T2, the RUSH right-handed navigation for controlling the right-handed game is controlled to start. That is, the right-handed navigation for RUSH is controlled to be started at the end of the ending period TE, in other words, at the start of the RUSH mode. In addition, at the end T2 of the ending period TE, control is performed so that the image effect of the effect for RUSH is started.

  In addition, the volume of the right-handed navigation for RUSH is controlled to be reproduced smaller than usual. By making the volume of the right-handed navigation for RUSH smaller than normal when entering RUSH, it prevents the player from making "right-handed" voice for right-handed navigation for RUSH offensive to the player during RUSH entry, It is possible to prevent the player from being upset. In addition, control may be performed such that characters such as “Please strike right” are displayed on the display screen G at the end of the ending period T2 in order to suggest a right strike game. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "right strike", characters such as "Please strike right" may be controlled to be displayed on the display screen G. Further, in this transition process, control is performed so that the sound of “RUSH rush” is output from the speaker unit 24 after the output of the intro portion is finished. Further, in the example of FIG. 62 (a), RUSH rush notification is performed after right-handed navigation, but RUSH rush notification may be performed before right-handed navigation.

<Migration process B>
Next, with reference to FIG. 62 (b), the case where the remaining time TR is shorter than the intro length TI (for example, when several seconds have passed from the start of the ending period and then the presentation is selected) will be described. . In the transition processing in this case, since the remaining time TR is shorter than the intro length TI, the intro is output even after the ending period TE ends. Therefore, the second special effect is executed from the end of the ending period TE to the end of the output of the intro. This second special effect displays the number of prize balls and logos acquired in the big hit game on the display screen G, and feels as if the ending period continues even though it is in the RUSH mode. An effect given to the player is executed. If the difference between the length of the remaining time TR and the intro length TI is long (large), the number of prize balls and logos acquired in the big hit game may be displayed on the display screen G, or any character May be controlled to display the time adjustment.

  Specifically, it is controlled such that the output of the intro portion of the music used in the fourth mode M4 from the speaker unit 24 is started from the effect determination time T3 in the RUSH mode. In addition, it is controlled so that the A melody part following the intro part is continuously output after the end of the output of the intro part. Further, the second special effect is executed from the end time T2 of the ending period TE to the end of the output of the intro. In addition, at the end of the ending period T2, the RUSH right-handed navigation for controlling the right-handed game is controlled to start. That is, the right-handed navigation for RUSH is controlled to be started at the end of the ending period TE, in other words, at the start of the RUSH mode. In addition, at the end of the intro output, control is performed so that the visual effect of the RUSH mode effect is started.

  In addition, the volume of the right-handed navigation for RUSH is controlled to be reproduced smaller than usual. By making the volume of the right-handed navigation for RUSH smaller than normal when entering RUSH, it prevents the player from making "right-handed" voice for right-handed navigation for RUSH offensive to the player during RUSH entry, It is possible to prevent the player from being upset. In addition, control may be performed such that characters such as “Please strike right” are displayed on the display screen G at the end of the ending period T2 in order to suggest a right strike game. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "right strike", characters such as "Please strike right" may be controlled to be displayed on the display screen G. Further, in this transition process, control is performed so that the sound of “RUSH rush” is output from the speaker unit 24 after the output of the intro portion is finished. Further, in the example of FIG. 62 (b), RUSH rush notification is performed after right-handed navigation, but RUSH rush notification may be performed before right-handed navigation.

<Migration process C>
Next, with reference to FIG. 62 (c), the case where the remaining time TR is much shorter than the intro length TI (for example, when the effect is selected immediately before the end of the ending period TE) will be described. In the transition processing in this case, since the remaining time TR is much shorter than the intro length TI, the intro portion is hardly output during the ending period TE, and the ending period TE ends. Therefore, in the case shown in FIG. 62C, the output of the intro is started after the ending period TE ends. Also, after the output of the intro is finished, it is controlled so that the A melody part following the intro part is continuously output.

  Specifically, it is controlled such that the output of the intro portion of the music used in the RUSH mode performance from the speaker unit 24 is started from the end T2 of the ending period TE. In addition, it is controlled so that the A melody part following the intro part is continuously output after the end of the output of the intro part. In addition, at the end of the ending period T2, the RUSH right-handed navigation for controlling the right-handed game is controlled to start. That is, the right-handed navigation for RUSH is controlled to be started at the end of the ending period TE, in other words, at the start of the RUSH mode. In addition, at the end T2 of the ending period TE, control is performed so that the image effect of the effect of the RUSH mode is started.

  In addition, the volume of the right-handed navigation for RUSH is controlled to be reproduced smaller than usual. By making the volume of the right-handed navigation for RUSH smaller than normal when entering RUSH, it prevents the player from making "right-handed" voice for right-handed navigation for RUSH offensive to the player during RUSH entry, It is possible to prevent the player from being upset. In addition, control may be performed such that characters such as “Please strike right” are displayed on the display screen G at the end of the ending period T2 in order to suggest a right strike game. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "right strike", characters such as "Please strike right" may be controlled to be displayed on the display screen G. Further, in this transition process, control is performed so that the sound of “RUSH rush” is output from the speaker unit 24 after the output of the intro portion is finished.

  If the remaining time TR is much shorter than the intro length TI, as shown in FIG. 62 (d), the output of the intro portion is not performed, and from the speaker unit 24 to RUSH from the end T2 of the ending period TE. It may be controlled to start output of the A melody part of the music used in the mode rendering. Further, in the examples of FIG. 62 (c) and FIG. 62 (d), RUSH rush notification is performed after right-handed navigation, but RUSH rush notification may be performed before right-handed navigation.

<Effect transition process>
Next, the transition process to the RUSH mode described with reference to FIG. 62 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing to the RUSH mode. Here, the operation of the sound emission control apparatus 90 of the transition processing to the RUSH mode described with reference to FIG. 62 will be described.

  In step S3401, the MPU 92 determines whether an ending command has been received. In the determination, the MPU 92 confirms whether an ending command is stored in the various flag storage areas. If the MPU 92 determines in step S3401 that the ending command has been received (YES), the MPU 92 acquires the ending period TE based on the ending command in step S3402. The ending period TE may be obtained by including information on the length (sec) of the ending period TE in the ending command transmitted from the main control device 60, or a value corresponding to the indicated ending period TE. May be stored in the ROM 93 of the audio light emission control device 90, and the type of the big hit may be determined from the command type to recognize the ending period TE. Further, in step S3401, when the MPU 92 does not determine that the ending command has been received (NO), the effect transfer process is ended.

In step S3403, the MPU 92 starts a timer to calculate the remaining time TR in step S3405 described later.
Next, in step S3404, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the type (class) of effects in the RUSH mode to be shifted after the jackpot game is determined. In step S3404, when the type (type) of the effect in the RUSH mode to be shifted after the big hit game is not determined (NO), the MPU 92 ends the effect transfer process.
Further, in step S3404, when the type (type) of the RUSH mode effect to be shifted after the big hit game is determined (YES), in step S3405, the MPU 92 calculates the remaining time TR. Specifically, the MPU 92 stops the timer started in step S3403 and subtracts the time measured by the timer from the ending period TE acquired in step S3402 to calculate the remaining time TR of the ending.

  In step S3406, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the remaining time TR is longer than the intro length TI of the music (BGM) for which the selected effect has been selected. If the remaining time TR is longer than the intro length TI in step S3406 (YES), the MPU 92 proceeds to step S3407 to perform transition processing D described with reference to FIG. If longer than TI). The details of the migration process D will be described later.

  In step S3406, when the remaining time TR is not longer than the intro length TI (NO), the MPU 92 determines in step S3408 whether the remaining time TR is the same as the intro length TI. In step S3408, if the remaining time TR is the same as the intro length TI (YES), the MPU 92 executes transition processing E (when the remaining time TR is the same as the intro length TI) in step S3409. The details of the migration process E will be described later.

  In step S3408, when remaining time TR is not the same as intro length TI (NO), in step S3410, MPU 92 determines whether remaining time TR is longer than a half (TI / 2) of intro length TI. Determine if If the remaining time TR is longer than half (TI / 2) of the intro length TI in step S3410 (YES), the MPU 92 proceeds to step S3411 to perform the transition processing F described with reference to FIG. (If the remaining time TR is longer than half the intro length TI (TI / 2)). The details of the migration process F will be described later.

  In step S3410, when the remaining time TR is not longer than half (TI / 2) of the intro length TI (NO), the MPU 92 refers to FIG. 62 (c) and (FIG. 62d) in step S3412. The described transition processing G (if the remaining time TR is not longer than half the intro length TI (TI / 2)) is executed. The details of the migration process G will be described later.

  In step S3410, cases are divided by taking as an example the case where the remaining time TR is not longer than a half (TI / 2) of the intro length TI, but the length of the remaining time TR to be divided in step S3410. Is optional, and may be divided into cases of 2 seconds or less, for example.

<Migration process D>
Next, the transition process D of step S3407 of FIG. 63 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart of the migration process D.
In step S3501, the MPU 92 calculates an absolute value | TR-TI | of a value obtained by subtracting the length TI of the intro from the remaining time TR.
In step S3502, the MPU 92 sets timer counters T2 and T3 provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 to measure the time of steps S3504 and S3506 described later. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a value corresponding to the length TI of the intro in the timer counter T2 as a measurement time, and a value corresponding to the absolute value (| TR-TI |) calculated in step S3501 in the timer counter T3. Is set as the measurement time. For example, if the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec and the length of the intro TI is 10 sec, the MPU 92 sets "5000" to the timer counter T2, and if the absolute value is 2 sec, the MPU 92 counts the timer counter. Set "1000" to T3. The values set in the timer counters T2 and T3 are updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  In step S3503, the MPU 92 starts output of music (BGM) for effect in RUSH mode. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the music data for RUSH mode effect from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled to be output from the unit 24. Thus, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data from the speaker unit 24 is started.

  In step S3504, the MPU 92 determines whether the output of the intro portion of the BGM has ended based on whether the value of the timer counter T2 set in step S3502 is zero. If the MPU 92 determines that the output of the intro part has not ended (NO), the migration processing D is ended without executing the processing of step S3505 and subsequent steps. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the output of the intro portion is finished (YES), the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S3505 and thereafter.

  In step S3505, the MPU 92 starts the first special effect. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the voice of "end!" From the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and "starts!" The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the voice of the speaker unit 24 is output from the speaker unit 24. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice of "Hajimeyo!" Is started from the speaker unit 24. Further, the MPU 92 controls the display screen G to display an image (for example, an image spoken by a character) corresponding to the sound. Specifically, the MPU 92 transmits a first special effect start command to the display control apparatus 100 so that an image corresponding to the sound is displayed on the display screen G. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 performs control such that a video corresponding to the audio is displayed on the display screen G based on the first special effect start command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  Further, in step S3505, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the voice of "RUSH rush" for RUSH rush following from the voice of "beginning!" From the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 for sound. It is set in the register 952 of the output LSI 95, and the sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the voice of “RUSH rush” is output from the speaker unit 24. Thereby, the output (reproduction) of the sound of “RUSH rush” from the speaker unit 24 is started. In addition, it may be made to display on the display screen in a text "Hajimeyo!", And output the voice of "RUSH plunging" from the speaker part 24, or output the voice of "Hajime yo!" From the speaker part 24. The characters “RUSH rush” may be displayed on the display screen G.

  In step S3506, the MPU 92 determines whether the ending period TE has ended based on whether the value of the timer counter T3 set in step S3502 is zero. If the MPU 92 determines that the ending period TE has not ended (NO), the migration processing D is ended without executing the processing after step S3507. If the MPU 92 determines that the ending period TE has ended (YES), the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S3507 and subsequent steps. In step S3507, the MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 to end the first special effect. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the sound such as "Starting!" From the speaker unit 24 is stopped. Further, the MPU 92 transmits a first special effect stop command to the display control device 100. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 controls the display of the video corresponding to the audio on the display screen G to be stopped based on the first special effect stop command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  In step S3508, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the sound data "Please hit right" for RUSH right-handed navigation from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 to the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the sound data “Please hit right” is output from the speaker unit 24. As a result, the output (playback) of the audio data "Please hit right" is started from the speaker unit 24, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started.

  In step S3509, the MPU 92 instructs the display control apparatus 100 to start video effects for RUSH effect. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 to read out and reproduce the RUSH effect video data stored in the effect data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out the video data for RUSH effect from the effect data storage area 1032 and controls the VDP 105 to display it on the display screen G.

  In addition, the structure which measures time of step S3504 and step S3506 is arbitrary, for example, you may measure using a real time clock (RTC).

<Migration process E>
Next, the transition process E of step S3409 of FIG. 63 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart of the migration process E.
In step S3601, the MPU 92 sets a timer counter T2 provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 to measure the time of step S3603 described later. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a value corresponding to the length TI of the intro in the timer counter T2 as a measurement time. For example, when the cycle of the timer interrupt process is 2 msec and the length TI of the intro is 10 sec, the MPU 92 sets "5000" in the timer counter T2. The value set in the timer counter T2 is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. In the case of the example shown in FIG. 63, since the length TI of the intro is equal to the remaining time TR, instead of setting a value corresponding to the length TI of the intro to the timer counter T2 in step S3601, A value corresponding to the remaining time TR may be set in the timer counter T4.

  In step S3602, the MPU 92 starts output of music (BGM) for effecting in the RUSH mode. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the music data for RUSH mode effect from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled to be output from the unit 24. Thus, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data from the speaker unit 24 is started. In addition, the MPU 92 starts displaying the RUSH mode effect video. Specifically, the MPU 92 transmits a command to the display control apparatus 100 so that a presentation image for RUSH mode is displayed on the display screen G. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 performs control such that a rendering image for RUSH mode is displayed on the display screen G based on a command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  In step S3603, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the output of the intro portion of the BGM has ended based on whether or not the value of the timer counter T2 set in step S3602 is zero. If the MPU 92 determines that the output of the intro part has not ended (NO), the migration processing D is ended without executing the processing of step S3605 and subsequent steps. When the MPU 92 determines that the output of the intro part is completed (YES), the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S3604 and thereafter.

  In step S3604, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the sound data "Please hit right" for RUSH right-handed navigation from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, and outputs them to the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the sound data “Please hit right” is output from the speaker unit 24. As a result, the output (playback) of the audio data "Please hit right" is started from the speaker unit 24, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started.

  In step S3605, the MPU 92 instructs the display control apparatus 100 to start an image effect for RUSH effect. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 to read out and reproduce the RUSH effect video data stored in the effect data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out the video data for RUSH effect from the effect data storage area 1032 and controls the VDP 105 to display it on the display screen G.

  Note that the configuration for measuring the time in step S3603 is optional, and may be measured using, for example, a real time clock (RTC).

<Migration process F>
Next, the transition process F of step S3411 of FIG. 62 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart of the migration process F.
In step S3701, the MPU 92 sets timer counters T2 and T4 provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 to measure the time of steps S3703 and S3704 described later. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a value corresponding to the length TI of the intro in the timer counter T2 as a measurement time, and sets a value corresponding to the remaining time TR in the timer counter T4 as a measurement time. For example, if the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec and the intro length TI is 10 sec, the MPU 92 sets "5000" to the timer counter T2 and the remaining time TR is 7 sec, the MPU 92 counts the timer Set "3500" to the counter T4. The values set in the timer counters T2 and T4 are updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  In step S3702, the MPU 92 starts output of music (BGM) for performance in the RUSH mode. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the music data for RUSH mode effect from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled to be output from the unit 24. Thus, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data from the speaker unit 24 is started.

  In step S3703, the MPU 92 determines whether the ending period TE has ended based on whether the value of the timer counter T4 set in step S3701 is zero. If the MPU 92 determines that the ending period TE has not ended (NO), the migration processing F ends, without executing the processing of step S3704 and subsequent steps. If the MPU 92 determines that the ending period TE has ended (YES), the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S3704 and subsequent steps. In step S3704, the MPU 92 executes a second special effect. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the display control apparatus 100 to display on the display screen G a character image (for example, a logo-ized Arabic numeral) corresponding to the number of winning balls obtained in the big hit game. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display a character image corresponding to the number of winning balls on the display screen G based on an instruction from the MPU 92.

  In step S3705, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the sound data for right-handed navigation for RUSH “right-handed” from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and registers them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the sound data “Please hit right” is output from the speaker unit 24. As a result, the output (playback) of the audio data "Please hit right" is started from the speaker unit 24, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started.

In step S3706, the MPU 92 determines whether the output of the intro portion of the BGM has ended based on whether the value of the timer counter T2 set in step S3701 is zero. If the MPU 92 determines that the output of the intro part has not ended (NO), the migration processing F ends, without executing the processing of step S3707 and subsequent steps. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the output of the intro portion is finished (YES), the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S3707 and thereafter.
In step S3707, the MPU 92 instructs the display control apparatus 100 to stop the second special effect. Specifically, the MPU 92 transmits a second special effect stop command to the display control device 100. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 controls the display screen G to stop displaying the character image corresponding to the winning ball number acquired in the big hit game based on the second special effect stop command transmitted from the MPU 92. I do.

  In step S3708, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the voice of "RUSH rush" for RUSH rush from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the voice of “” is output from the speaker unit 24. As a result, the speaker unit 24 starts to output (reproduce) an audio of "RUSH rush", in other words, "RUSH rush". In addition to displaying “RUSH rush” in text on the display screen, a sound of “RUSH rush” may be output from the speaker unit 24.

  In step S3709, the MPU 92 instructs the display control apparatus 100 to start video effects for RUSH effect. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 to read out and reproduce the RUSH effect video data stored in the effect data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out the video data for RUSH effect from the effect data storage area 1032 and controls the VDP 105 to display it on the display screen G.

  In addition, the structure which measures time of step S3703 and step S3706 is arbitrary, for example, you may measure using a real time clock (RTC).

<Migration process G>
Next, the transition process G in step S3412 in FIG. 63 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a flowchart of the migration process G.
In step S3801, the MPU 92 sets a timer counter T4 provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 in order to measure the time of step S3802 described later. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets a value corresponding to the remaining time TR in the timer counter T4 as a measurement time. For example, when the cycle of the timer interrupt process is 2 msec and the remaining time TR is 2 seconds, the MPU 92 sets "1000" in the timer counter T4. The value set in the timer counter T4 is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  In step S3802, the MPU 92 determines whether the ending period TE has ended based on whether the value of the timer counter T4 set in step S3801 is zero. If the MPU 92 determines that the ending period TE has not ended (NO), the migration processing G is ended without executing the processing after step S3803. When the MPU 92 determines that the ending period TE has ended (YES), the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S3803 and subsequent steps.

  In step S3803, the MPU 92 starts output of music (BGM) for effect in RUSH mode. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the music data for RUSH mode effect from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled to be output from the unit 24. Thus, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data from the speaker unit 24 is started. In addition, the MPU 92 starts displaying the RUSH mode effect video. Specifically, the MPU 92 transmits a command to the display control apparatus 100 so that a presentation image for RUSH mode is displayed on the display screen G. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 performs control such that a rendering image for RUSH mode is displayed on the display screen G based on a command transmitted from the MPU 92.

  In step S3804, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the sound data "Please hit right" for RUSH right-handed navigation from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, and registers them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the sound data “Please hit right” is output from the speaker unit 24. As a result, the output (playback) of the audio data "Please hit right" is started from the speaker unit 24, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started.

  In addition, the structure which measures time of step S3802 is arbitrary, for example, you may measure using a real time clock (RTC).

[Invention group extracted from each embodiment]
The features of the invention extracted from the above embodiments will be described below. Among the features of the present invention group, the corresponding configurations in the respective embodiments are shown in parentheses, but the features of the present invention group are not limited to the respective embodiments, and the features of the present invention group are The combination of each feature, such as modification and improvement in the range which can achieve the object, is included in the feature of the present invention group.

<Feature A group>
Features A1.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature A1 is
Transition means (MPU 62) for transitioning the gaming state from the first gaming state (big hit gaming state) to the second gaming state (RUSH mode) different from the first gaming state;
And reproduction control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) for reproducing music data of the second gaming state during the period of the first gaming state.

  According to the feature group A1 of the present invention group, when transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the music of the second gaming state is started to be reproduced during the period of the first gaming state. The game state can be shifted without breaking the flow, and the game can be enjoyed without losing the exhilaration of the series of flows of the game state. For this reason, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A2.
The gaming machine according to the feature A2 is the gaming machine according to the feature A1,
The first gaming state is a specific gaming state (jackpot game) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The reproduction control means is characterized in that the music data is reproduced during an ending period of the first gaming state.

  According to the feature group A1 of the present invention group, the music data of the second gaming state (RUSH mode) to be shifted after the first gaming state (big hit gaming) is controlled to be reproduced during the ending period of the specific gaming state. . In other words, control is performed so that the music data of the second gaming state is reproduced at the end of the first gaming state. For this reason, it is possible to perform mode transition without breaking the flow from the specific gaming state to the gaming state (RUSH mode) after the specific gaming state more effectively, and losing the refreshing feeling of a series of flows of the gaming state You can enjoy playing games. For this reason, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A3.
The gaming machine according to the feature A3 is the gaming machine according to the feature A2,
The reproduction control means is characterized in that the music data is reproduced at the start of the ending period.

  According to the feature A3 of the present invention group, the reproduction control means causes the music data to be reproduced at the start of the ending period, so there is no sense of discomfort even if the reproduction of music is started from the period of the first gaming state, Mode transition can be performed more smoothly without breaking the flow from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.

Feature A4.
The gaming machine according to the feature A4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A3:
First notification control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) for making it possible to perform a first notification (RUSH inrush) enabling the player to recognize a second gaming state to be shifted after the first gaming state;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the feature A4 of the present invention group, the first notification is made to allow the player to recognize the second gaming state to be shifted after the first gaming state, so that the player can play the first game. It is possible to recognize the second gaming state that transitions after the state. Therefore, the player's attention to the game can be improved, and the expectation of the game can be improved.

Feature A5.
The gaming machine according to the feature A5 is the gaming machine according to the feature A4,
The first notification control means is characterized in that the first notification is ended when the reproduction of the intro portion of the music is finished.

  According to the feature A5 of the present invention group, since the first notification ends at the end of the reproduction of the intro part of the music, the end of the first notification matches the end of the intro part of the music. You can get it.

Feature A6.
The gaming machine according to the feature A6 is the gaming machine according to the feature A4 or the feature A5,
The first notification control means is characterized in that the first notification is started during an ending period of the first gaming state.

  According to the feature group A6 of the present invention group, since the first notification is started during the ending period of the first gaming state, the player is in the middle of the first gaming state in the second gaming state to shift after the first gaming state. To know. As a result, the player's attention to the game can be improved, and the sense of expectation for the next game state can be improved.

Feature A7.
The gaming machine according to the feature A7 is the gaming machine according to any one of the features A4 to A6.
The first notification is a notification by voice.

  According to the feature A7 of the present invention group, since the first notification is notified by voice, notification is surely made to the player who is looking away from the gaming machine, ie, the player who is not focusing on the display screen G. can do.

Feature A8.
The gaming machine according to the feature A8 is the gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A7,
A large winning opening (381) is provided at a position where the game ball launched so as to flow down a predetermined area in the game area can enter the ball, and a winning hole (381) is provided for winning a prize by winning in the first gaming state. ,
The gaming machine is
A second notification control means for performing a second notification enabling the player to recognize that the game ball should be fired so as to flow down the predetermined area at the end of the first gaming state (MPU 102, symbol display device 51) is further provided.

  According to the feature A8 of the present invention group, it is possible to inform the player of an advantageous game method in a so-called right-handed machine.

Feature A9.
The gaming machine according to the feature A9 is the gaming machine according to the feature A8,
The second notification control means (MPU 102, symbol display device 51) is characterized in that the second notification is performed by a video or an image.

  According to the feature A9 of the present invention group, since the second notification is performed by the video or the image, the player can be made to pay attention to the symbol display device 51.

Feature A10.
The gaming machine according to the feature A10 is the gaming machine according to the features A1 to A9,
A large winning opening (381) is provided at a position where the game ball launched so as to flow down a predetermined area in the game area can enter the ball, and a winning hole (381) is provided for winning a prize by winning in the first gaming state. ,
The gaming machine is
Third notification control means for performing a third notification enabling the player to recognize that the game ball should be fired to flow down the predetermined area at the end of the first gaming state (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) is further provided.

  According to the feature A10 of the present invention group, it is possible to inform the player of an advantageous game method in a so-called right-handed machine.

Characteristics A11.
The gaming machine according to the feature A11 is the gaming machine according to the feature A10,
The third notification control means is characterized in that the third notification is performed by voice.

  According to the feature group A11 of the present invention group, the third notification is given by voice, so it is surely notified to the player who is not looking at the gaming machine, that is, the player who is not focusing on the display screen G. be able to.

Feature A12.
The gaming machine according to the feature A12 is the gaming machine according to the feature A10 or the feature A11,
The third notification control means is
After the first notification is performed by the first notification unit, the third notification may be continuously performed.

  According to the feature A12 of the present invention group, since the first notification and the third notification do not overlap, the notification by voice does not overlap and it is prevented that the player can not hear at least one of the first notification and the third notification. can do.

Feature A13.
The gaming machine according to the feature A13 is the gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A12,
The game machine is
Selection operation means (operation button 28) for receiving the selection of the effect type of the second gaming state to be shifted after the first gaming state;
Effect setting means (MPU 92) for setting the effect accepted by the selection operation means as an effect of a second gaming state to be shifted after the first gaming state,
It is characterized by having.

  According to the feature group A13 of the present invention group, since it is possible to select an effect of the second gaming state to be shifted after the first gaming state, the range of the player's selection is expanded, and an effect according to various player preferences Can be provided, and the interest can be improved.

Feature A14.
The gaming machine according to the feature A14 is the gaming machine according to the feature A13,
It comprises an effect type selection effect control means (MPU 92, MPU 102, symbol display device 51) for performing an effect for selecting an effect type of the second game state to be shifted after the first game state,
The effect type selection effect control means is characterized in that an effect for selecting the effect type is performed during a period of the first gaming state.

  According to the feature group A14 of the present invention group, since effects can be selected during the first gaming state, it is possible to know the effects of the next gaming state during the first gaming state, and the player's attention level Can be improved.

Feature A15.
The gaming machine according to the feature A15 is the gaming machine according to the feature A14,
The effect setting means, when selection of the effect type is not accepted by the selection operation means by the final round of the first gaming state, the effect being selected by a predetermined type of effect or selection operation means , And set as an effect of the gaming state to shift after the first gaming state.

  According to the feature A15 of the present invention group, when the selection operation means can not receive the selection of the effect type by the final round of the first gaming state, the selection of the predetermined type of effect or the selection operation means is being performed. Since the effect is set as the effect of the gaming state to shift after the first gaming state, even when the player does not perform the selection operation, the effect of the gaming state to shift after the first gaming state can be set.

  According to such a feature A group of the present invention, since the gaming state can be shifted without breaking the flow of the gaming state, enjoyment of the game without losing the refreshing feeling of the series of flows of the gaming state it can. Therefore, the following problems can be solved.

  Usually, effects such as video, music and light emission patterns of lamps differ depending on the gaming state. Therefore, at the time of transition of the gaming state, transition of effects is also performed. However, in the conventional gaming machine, effects such as video and music are rapidly switched at the time of transition of the game state, and the flow of effects is divided. For this reason, for the player, there is a possibility that the flow of the game will be divided and the interest may be cut off, and it can not be said that the interest improvement in this point is sufficiently achieved. There is room for improvement.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature B1 is
A first notification (RUSH plunging) that enables the player to recognize the gaming state and first data corresponding to the music intro portion of the gaming state, and a first data corresponding to portions other than the music intro portion Storage means (ROM 93) in which the two data are stored;
And reproduction control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) for repeatedly reproducing the second data after reproduction of the first data.

  According to the feature B1 of the present invention group, the first data corresponding to the first notification and the music intro portion enabling the player to recognize the gaming state (RUSH mode), and the music intro Storage means storing second data corresponding to parts other than the part; and reproduction control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) for reproducing the second data repeatedly after reproduction of the first data And have. For this reason, it is not necessary to separately store the music data and the data of the first notification in the storage means, and it is not necessary to measure the time to output the first notification. Therefore, the storage capacity of the storage means (ROM 93) can be saved. Further, the arithmetic processing of the MPU 92 can be reduced. Further, the player can recognize the gaming state by the first notification included in the first data. Therefore, the player's attention to the game can be improved, and the expectation of the game can be improved. In addition, since the first data including the data of the first notification is not repeatedly reproduced, and the second data is repeatedly reproduced, the first notification is repeatedly reproduced and the player does not feel bothersome.

Feature B2.
The gaming machine according to the feature B2 is the gaming machine according to the feature B1,
The first notification indicates a second gaming state (RUSH mode) to be shifted after the first gaming state (big hit game),
The reproduction control means is characterized in that the first data is reproduced during a period of the first gaming state.

  According to the feature B2 of the present invention group, when transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the first notification to recognize the state of the second gaming state during the period of the first gaming state is performed, The player can know the second gaming state to be shifted after the first gaming state in the middle of the first gaming state. As a result, the player's attention to the game can be improved, and the sense of expectation for the next game state can be improved. In addition, when transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the reproduction of the music including the first data of the second gaming state is started during the period of the first gaming state, so the flow of the gaming state The game state can be transferred without breaking the game, and the game can be enjoyed without losing the exhilarating feeling of the series of flows of the game state. For this reason, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature B3.
The gaming machine according to the feature B3 is the gaming machine according to the feature B2,
The first gaming state is a specific gaming state (jackpot game) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The reproduction control means is characterized in that the first data is reproduced during an ending period of the first gaming state.

  According to the feature group B3 of the present invention group, the music data of the second gaming state (RUSH mode) to be shifted after the first gaming state (big hit gaming) is controlled to be reproduced during the ending period of the specific gaming state. . That is, control is performed such that music data of the second gaming state is reproduced at the end of the first gaming state. For this reason, it is possible to perform mode transition without breaking the flow from the specific gaming state to the gaming state (RUSH mode) after the specific gaming state more effectively, and losing the refreshing feeling of a series of flows of the gaming state You can enjoy playing games. For this reason, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature B4.
The gaming machine according to the feature B4 is the gaming machine according to the feature B3,
The reproduction control means is characterized in that the first data stored in the storage means is reproduced at the start of the ending period.

  According to the feature B4 of the present invention group, the reproduction control means causes the first data stored in the storage means to be reproduced at the start of the ending period, so that music reproduction from the first gaming state to the second gaming state is performed. There is no sense of incompatibility even if is started, and the mode transition can be performed more smoothly without dividing the flow to the second gaming state after the first gaming state.

Feature B5.
The gaming machine according to the feature B5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B4:
The data corresponding to the first notification is stored in the storage means such that the reproduction of the first notification is ended at the end of the reproduction of the intro part.

  According to the feature B5 of the present invention group, the data corresponding to the first notification is stored in the storage means so that the reproduction of the first notification is ended at the end of the reproduction of the intro part. The match with the end of the intro part of the music gives a sense of togetherness and exhilaration.

Feature B6.
The gaming machine according to the feature B6 is the gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B5,
The data corresponding to the first notification may be voice data.

  According to the feature B6 of the present invention group, since the first notification is notified by voice, notification is surely made to the player who is looking away from the gaming machine, that is, the player who is not focusing on the display screen G. can do.

Feature B7.
The gaming machine according to the feature B7 is the gaming machine according to any one of the features B2 to B6,
A large winning opening (381) is provided at a position where the game ball launched so as to flow down a predetermined area in the game area can enter the ball, and a winning hole (381) is provided for winning a prize by winning in the first gaming state. ,
The gaming machine is
A second notification control means for performing a second notification enabling the player to recognize that the game ball should be fired so as to flow down the predetermined area at the end of the first gaming state Furthermore, it is characterized by having.

  According to the feature B7 of the present invention group, it is possible to inform the player of an advantageous game method in a so-called right-handed machine.

Feature B8.
The gaming machine according to the feature B8 is the gaming machine according to the feature B7,
The second notification control means (MPU 102, symbol display device 51) is characterized in that the second notification is performed by a video or an image.

  According to the feature B8 of the present invention group, since the second notification is performed by the image or the image, the player can be made to pay attention to the symbol display device 51.

Feature B9.
The gaming machine according to the feature B9 is the gaming machine according to the features B1 to B8,
A large winning opening (381) is provided at a position where the game ball launched so as to flow down a predetermined area in the game area can enter the ball, and a winning hole (381) is provided for winning a prize by winning in the first gaming state. ,
The gaming machine is
The third notification control means is further configured to cause the third notification to allow the player to recognize that the game ball should be fired so as to flow down the predetermined area at the end of the game state. It is characterized by having.

  According to the feature B9 of the present invention group, it is possible to inform the player of an advantageous game method in a so-called right-handed machine.

Feature B10.
The gaming machine according to the feature B10 is the gaming machine according to the feature B9,
The third notification control means is characterized in that the third notification is performed by voice.

  According to the feature B10 of the present invention group, since the third notification is performed by voice, notification can be reliably made to the player who is looking away from the gaming machine.

Feature B11.
The gaming machine according to the feature B11 is the gaming machine according to the feature B9 or the feature B10,
The third notification control means is
After the first notification is performed by the first notification unit, the third notification may be continuously performed.

  According to the feature B11 of the present invention group, since the first notification and the third notification do not overlap, the notification by voice does not overlap and it is prevented that the player can not hear at least one of the first notification and the third notification. can do.

Feature B12.
The gaming machine according to the feature B12 is the gaming machine according to any one of the features B2 to B11.
The game machine is
Selection operation means (operation button 28) for receiving the selection of the effect type of the second gaming state to be shifted after the first gaming state;
Effect setting means (MPU 92) for setting the effect accepted by the selection operation means as an effect of a second gaming state to be shifted after the first gaming state,
It is characterized by having.

  According to the feature group B12 of the present invention group, since it is possible to select an effect of the gaming state to be shifted after the first gaming state, the range of the player's selection is expanded, and effects tailored to various player preferences are provided. It is possible to improve the interest.

Feature B13.
The gaming machine according to the feature B13 is the gaming machine according to the feature B12,
It comprises an effect type selection effect control means (MPU 92, MPU 102, symbol display device 51) for performing an effect for selecting an effect type of the second game state to be shifted after the first game state,
The effect type selection effect control means is characterized in that an effect for selecting the effect type is performed during a period of the first gaming state.

  According to the feature B13 of the present invention group, since the effect can be selected during the first gaming state, the next gaming state can be known during the first gaming state, and the player's attention is improved It can be done.

Feature B14.
The gaming machine according to the feature B14 is the gaming machine according to the feature B13,
The effect setting means, when selection of the effect type is not accepted by the selection operation means by the final round of the first gaming state, the effect being selected by a predetermined type of effect or selection operation means The method is set as an effect of a second gaming state to shift after the first gaming state.

  According to the feature B14 of the present invention group, if selection of the effect type is not accepted by the selection operation means by the final round of the first gaming state, the selection of the predetermined type of effect or selection operation means is being performed. Since the effect is set as the effect of the second gaming state to shift after the first gaming state, even if the player does not perform the selection operation, the effect of the second gaming state to shift after the first gaming state may be set it can.

  According to such a feature B group of the present invention, it is not necessary to separately store in the storage means the music data for effect and the data of the first notification that enables the player to recognize the gaming state. Moreover, it is not necessary to measure time in order to take the timing which outputs 1st alerting | reporting. Therefore, the following problems can be solved.

  Usually, music data for presentation and voice data for notification (for example, an announcement when entering a specific mode) are separately stored in different areas of storage means such as ROM, etc. The player is notified by reproducing the voice data of However, in such a conventional method, the capacity of audio data to be stored in the storage means having a limited storage capacity is increased, and other data (for example, character data and image data for background) are stored. Capacity will be reduced. Further, since it is necessary to take timing to reproduce the audio data for notification, necessary arithmetic processing increases, and the load on the MPU, CPU, etc. increases.

<Feature C group>
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to the feature C1 is
Transition means (MPU 62) for transitioning the gaming state from the first gaming state (specific gaming state) to the second gaming state (RUSH mode) different from the first gaming state;
First notification control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) which performs the first notification (RUSH inrush) enabling the player to recognize the second gaming state according to the type of the second gaming state When,
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine according to the feature C1, since the first notification enabling the player to recognize the second gaming state is performed at different timings according to the type of the second gaming state, the type of the second gaming state Flexible notification can be performed according to the situation.

Feature C2.
The gaming machine according to the feature C2 is the gaming machine according to the feature C1,
The first notification control means may start the first notification during a period of the first gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine according to the feature C2, the first notification is performed during the period of the first gaming state, so that the player knows in the middle of the first gaming state the second gaming state to shift after the first gaming state Can. As a result, the player's attention to the game can be improved, and the sense of expectation for the next game state can be improved.

Feature C3.
The gaming machine according to the feature C3 is the gaming machine according to the feature C2,
The first notification control means varies the timing of the start of the first notification according to the type of the second gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine according to the feature C3, since the timing of starting the first notification is made different according to the type of the second gaming state, flexible notification can be performed according to the type of the second gaming state. Further, since the timing of the start of the first notification is different, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of specifying the type of the second gaming state at the timing when the first notification is started, and the interest is improved.

Feature C4.
A gaming machine according to a feature C4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 through C3:
The first notification control means ends the first notification at the end of the first gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine according to the feature C4, the first notification is ended at the end of the first gaming state, so that the effect of the second gaming state is not disturbed by the first notification. As a result, the player can enjoy the second gaming state without being disturbed, so the interest is improved.

Feature C5.
A gaming machine according to a feature C5 is the gaming machine according to any of the features C1 to C3:
The first notification control means ends the first notification during a period of the second gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine according to the feature C5, the first notification is ended during the period of the second gaming state, so the first notification is performed from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. For this reason, the flow from the first gaming state to the second gaming state is not divided, so that the player can enjoy the game without losing the exhilaration of the series of flows of the gaming state, and the amusement of the game can be improved. .

Feature C6.
A gaming machine according to a feature C6 is the gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C3:
The first notification control means ends the first notification during a period of the first gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine related to the feature C6, the first notification is ended during the period of the first gaming state. For this reason, during the period of the first gaming state, it is possible to secure the time to perform other notices and effects after the end of the first notice, and performing notices and effects other than the first notice in the secured time, It is possible to improve the convenience and interest of the player.

Feature C7.
The gaming machine according to the feature C7 is the gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C6,
It is characterized by comprising reproduction control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) for reproducing music data of the second gaming state during a period of the first gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine related to the feature C7, since the music data of the second gaming state is reproduced during the period of the first gaming state, the gaming state can be shifted without breaking the flow of the gaming state. It is possible to enjoy the game without losing the exhilarating feeling of the series of states. For this reason, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature C8.
The gaming machine according to the feature C8 is the gaming machine according to the feature C7,
The first notification control means is controlled to end the first notification at the end of the reproduction of the intro portion of the music.

  According to the feature C8 of the present invention group, since the first notification ends at the end of the reproduction of the intro part of the music, the end of the first notification matches the end of the intro part of the music. You can get it.

Feature C9.
A gaming machine according to a feature C9 is the gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to 8.
The first notification is a notification by voice.

  According to the feature C9 of the present invention group, since the first notification is notified by voice, notification is surely made to the player who is not looking at the gaming machine, that is, the player who is not paying attention to the display screen G. can do.

Feature C10.
A gaming machine according to a feature C10 is the gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C9,
A large winning opening (381) is provided at a position where the game ball launched so as to flow down a predetermined area in the game area can enter the ball, and a winning hole (381) is provided for winning a prize by winning in the first gaming state. ,
The gaming machine is
A second notification control means for performing a second notification enabling the player to recognize that the game ball should be fired so as to flow down the predetermined area at the end of the first gaming state (MPU 102, symbol display device 51) or third notification control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) for causing a third notification to be performed.

  According to the feature C10 of the present invention group, it is possible to inform the player of an advantageous game method in a so-called right-handed machine.

Feature C11.
The gaming machine according to the feature C11 is the gaming machine according to the feature C10,
The second notification control means (MPU 102, symbol display device 51) is characterized in that the second notification is performed by a video or an image.

  According to the feature C11 of the present invention group, since the second notification is performed by the image or the image, the player can be made to pay attention to the symbol display device 51.

Feature C12.
The gaming machine according to the feature C12 is the gaming machine according to the feature C11,
The third notification control means is characterized in that the third notification is performed by voice.

  According to the feature C12 of the present invention group, since the third notification is given by voice, it is surely notified to the player who is not looking at the gaming machine, that is, the player who is not focusing on the display screen G. be able to.

Feature C13.
A gaming machine according to a feature C13 is the gaming machine according to any of the features C10 to C12,
The third notification control means is characterized in that the third notification is continuously performed after the first notification is performed by the first notification means.

  According to the feature C13 of the present invention group, since the first notification and the third notification do not overlap, the notification by voice does not overlap and it is prevented that the player can not hear at least one of the first notification and the third notification. can do.

Feature C14.
The gaming machine according to the feature C14 is the gaming machine according to the feature C7,
The first gaming state is a specific gaming state (jackpot game) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The reproduction control means is characterized in that the music data is reproduced during an ending period of the first gaming state.

  According to the feature C14 of the present invention group, the music data of the second gaming state (RUSH mode) to be shifted after the first gaming state (big hit gaming) is controlled to be reproduced during the ending period of the specific gaming state . In other words, control is performed so that the music data of the second gaming state is reproduced at the end of the first gaming state. For this reason, it is possible to perform mode transition without breaking the flow from the specific gaming state to the gaming state (RUSH mode) after the specific gaming state more effectively, and losing the refreshing feeling of a series of flows of the gaming state You can enjoy playing games. For this reason, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature C15.
The gaming machine according to the feature C15 is the gaming machine according to the feature C14,
The reproduction control means is characterized in that the music data is reproduced at the start of the ending period.

  According to the feature C15 of the present invention group, the reproduction control means causes the music data to be reproduced at the start of the ending period, so there is no discomfort even if the reproduction of music is started during the first gaming state, Mode transition can be performed more smoothly without breaking the flow from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.

Feature C16.
The gaming machine according to the feature C16 is the gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 through C15,
The game machine is
Selection operation means (operation button 28) for receiving selection of the effect type of the second gaming state;
Effect setting means (MPU 92) for setting the effect accepted by the selection operation means as an effect of the second gaming state;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the feature C16 of the present invention group, since it is possible to select an effect of the second gaming state to shift after the first gaming state, the range of the player's selection is expanded, and an effect according to various player preferences Can be provided, and the interest can be improved.

Feature C17.
The gaming machine according to the feature C17 is the gaming machine according to the feature C16,
It comprises an effect type selection effect control means (MPU 92, MPU 102, symbol display device 51) for performing an effect for selecting an effect type of the second gaming state,
The effect type selection effect control means is characterized in that an effect for selecting the effect type is performed during a period of the first gaming state.

  According to the feature C17 of the present invention group, since effects can be selected during the period of the first gaming state, the effects of the next gaming state can be known during the first gaming state, and the player's attention level Can be improved.

Feature C18.
The gaming machine according to the feature C18 is the gaming machine according to the feature C16 or the feature 17.
The effect setting means, when selection of the effect type is not accepted by the selection operation means by the final round of the first gaming state, the effect being selected by a predetermined type of effect or selection operation means , And set as an effect of the gaming state to shift after the first gaming state.

  According to the feature C18 of the present invention group, if selection of the effect type is not accepted by the selection operation means by the final round of the first gaming state, the selection or selection operation means of the type determined in advance is being selected. Since the effect is set as the effect of the gaming state to shift after the first gaming state, even when the player does not perform the selection operation, the effect of the gaming state to shift after the first gaming state can be set.

  According to such a feature C group of the present invention, when the gaming state shifts from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the next gaming state is determined in advance according to the type of the second gaming state The timing of the notification to the different is made different. Therefore, the following problems can be solved.

  The player wants to know what kind of game the next game state (the game state after the shift) is when the game state shifts. However, the notification of the gaming state is made after the gaming state has shifted and the notification is lacking in flexibility. Also, for the player, since the first notification is performed at the same timing each time, it becomes a chatter, and interest in the first notification will be lost, and the player's attention to the game decreases, so the next gaming state is entered. I do not feel the expectation of

<Feature D group>
Feature D1.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine) according to feature D1 is
Transition means (MPU 62) for transitioning the gaming state from the first gaming state (specific gaming state) to the second gaming state (RUSH mode) different from the first gaming state;
Reproduction control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) for reproducing music in the second gaming state;
Special effect executing means (MPU 92, MPU 102, etc.) that execute special effects in the first gaming state or the second gaming state according to the relation between the ending period of the first gaming state and the playing time of the intro part of the music The speaker unit 24, the symbol display device 51, the display screen G),
And the like.

  According to the feature D1 of the present invention group, when transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, depending on the relationship between the ending period of the first gaming state and the playing time of the intro portion of the music, Since the special effect is executed, the game state can be shifted without a sense of discomfort without dividing the flow of the game state, and the game can be enjoyed without losing the exhilarating feeling of the series of flows of the game state. For this reason, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D2.
The gaming machine according to the feature D2 is the gaming machine according to the feature D1,
The reproduction control means
Play the music from the ending period of the first gaming state,
The special effect execution means is
When the reproduction time of the intro part of the music is shorter than the ending period of the first gaming state, the special effect is executed from the end of the reproduction of the intro part to the start of the second gaming state. Do.

  If the playback time of the intro part of the music is shorter than the ending period of the first gaming state, the ending period will continue even if the playback of the intro part ends, so when starting the playback of the A melody part following the intro part There is no change in the image production, and there is little change because it does not appear instead, and the feeling of exhilaration at the time of reproduction of the A melody part fades. However, according to the feature D2 of the present invention group, when the reproduction time of the intro part of music is shorter than the ending period of the first gaming state, the special effect is performed from the end of the reproduction of the intro part to the start of the second gaming state Run. Therefore, the visual effect changes at the start of the reproduction of the A melody part following the intro part. In other words, the change in music matches the change in visual effects. For this reason, the player can clearly recognize that the gaming state (mode) has changed, and the expectation of the game increases. In addition, since the change in music matches the change in visual effects, it is possible to shift the gaming state without discomfort without interrupting the flow of the gaming state, and without losing the exhilaration of the series of flows of the gaming state. It can be enjoyed. For this reason, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D3.
The gaming machine according to the feature D3 is the gaming machine according to the feature D2,
The reproduction control means
Play the music from the ending period of the first gaming state,
The special effect execution means is
As a special effect from the end of reproduction of the intro portion to the start of the second gaming state, notification of transition to the next gaming state is provided.

  According to the feature D3 of the present invention group, the player can know to shift to the second gaming state which is the next gaming state.

Feature D4.
The gaming machine according to the feature D4 is the gaming machine according to the feature D1,
The special effect execution means is
When the reproduction time of the intro part of the music is longer than the ending period of the first gaming state, a special effect is executed at the start of the second gaming state.

  If the playback time of the intro part of the music is longer than the ending period of the first gaming state, the transition to the second gaming state is made before the playback of the intro part ends, so there is not much change in the music being played back Regardless of the situation, the image production changes suddenly. However, according to the feature D4 of the present invention group, when the reproduction time of the intro part of music is longer than the ending period of the first gaming state, the special effect is executed at the start of the second gaming state. For this reason, although the reproduction of the intro part continues, the visual effects of the second gaming state do not start. Therefore, it is possible for the player to prevent the visual effect of the second gaming state from being started even though the reproduction of the intro portion is not finished, and the player has a feeling that the musical effect and the visual effect do not match. I do not have it. Therefore, the game state can be shifted without a sense of discomfort without dividing the flow of the game state, and the game can be enjoyed without losing the refreshing feeling of the series of the game state flow. For this reason, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D5.
The gaming machine according to the feature D5 is the gaming machine according to the feature D4,
The special effect execution means is
It is characterized in that an award winning ball in the first gaming state is notified as a special effect at the start of the second gaming state.

  According to the feature D5 of the present invention group, since the winning prize ball is displayed as the special effect, the player can know how many winning balls have been won in the first gaming state.

Feature D6.
The gaming machine according to the feature D6 is the gaming machine according to the feature D1,
If the ending period of the first gaming state is shorter than the playback time of the intro portion of the music,
The reproduction control means
The music is reproduced from the second gaming state.

  According to the feature D6 of the present invention group, if the ending period of the first gaming state is shorter than the playing time of the intro portion of the music, the music is played from the second gaming state, so the playing of the intro portion is started and paused It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by preventing the player from entering the second gaming state before putting up the game. As a result, the game state can be shifted without a sense of discomfort without breaking the flow of the game state, and the game can be enjoyed without losing the exhilarating feeling of the series of flows of the game state.

The gaming machine according to the feature D7 is the gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to the features D6,
A large winning opening (381) is provided at a position where the game ball launched so as to flow down a predetermined area in the game area can enter the ball, and a winning hole (381) is provided for winning a prize by winning in the first gaming state. ,
The system further comprises notification control means for performing a second notification (please hit the right) enabling the player to recognize that the game ball should be fired so as to flow down the predetermined area.
The notification control means
Control is performed to make the volume of the second notification smaller than usual.

  According to the feature D7 of the present invention group, by making the volume of the right-handed navigation for the first RUSH smaller than normal at the time of the second game state entry, the voice of the right-handed navigation for the RUSH to the player at the RUSH entry is "Please strike right" can prevent the player from becoming annoying and prevent the player from being upset.

Feature D8.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to the feature D8 is the gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D6,
It has notification control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) which performs the first notification (RUSH inrush) which makes it possible for the player to recognize the second gaming state according to the type of the first gaming state. It is characterized by

  The length of the ending period may differ depending on the type of jackpot, specifically, the type of the special figure and whether the mode is the high probability mode (high probability state) or the low probability mode (low probability state). In such a case, if the first notification is performed without considering the length of the ending period, the first notification is performed across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or after entering the RUSH mode ( There is a possibility that the first notification may be notified at a timing when there is a sense of discomfort, such as the first notification being performed a little later. However, according to the feature D1 of the present invention group, since the first notification is performed at different timings according to the type of the first gaming state, the first notification can be performed without causing the player to feel discomfort, It is possible to improve the quality.

Feature D9.
The gaming machine according to the feature D9 is the gaming machine according to the feature D8,
The notification control means performs the first notification at different timings according to the length of the ending period of the first gaming state.

  According to the feature D9 of the present invention group, since the notification control means performs the first notification at different timings according to the length of the ending period of the big hit game, it is the first across the ending period of the big hit game and the RUSH mode. It is possible to suppress the possibility that the first notification is notified at a timing when there is a sense of incongruity, such as when the notification is performed, or the first notification is performed (after a short delay) after entering the RUSH mode. Therefore, the first notification can be performed without causing the player to feel discomfort, and the interest can be improved.

Feature D10.
The gaming machine according to the feature D10 is the gaming machine according to the feature D9,
The notification control means performs the first notification at different timings depending on whether the length of the ending period of the first gaming state is shorter than the time required for the first notification.

  According to the feature D10 of the present invention group, the notification control means performs the first notification at different times depending on whether the length of the ending period of the big hit game is shorter than the time required for the first notification. For this reason, the first notification is performed such that the first notification is performed across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or the first notification is performed after entering the RUSH mode (with a little delay). It is possible to suppress the possibility of being notified at a certain timing. As a result, the first notification can be performed without causing the player to feel discomfort, and the interest can be improved.

Feature D11.
The gaming machine according to the feature D11 is the gaming machine according to the feature D10,
The notification control means performs the first notification during the ending period when the length of the ending period of the first gaming state is not shorter than the time required for the first notification, and the ending of the first gaming state When the length of the period is shorter than the time required for the first notification, the first notification is performed after the ending period has elapsed.

  According to the feature D11 of the present invention group, the notification control means performs the first notification during the ending period when the length of the ending period of the big hit game is not shorter than the time required for the first notification, and the ending of the big hit game If the length of the period is shorter than the time required for the first notification, the first notification is performed after the ending period has elapsed, so the first notification is performed across the ending period of the big hit game and the RUSH mode, or in the RUSH mode It is possible to reliably prevent the possibility that the first notification is notified at a timing when there is a sense of incongruity, such as the first notification being performed (after a slight delay) after the entry. For this reason, the interest can be improved without causing the player to feel discomfort.

Feature D12.
The gaming machine according to the feature D12 is the gaming machine according to the feature D11,
The notification control means ends the first notification at the end of an ending period of the first gaming state.

  According to the feature D12 of the present invention group, the notification control means ends the first notification at the end of the big hit game ending period, so the end time of the big hit game ending period coincides with the end of the first notification. Therefore, the player can obtain a sense of unity and exhilaration.

Feature D13.
The gaming machine according to the feature D13 is the gaming machine according to the feature D12,
The notification control means ends the first notification during an ending period of the first gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine according to the feature D13, the first notification is ended during the period of the jackpot game. For this reason, during the jackpot game period, it is possible to secure a time for performing another notification or effect after the end of the first notification, and by performing notification or effect other than the first notification during this secured time, the player can It is possible to improve convenience and interest.

Feature D14.
The gaming machine according to the feature D14 is the gaming machine according to any one of the features D8 to D13,
A large winning opening (381) is provided at a position where the game ball launched so as to flow down a predetermined area in the game area can enter the ball, and a winning hole (381) is provided for winning a prize by winning in the first gaming state. ,
The notification control means
It is characterized in that a second notification (please hit right) is made to allow the player to recognize that the game ball should be fired so as to flow down the predetermined area.

  According to the feature D14 of the present invention group, it is possible to inform the player of an advantageous game method in a so-called right-handed machine.

Feature D15.
The gaming machine according to the feature D15 is the gaming machine according to the feature D14,
When the length of the ending period of the first gaming state is not shorter than the time required for the first notification and the second notification, the notification control means performs the first notification and the second notification during the ending period. It is characterized by doing.

  According to the feature D15 of the present invention group, when the length of the ending period of the jackpot game is not shorter than the time required for the first notification and the second notification, the notification control means performs the first notification and the second notification during the ending period. Since the notification is performed, the first notification or the second notification is performed across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or after entering the RUSH mode (slightly after), the first notification or the second notification is performed. It is possible to reliably prevent the possibility that the first notification or the second notification may be notified at a time when the first notification or the second notification has an uncomfortable feeling. For this reason, the interest can be improved without causing the player to feel discomfort.

Feature D16.
The gaming machine according to the feature D16 is the gaming machine according to the feature D14 or the feature D15,
When the length of the ending period of the first gaming state is shorter than the time required for the first notification and the second notification and is not shorter than the time required for the first notification, the notification control means may perform the ending. The first notification is performed during a period, and the second notification is performed after the ending period has elapsed.

  According to the feature D16 of the present invention group, the notification control means determines that the length of the ending period of the jackpot game is shorter than the time required for the first notification and the second notification and not shorter than the time required for the first notification Since the first notification is performed during the ending period and the second notification is performed after the ending period has elapsed, the first notification or the second notification is performed across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or the RUSH mode is entered. It is possible to reliably prevent the possibility that the first notification or the second notification is notified at a timing when the first notification or the second notification is uncomfortable, such as the first notification or the second notification is performed (after a short delay). For this reason, the interest can be improved without causing the player to feel discomfort.

Feature D17.
A gaming machine according to a feature D17 is the gaming machine according to any one of the features D14 to D16,
When the length of the ending period of the first gaming state is shorter than the time required for the first notification, the notification control means performs the first notification and the second notification after the ending of the ending period. Do.

  According to the feature D17 of the present invention group, the notification control means performs the first notification and the second notification after the end of the ending period if the length of the ending period of the big hit game is shorter than the time required for the first notification. The first notification or the second notification is performed across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or the first notification or the second notification is performed after entering the RUSH mode (with a little delay), etc. It is possible to reliably prevent the possibility of being notified at the timing when the first notification or the second notification has a sense of incongruity. For this reason, the interest can be improved without causing the player to feel discomfort.

Feature D18.
The gaming machine according to the feature D18 is the gaming machine according to any one of the features D14 to D17,
The notification control means is characterized in that the second notification is continuously performed after the first notification is performed by the first notification means.

  According to the feature D18 of the present invention group, since the first notification and the second notification do not overlap, it is possible to prevent the player from not recognizing at least one of the first notification and the second notification.

Feature D19.
A gaming machine according to a feature D19 is the gaming machine according to any one of the features D14 to D18,
At least one of the first notification and the second notification may be voice notification.

  According to the feature D19 of the present invention group, at least one of the first notification and the second notification is notified by voice, so a player who is looking away from the gaming machine, that is, a player who does not pay attention to the display screen G Can also be notified reliably.

Feature D20.
The gaming machine according to the feature D20 is the gaming machine according to any one of the features D14 to D19,
The notification control means (MPU 102, symbol display device 51) is characterized in that the second notification is performed by an image or an image.

  According to the feature D20 of the present invention group, since the second notification is performed by the image or the image, the player can be made to pay attention to the symbol display device 51.

Feature D21.
The gaming machine according to the feature D21 is the gaming machine according to any one of the features D8 to D20,
The reproduction control means is characterized in that music data of a second gaming state is reproduced during an ending period of the first gaming state.

  According to the feature D21 of the present invention group, control is performed so that the music data of the RUSH mode to shift after the jackpot game is reproduced during the ending period of the jackpot game. In other words, control is performed so that music data in the RUSH mode is reproduced at the end of the jackpot game. For this reason, the mode transition can be performed more effectively without breaking the flow from the big hit game to the RUSH mode after the big hit game, and the game can be enjoyed without losing the exhilarating feeling of a series of flows of the gaming state . For this reason, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D22.
The gaming machine according to the feature D22 is the gaming machine according to the feature D21,
The reproduction control means is characterized in that the music data is reproduced from the start of the ending period.

  According to the feature D22 of the present invention group, the reproduction control means causes the music data to be reproduced from the start of the ending period, so there is no discomfort even if the reproduction of music is started from the period of the big hit game Mode transition can be performed more smoothly without breaking the flow from the technique to the RUSH mode.

Feature D23.
A gaming machine according to a feature D23 is the gaming machine according to any one of the features D8 to D22,
The game machine is
Selection operation means (operation button 28) for receiving selection of the effect type of the second gaming state;
Effect setting means (MPU 92) for setting the effect accepted by the selection operation means as an effect of the second gaming state;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the feature D23 of the present invention group, it is possible to select an effect type of the RUSH mode to shift after the jackpot game. For this reason, it is possible to widen the range of choices of the player, to provide an effect tailored to the preferences of various players, and to improve the interest.

Feature D24.
The gaming machine according to the feature D24 is the gaming machine according to the feature D23,
It comprises an effect type selection effect control means (MPU 92, MPU 102, symbol display device 51) for performing an effect for selecting an effect type of the second gaming state,
The effect type selection effect control means is characterized in that an effect for selecting the effect type is performed during a period of the first gaming state.

  According to the feature D24 of the present invention group, since the effect can be selected during the jackpot game period, it is possible to know the effect of the RUSH mode which is the next game state during the jackpot game, and the player's attention Can be improved.

Feature D25.
The gaming machine according to the feature D25 is the gaming machine according to the feature D23 or the feature D24,
The effect setting means, when selection of the effect type is not accepted by the selection operation means by the final round of the first gaming state, the effect being selected by a predetermined type of effect or selection operation means , And set as an effect of the gaming state to shift after the first gaming state.

  According to the feature D25 of the present invention group, when the selection operation means does not receive the selection of the effect type by the final round of the big hit game, the effect being selected by the predetermined type effect or the selection operation means The effect of the RUSH mode to shift after the jackpot game can be set even if the player does not perform the selection operation, since the effect is set as the effect of the gaming state to shift after the jackpot game.

  According to such a feature D group of the present invention, when transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, special effects are produced according to the ending period of the first gaming state and the playback time of the intro portion of the music. Run. Therefore, it is possible to shift the gaming state without feeling discomfort without dividing the flow of the gaming state, and to enjoy the game without losing the exhilarating feeling of the series of flows of the gaming state. Therefore, the following problems can be solved.

  Usually, effects such as video, music and light emission patterns of lamps differ depending on the gaming state. Therefore, at the time of transition of the gaming state, transition of effects is also performed. However, in the conventional gaming machine, effects such as video and music are rapidly switched at the time of transition of the game state, and the flow of effects is divided. For this reason, for the player, there is a possibility that the flow of the game will be divided and the interest may be cut off, and it can not be said that the interest improvement in this point is sufficiently achieved. There is room for improvement.

  Further, according to the feature D group of the present invention, when the gaming state shifts from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the next gaming state is made in advance according to the type of the first gaming state. The timing of the first notification to notify the player is made different. Therefore, the following problems can be solved.

  The player wants to know what kind of game the next game state (the game state after the shift) is when the game state shifts. However, the notification of the gaming state is made after the gaming state has shifted and the notification is lacking in flexibility. Also, for the player, since the first notification is performed at the same timing each time, it becomes a chatter, and interest in the first notification will be lost, and the player's attention to the game decreases, so the next gaming state is entered. I do not feel the expectation of

  In addition, the length of the ending period may differ depending on the type of jackpot, specifically, the type of the special figure and whether the mode is the high probability mode (high probability state) or the low probability mode (low probability state). In such a case, if the first notification (RUSH inrush) is performed without considering the length of the ending period, there is a possibility that the first notification (RUSH inrush) may be performed at a timing when there is a sense of incompatibility. As a result, the player feels uncomfortable and the interest is diminished.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine) according to the feature E1 is
Transition means (MPU 62) for transitioning the gaming state from the first gaming state (specific gaming state) to the second gaming state (RUSH mode) different from the first gaming state;
Reproduction control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) for reproducing music in the second gaming state;
Operation means (operation button 28) for receiving selection of the effect type of the second gaming state;
Special effect executing means (MPU 92, MPU 102, speaker unit 24, symbol display device) for executing special effects in the first game state or the second game state according to the timing when the effect type of the second game state is selected 51, display screen G),
And the like.

  According to the feature E1 of the present invention group, at the time of transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the special effect is executed according to the timing at which the effect type of the second gaming state is selected. The game state can be shifted without a sense of discomfort without dividing the flow of the state, and the game can be enjoyed without losing the exhilarating feeling of the series of flows of the game state. For this reason, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature E2.
The gaming machine according to the feature E2 is the gaming machine according to the feature E1,
The reproduction control means
Play the music from the ending period of the first gaming state,
The special effect execution means is
If the playing time of the intro part of the music is shorter than the remaining time of the ending period of the first gaming state after the effect type of the second gaming state is selected, the second gaming from the end of the playing of the intro part The special effect is executed until the start of the state.

  If the playback time of the intro part of the music is shorter than the remaining time of the ending period of the first gaming state, the ending period will continue even if the reproduction of the intro part ends, so the reproduction of the A melody part following the intro part There is no change in the image production at the start, and there is little change because it does not show up, and the feeling of exhilaration at the time of reproduction of the A melody part fades away. However, according to the feature E2 of the present invention group, when the reproduction time of the intro part of music is shorter than the ending period of the first gaming state, the special effect is performed from the end of the reproduction of the intro part to the start of the second gaming state Run. Therefore, the visual effect changes at the start of the reproduction of the A melody part following the intro part. In other words, the change in music matches the change in visual effects. For this reason, the player can clearly recognize that the gaming state (mode) has changed, and the expectation of the game increases. In addition, since the change in music matches the change in visual effects, it is possible to shift the gaming state without discomfort without interrupting the flow of the gaming state, and without losing the exhilaration of the series of flows of the gaming state. It can be enjoyed. For this reason, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature E3.
The gaming machine according to the feature E3 is the gaming machine according to the feature E2,
The reproduction control means
Play the music from the ending period of the first gaming state,
The special effect execution means is
As a special effect from the end of reproduction of the intro portion to the start of the second gaming state, notification of transition to the next gaming state is provided.

  According to the feature E3 of the present invention group, the player can know to shift to the second gaming state which is the next gaming state.

Feature E4.
The gaming machine according to the feature E4 is the gaming machine according to the feature E1,
The special effect execution means is
If the play time of the intro part of the music is longer than the remaining time of the ending period of the first gaming state after the effect type of the second gaming state is selected, a special effect is given at the start of the second gaming state It is characterized by carrying out.

  If the playback time of the intro part of music is longer than the remaining time of the ending period of the first gaming state, the transition to the second gaming state is made before the playback of the intro part ends, so there is not much change in the music being played Although there is no such thing, the video production changes suddenly. However, according to the feature E4 of the present invention group, when the reproduction time of the intro part of music is longer than the ending period of the first gaming state, the special effect is executed at the start of the second gaming state. For this reason, although the reproduction of the intro part continues, the visual effects of the second gaming state do not start. Therefore, it is possible for the player to prevent the visual effect of the second gaming state from being started even though the reproduction of the intro portion is not finished, and the player has a feeling that the musical effect and the visual effect do not match. I do not have it. Therefore, the game state can be shifted without a sense of discomfort without dividing the flow of the game state, and the game can be enjoyed without losing the refreshing feeling of the series of the game state flow. For this reason, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature E5.
The gaming machine according to the feature E5 is the gaming machine according to the feature E4,
The special effect execution means is
It is characterized in that an award winning ball in the first gaming state is notified as a special effect at the start of the second gaming state.

  According to the feature E5 of the invention group, since the winning prize ball is displayed as the special effect, the player can know how much the winning ball has been won in the first gaming state.

Feature E6.
The gaming machine according to the feature E6 is the gaming machine according to the feature E1,
If the remaining time of the ending period of the first gaming state is shorter than the playback time of the intro portion of the music,
The reproduction control means
The music is reproduced from the second gaming state.

  According to the feature E6 of the present invention group, when the remaining time of the ending period of the first gaming state is shorter than the playing time of the intro portion of music, the music is played from the second gaming state, so the playing of the intro portion starts It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by preventing the player from entering into the second gaming state before he or she has been idle for a while. As a result, the game state can be shifted without a sense of discomfort without breaking the flow of the game state, and the game can be enjoyed without losing the exhilarating feeling of the series of flows of the game state.

The gaming machine according to the feature E7 is the gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E6,
A large winning opening (381) is provided at a position where the game ball launched so as to flow down a predetermined area in the game area can enter the ball, and a winning hole (381) is provided for winning a prize by winning in the first gaming state. ,
The system further comprises notification control means for performing a second notification (please hit the right) enabling the player to recognize that the game ball should be fired so as to flow down the predetermined area.
The notification control means
Control is performed to make the volume of the second notification smaller than usual.

  According to the feature E7 of the present invention group, by making the volume of the right-handed navigation for the first RUSH smaller than normal at the time of the second game state entry, the voice of the right-handed navigation for the RUSH to the player at the RUSH entry is "Please strike right" can prevent the player from becoming annoying and prevent the player from being upset.

Feature E8.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to the feature E8 performs the first notification (RUSH rush) enabling the player to recognize the second gaming state in the gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E6. A notification control unit (MPU 92, speaker unit 24);
The notification control means performs the first notification at different timings according to the timing at which the effect type of the second gaming state is selected.

  There is a pachinko machine that performs selection of the RUSH mode effect type that shifts after the big hit game during the big hit game ending period. In such a case, when the first notification is performed without considering the timing at which the RUSH mode effect type is selected, in other words, the length of the remaining time of the ending period, the jackpot game ends over the ending period and the RUSH mode. There is a possibility that the first notification may be notified at a timing when the first notification is uncomfortable, such as the first notification may be performed, or the first notification may be performed after entering the RUSH mode (with a slight delay). However, according to the feature E8 of the present invention group, since the first notification is performed at different timings according to the timing at which the selection of the effect type of the second gaming state is received, the first notification is not generated for the player It can be done to improve the interest.

Feature E9.
The gaming machine according to the feature E9 is the gaming machine according to the feature E1,
The notification control means performs the first notification at different timings according to the length of the remaining time of the ending period of the first gaming state.

  According to the feature E9 of the present invention group, the notification control means performs the first notification at different timings according to the length of the remaining time of the ending period of the big hit game, so the length of the remaining time of the ending period should be taken into consideration. The first notification is performed without the first notification, the first notification is performed across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or the first notification is performed after entering the RUSH mode (slightly later), etc. (1) It is possible to suppress the notification at the timing when there is a sense of incongruity.

Feature E10.
The gaming machine according to the feature E10 is the gaming machine according to the feature E2,
The notification control means performs the first notification at different timings depending on whether the length of the remaining time of the ending period of the first gaming state is shorter than the time required for the first notification. Do.

  According to the feature E10 of the present invention group, the notification control means performs the first notification at different timings depending on whether the length of the remaining time of the ending period of the big hit game is shorter than the time required for the first notification. Therefore, after the first notification is performed without considering the length of the remaining time of the ending period, and the first notification is performed across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or after entering the RUSH mode (a little delay) It is possible to prevent the first notification from being notified at a timing when there is a sense of incompatibility, such as the first notification being performed.

Feature E11.
The gaming machine according to the feature E11 is the gaming machine according to the feature E10,
The notification control means performs the first notification during the ending period when the length of the remaining time of the ending period of the first gaming state is not shorter than the time required for the first notification, and the first game is performed. When the length of the remaining time of the ending period of the state is shorter than the time required for the first notification, the first notification is performed after the ending of the ending period.

  According to the feature E11 of the present invention group, the notification control means performs the first notification during the ending period when the length of the remaining time of the ending period of the big hit game is not shorter than the time required for the first notification, and the big hit When the length of the remaining time of the ending period of the game is shorter than the time required for the first notification, the first notification is performed after the ending period has elapsed, so the first notification is performed across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode. It is possible to reliably prevent the first notification from being notified at a timing when there is a sense of incongruity, such as the first notification being performed (after a slight delay) after entering the RUSH mode. For this reason, the interest can be improved without causing the player to feel discomfort.

Feature E12.
The gaming machine according to the feature E12 is the gaming machine according to the feature E11,
The notification control means ends the first notification at the end of an ending period of the first gaming state.

  According to the feature E12 of the present invention group, the notification control means ends the first notification at the end of the big hit game ending period, so the end time of the big hit game ending period coincides with the end of the first notification. Therefore, the player can obtain a sense of unity and exhilaration.

Feature E13.
The gaming machine according to the feature E13 is the gaming machine according to the feature E11,
The notification control means ends the first notification during an ending period of the first gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine according to the feature E13, the first notification is ended during the period of the jackpot game. For this reason, during the jackpot game period, it is possible to secure a time for performing another notification or effect after the end of the first notification, and by performing notification or effect other than the first notification during this secured time, the player Improve the convenience and interest of

Feature E14.
The gaming machine according to the feature E14 is the gaming machine according to any one of the features E8 to E13,
A large winning opening (381) is provided at a position where the game ball launched so as to flow down a predetermined area in the game area can enter the ball, and a winning hole (381) is provided for winning a prize by winning in the first gaming state. ,
The notification control means
It is characterized in that a second notification (please hit right) is made to allow the player to recognize that the game ball should be fired so as to flow down the predetermined area.

  According to the feature E14 of the present invention group, it is possible to inform the player of an advantageous game method in a so-called right-handed machine.

Feature E15.
The gaming machine according to the feature E15 is the gaming machine according to the feature E14,
When the length of the remaining time of the ending period of the first gaming state is not shorter than the time required for the first notification and the second notification, the notification control means performs the first notification and the first notification during the ending period. A second notification is performed.

  According to the feature E15 of the present invention group, the notification control means performs the first notification during the ending period when the length of the remaining time of the ending period of the big hit game is not shorter than the time required for the first notification and the second notification. Since the second notification is performed, the first notification or the second notification is performed across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or after entering the RUSH mode (slightly after) the first notification or the second It is possible to reliably prevent the notification of the first notification or the second notification at a timing when there is a sense of incompatibility, such as notification. For this reason, the interest can be improved without causing the player to feel discomfort.

Feature E16.
The gaming machine according to the feature E16 is the gaming machine according to the feature E14 or the feature E15,
The notification control means performs the first notification during the ending period when the length of the remaining time of the ending period of the first gaming state is not shorter than the time required for the first notification, and the ending period has elapsed. The second notification is performed later.

  According to the feature E16 of the present invention group, the notification control means performs the first notification during the ending period when the length of the remaining time of the ending period of the big hit game is not shorter than the time required for the first notification, and the ending Since the second notification is performed after the period elapses, the first notification or the second notification is performed across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or after entering the RUSH mode (slightly after) the first notification or It is possible to reliably prevent the notification of the first notification or the second notification at a timing when there is a sense of incompatibility, such as the second notification being performed. For this reason, the interest can be improved without causing the player to feel discomfort.

Feature E17.
The gaming machine according to the feature E17 is the gaming machine according to any one of the features E10 to E16,
The notification control means determines that the length of the remaining time of the ending period of the first gaming state is shorter than the time required for the first notification and the second notification and shorter than the time required for the first notification, The first notification and the second notification are performed after the ending period has elapsed.

  According to the feature E17 of the present invention group, the notification control means performs the first notification after the ending period has elapsed, when the length of the remaining time of the ending period of the big hit game is shorter than the time required for the first notification and the second notification. Since the second notification is performed, the first notification or the second notification is performed across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or after entering the RUSH mode (slightly after), the first notification or the second notification And the first notification or the second notification can be reliably prevented from being notified at a timing when there is a sense of incongruity. For this reason, the interest can be improved without causing the player to feel discomfort.

Feature E18.
The gaming machine according to the feature E18 is the gaming machine according to any one of the features E10 through E17,
The notification control means is characterized in that the second notification is continuously performed after the first notification is performed by the first notification means.

  According to the feature E18 of the present invention group, since the first notification and the second notification do not overlap, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to recognize at least one of the first notification and the second notification.

Feature E19.
The gaming machine according to the feature E19 is the gaming machine according to any one of the features E14 to E18,
At least one of the first notification and the second notification may be voice notification.

  According to the feature E19 of the present invention group, since at least one of the first notification and the second notification is notified by voice, a player who is not looking at the gaming machine, that is, a player who is not paying attention to the display screen G Can also be notified reliably.

Feature E20.
The gaming machine according to the feature E20 is the gaming machine according to any one of the features E14 to E19,
The notification control means (MPU 102, symbol display device 51) is characterized in that the second notification is performed by an image or an image.

  According to the feature E20 of the present invention group, since the second notification is performed by the image or the image, the player can be made to pay attention to the symbol display device 51.

Feature E21.
The gaming machine according to the feature E21 is the gaming machine according to any one of the features E8 through E20,
The reproduction control means is characterized in that music data of a second gaming state is reproduced during an ending period of the first gaming state.

  According to the feature E21 of the present invention group, control is performed so that the music data of the RUSH mode to shift after the jackpot game is reproduced during the ending period of the jackpot game. In other words, control is performed so that RASH mode music data is reproduced at the end of the jackpot game. For this reason, the mode transition can be performed more effectively without breaking the flow from the big hit game to the RUSH mode after the big hit game, and the game can be enjoyed without losing the exhilarating feeling of a series of flows of the gaming state . For this reason, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature E22.
The gaming machine according to the feature E22 is the gaming machine according to the feature E21,
The reproduction control means is characterized in that the music data is reproduced after selection of an effect type of the second gaming state.

  According to the feature E22 of the present invention group, the reproduction control means causes the music data to be reproduced after the selection of the effect type in the second gaming state, so the reproduction of music starts from the period of the first gaming state There is no sense of incompatibility, and music data of the second gaming state is reproduced after the player has selected the effect type, so that exhilaration can be obtained and the interest can be improved.

Feature E23.
A gaming machine according to a feature E23 is the gaming machine according to any one of the features E8 to E22,
The game machine is
It is characterized in that there is provided effect setting means (MPU 92) for setting the effect accepted by the selection operation means as an effect of the second gaming state.

  According to the feature E23 of the present invention group, since it is possible to select the RUSH mode effect to be shifted after the big hit game, the range of the player's selection is expanded, and the effect tailored to various player preferences is provided. It is possible to improve curiosity.

Feature E24.
The gaming machine according to the feature E24 is the gaming machine according to the feature E23,
It comprises an effect type selection effect control means (MPU 92, MPU 102, symbol display device 51) for performing an effect for selecting an effect type of the second gaming state,
The effect type selection effect control means is characterized in that an effect for selecting the effect type is performed during a period of the first gaming state.

  According to the feature E24 of the present invention group, since the effect can be selected during the jackpot game period, it is possible to know the effect of the RUSH mode which is the next game state during the jackpot game, and the player's attention Can be improved.

Feature E25.
The gaming machine according to the feature E25 is the gaming machine according to the feature E23 or the feature E24,
When the effect setting means does not receive the selection of the effect type by the selection operation means by the end of the ending period of the first gaming state, the effect setting means is selecting with a predetermined type of effect or selection operation means The effect is set as an effect of the gaming state to be shifted after the first gaming state.

  According to the feature E25 of the present invention group, when the selection operation means can not accept the selection of the effect type by the final round of the jackpot game, the effect being selected by the predetermined type effect or the selection operation means The effect of the RUSH mode to shift after the jackpot game can be set even if the player does not perform the selection operation, since the effect is set as the effect of the gaming state to shift after the jackpot game.

Feature E26.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) according to feature E26,
Transition means (MPU 62) for transitioning the gaming state from the first gaming state (specific gaming state) to the second gaming state (RUSH mode) different from the first gaming state;
Notification control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) for performing a first notification (RUSH inrush) enabling the player to recognize the second gaming state;
Operation means (operation button 28) for receiving selection of the effect type of the second gaming state;
Reproduction control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) for reproducing music data of the second gaming state after selection of the effect type of the second gaming state;
And the like.

  According to the feature E26 of the present invention group, the reproduction control means causes the music data to be reproduced after the selection of the effect type of the second gaming state, so the reproduction of music starts from the period of the first gaming state There is no sense of incompatibility, and music data of the second gaming state is reproduced after the player has selected the effect type, so that exhilaration can be obtained and the interest can be improved.

  According to such a feature E group of the present invention, when transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, depending on the remaining time of the ending period of the first gaming state and the reproduction time of the intro portion of the music , Perform special effects. Therefore, it is possible to shift the gaming state without feeling discomfort without dividing the flow of the gaming state, and to enjoy the game without losing the exhilarating feeling of the series of flows of the gaming state. Therefore, the following problems can be solved.

  Usually, effects such as video, music and light emission patterns of lamps differ depending on the gaming state. Therefore, at the time of transition of the gaming state, transition of effects is also performed. However, in the conventional gaming machine, effects such as video and music are rapidly switched at the time of transition of the game state, and the flow of effects is divided. For this reason, for the player, there is a possibility that the flow of the game will be divided and the interest may be cut off, and it can not be said that the interest improvement in this point is sufficiently achieved. There is room for improvement.

  Further, according to the feature E group of the present invention, the next gaming state is received according to the timing when the selection of the effect type in the second gaming state is accepted and the selection operation of the effect type in the second gaming state is accepted. The timing of the first notification to notify the player in advance is made different. Therefore, the following problems can be solved.

  The player wants to know what kind of game the next game state (the game state after the shift) is when the game state shifts. However, the notification of the gaming state is made after the gaming state has shifted and the notification is lacking in flexibility. Also, for the player, since the first notification is performed at the same timing each time, it becomes a chatter, and interest in the first notification will be lost, and the player's attention to the game decreases, so the next gaming state is entered. I do not feel the expectation of

  In addition, there is a pachinko machine that performs the selection of the RUSH mode effect type to shift after the big hit game during the big hit game ending period. In such a case, if the first notification is performed without considering the determination of the RUSH mode effect type, in other words, the length of the remaining time of the ending period, the first notification (RUSH) occurs at an unnatural timing. There is a risk that a rush) will occur. As a result, the player feels uncomfortable and the interest is diminished.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine) according to feature F1 is
Transition means (MPU 62) for transitioning the gaming state from the first gaming state (specific gaming state) to the second gaming state (RUSH mode) different from the first gaming state;
And reproduction control means (MPU 92, speaker unit 24) for reproducing the music in the second gaming state.
The reproduction control means
When the ending period of the first gaming state is shorter than the playing time of the intro portion of the music, the music is played from the second gaming state.

  According to the feature F1 of the present invention group, when the ending period of the first gaming state is shorter than the playing time of the intro portion of the music, the music is played from the second gaming state, so the playing of the intro portion is started. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by preventing the player from entering the second gaming state before putting up the game. As a result, the game state can be shifted without a sense of discomfort without breaking the flow of the game state, and the game can be enjoyed without losing the exhilarating feeling of the series of flows of the game state.

Feature F2.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine) according to the feature F2 is the gaming machine according to the feature F1,
It has an operation means (operation button 28) for receiving the selection of the effect type of the second gaming state,
The reproduction control means
The music is reproduced from the second gaming state in accordance with the timing at which the effect type of the second gaming state is selected.

  According to the feature F2 of the present invention group, the music is reproduced from the second gaming state according to the timing when the effect type of the second gaming state is selected, so the reproduction of the intro part is started and it is not late It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by preventing the player from entering the second gaming state. As a result, the game state can be shifted without a sense of discomfort without breaking the flow of the game state, and the game can be enjoyed without losing the exhilarating feeling of the series of flows of the game state.

Feature F3.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine) according to the feature F3 is the gaming machine according to the feature F2,
The reproduction control means
If the playing time of the intro part of the music is shorter than the remaining time of the ending period of the first gaming state after the effect type of the second gaming state is selected, the music is reproduced from the second gaming state It is characterized by

  According to the feature F3 of the present invention group, when the remaining time of the ending period of the first gaming state is shorter than the playing time of the intro portion of music, the music is played from the second gaming state, so the playing of the intro portion starts It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by preventing the player from entering into the second gaming state before he or she has been idle for a while. As a result, the game state can be shifted without a sense of discomfort without breaking the flow of the game state, and the game can be enjoyed without losing the exhilarating feeling of the series of flows of the game state.

Feature F4.
The gaming machine (pachinko machine) according to the feature F4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F3:
Special effect executing means (MPU 92, MPU 102, etc.) that execute special effects in the first gaming state or the second gaming state according to the relation between the ending period of the first gaming state and the playing time of the intro part of the music A speaker unit 24, a symbol display device 51, and a display screen G) are provided.

  According to the feature F4 of the present invention group, when transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, according to the relationship between the ending period of the first gaming state and the playing time of the intro portion of the music, Since the special effect is executed, the game state can be shifted without a sense of discomfort without dividing the flow of the game state, and the game can be enjoyed without losing the exhilarating feeling of the series of flows of the game state. For this reason, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine according to the feature F5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F4:
A large winning opening (381) is provided at a position where the game ball launched so as to flow down a predetermined area in the game area can enter the ball, and a winning hole (381) is provided for winning a prize by winning in the first gaming state. ,
The system further comprises notification control means for performing a second notification (please hit the right) enabling the player to recognize that the game ball should be fired so as to flow down the predetermined area.
The notification control means
Control is performed to make the volume of the second notification smaller than usual.

  According to the feature F5 of the present invention group, by making the volume of the right-handed navigation for the first RUSH smaller than normal at the time of entering the second game state, the player can hear the voice of the right-handed navigation for RUSH "Please strike right" can prevent the player from becoming annoying and prevent the player from being upset.

  According to such a feature F group of the present invention, when the ending period of the first gaming state is shorter than the playing time of the intro portion of the music, the music is played from the second gaming state. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by preventing the player from entering the second gaming state in a short time after the reproduction of the intro portion is started. As a result, the game state can be shifted without a sense of discomfort without breaking the flow of the game state, and the game can be enjoyed without losing the exhilarating feeling of the series of flows of the game state.

  Usually, effects such as video, music and light emission patterns of lamps differ depending on the gaming state. Therefore, at the time of transition of the gaming state, transition of effects is also performed. However, in the conventional gaming machine, effects such as video and music are rapidly switched at the time of transition of the game state, and the flow of effects is divided. For this reason, for the player, there is a possibility that the flow of the game will be divided and the interest may be cut off, and it can not be said that the interest improvement in this point is sufficiently achieved. There is room for improvement.

  As described above, the present invention can be suitably used for gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines.

10: Pachinko machine, 25b: push button, 35: general winning opening, 36: first starting opening, 37: second starting opening, 38: variable winning device, 38a: large winning opening, 38b: opening and closing door, 38c: variable Winning drive unit 39: out port 51: symbol display device 57, 57B1, 57B2: touch sensor 60: main control device 62: MPU, 90: sound emission control device 92: MPU, 100: display control device , 102 ... MPU.

Claims (3)

Transition means for transitioning the gaming state from the first gaming state to a second gaming state different from the first gaming state;
And reproduction control means for reproducing the music in the second gaming state.
The reproduction control means
A gaming machine characterized by reproducing music from the second gaming state when the ending period of the first gaming state is shorter than the reproduction time of the intro portion of the music. It comprises an operation means for receiving a selection of the effect type of the second gaming state,
The reproduction control means
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the music is reproduced from the second gaming state according to a timing at which an effect type of the second gaming state is selected. The reproduction control means
If the playing time of the intro part of the music is shorter than the remaining time of the ending period of the first gaming state after the effect type of the second gaming state is selected, the music is reproduced from the second gaming state The gaming machine according to claim 2, characterized in that.

Images